1. 《闻所成智详解》的注释巴利 1. Sutamayañāṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
3. 慧品义注 · 568 段
解答总说的注释巴利
Vissajjanuddesavaṇṇanā
1 现在,为了按照前面安立的总说来分类展示所摄集的诸法,开始了解说分:“如何于倾听中,慧是闻所成智”等。其中,所说的“于倾听中,慧是闻所成智”,这是怎么回事呢?这是想要说明的提问。问确实有五种:未见解明问、已见合和问、断疑问、同意问、想说问。它们的差别如下:巴利
1. Idāni yathānikkhittena uddesena saṅgahite dhamme pabhedato dassetuṃ kathaṃ sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇantiādi niddesavāro āraddho. Tattha yaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti , taṃ kathaṃ hotīti? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā – adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā, vimaticchedanāpucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tāsaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ –
什么是“未见而求阐明”的提问?从本质上说,某个特征还不被知道、还不被看见、还不被衡量、还不被判断、还不清楚、还不明了,为了知道它、看见它、衡量它、判断它、让它清楚、让它明了而提问,这就是“未见而求阐明”的提问。巴利
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是“已见对照之问”?按照事物的本性,它的特征已经被知道、被看见、被衡量、被判断、变得清楚、被清楚地了解,他为了和其他有智慧的人一起对照验证而提问,这就是“已见对照之问”。巴利
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, so aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是断疑之问?有人本性上就陷在疑惑里,陷在犹豫里,心存两端:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?是什么?怎么样?”他为了断除疑惑而发问,这就是断疑之问。巴利
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? (Mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12) pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, nanu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti? So vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā.
什么是征询同意之问?世尊为了征得比丘们的同意而提问:“比丘们,你们认为怎样?色是常的还是无常的?”
“无常,尊者。”
“那无常的东西是苦还是乐?”
“苦,尊者。”
“那无常、苦、会变坏的东西,适合这样看待吗——‘这是我的,这就是我,这是我的我’?”
“尊者,不适合。”这就是征询同意之问。巴利
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti? ‘‘Aniccaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Yaṃ panāniccaṃ, dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vā’’ti? ‘‘Dukkhaṃ, bhante’’. ‘‘Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ, kallaṃ nu taṃ samanupassituṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti? ‘‘No hetaṃ, bhante’’ti (mahāva. 21), ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么样的问法叫做“想说法而问”?世尊因为想为比丘们说法,就向他们提问:“比丘们,有四种念处。是哪四种呢?”这就是想说法而问。在这些问法当中,应当知道这是长老想说法而问。巴利
Katamā kathetukamyatāpucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome , bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.390)? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti. Tāsu ayaṃ therassa kathetukamyatāpucchāti veditabbā.
现在,针对想要宣说总纲而提问,有十六种解答概要,即“这些法应证知——倾听,那了知之慧是闻所成智”等。其中,“这些法应证知”省略了“正在说法者”。当世尊,或某位可尊敬的同梵行者正在说法时,依照前面所说的方法去倾听、去听闻,就称为倾听。那了知之慧,即对所听闻的内容加以抉择、分辨的慧,称为闻所成智,这就是它的含义。“它的了知”即“那了知”,是一个属格复合词;或者,“那了知”是由于格位变化而成为对格。“应证知”,是指通过明了自性相,以善巧的方式了知。“应遍知”,是指通过明了共相,以及通过圆满成就所应作,而全面地了知。“应修习”,指应增长。“应证得”,指应现前。因为证得有两种:获得证得和所缘证得。由于依与善法相反的现行,而归于名为退的退失,所以称为退分;由于依随顺彼法的念而安住,归于名为住的住立,所以称为住分;由于依获得更上的殊胜,归于殊胜,所以称为殊胜分。圣道能穿透、能打破从前未被穿透、未被打破的贪蕴、嗔蕴、痴蕴,所以称为刺破;由于依伴随厌离之想与作意的现行,而归于那刺破,所以称为刺破分。巴利
Idāni samātikuddesāya kathetukamyatāpucchāya ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti sotāvadhānaṃ, taṃpajānanā paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’ntiādayo soḷasa vissajjanuddesā. Tattha ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti ‘‘desayantassā’’ti pāṭhaseso. Ime dhammā abhijānitabbāti satthuno, aññatarassa vā garuṭṭhāniyassa sabrahmacārissa dhammaṃ desayantassa pubbe vuttanayena sotāvadhānaṃ sutaṃ sotāvadhānaṃ nāma. Taṃpajānanā paññā tassa sutassa pajānanā pariyāyaparicchindakapaññā sutamaye ñāṇaṃ nāmāti attho. Tassa pajānanā taṃpajānanāti sāmivacanasamāso. Taṃ pajānanāti vibhattivipallāsavasena upayogavacanaṃ vā. Abhiññeyyāti ca sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena sobhanenākārena jānitabbā. Pariññeyyāti sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena kiccasamāpanavasena ca byāpitvā jānitabbā. Bhāvetabbāti vaḍḍhetabbā. Sacchikātabbāti paccakkhaṃ kātabbā. Duvidhā hi sacchikiriyā paṭilābhasacchikiriyā ārammaṇasacchikiriyā ca. Paccanīkasamudācāravasena parihāniyasaṅkhātaṃ hānaṃ bhajantīti hānabhāgiyā. Tadanudhammatāya satiyā saṇṭhānavasena ṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhitiṃ bhajantīti ṭhitibhāgiyā. Uparivisesādhigamavasena visesaṃ bhajantīti visesabhāgiyā. Anibbiddhapubbaṃ appadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ dosakkhandhaṃ mohakkhandhaṃ nibbijjhati padāletīti ariyamaggo nibbedho nāma, nibbidāsahagatānaṃ saññāmanasikārānaṃ samudācāravasena taṃ nibbedhaṃ bhajantīti nibbedhabhāgiyā.
“一切诸行”指的是所有有因有缘的法。它们确实被称为“有为行”。因为是被各种条件聚合造作出来的,所以叫“行”;正由于它们是由各种条件聚合而成的,所以特别称为“有为”。注释书里把业所生的三地色法和无色法称为“已造作之行”,它们也归入“诸行无常”等所说的有为行之中。在“比丘们,这个被无明笼罩的人,造作福行……”等经文里,以无明为缘而生的行,也就是三地的善与不善的思,称为“能造作之行”。在“造作能走多远,就走了那么远,像撞到车轴一样停住”等文句里,提到的身体和心的精进努力,称为“方便造作”。在“贤友毗舍佉,进入想受灭定的比丘,首先语行灭,然后身行灭,再然后心行灭”等文句里,提到的寻与伺是“语行”——因为它们造作语言;出入息是“身行”——因为它们由身体造作;想与受是“心行”——因为它们由心造作。但在这里,指的是“有为行”。巴利
Sabbe saṅkhārāti sabbe sappaccayā dhammā. Te hi saṅkhatasaṅkhārā nāma. Paccayehi saṅgamma karīyantīti saṅkhārā, te eva paccayehi saṅgamma katattā saṅkhatāti visesetvā vuttā. Kammanibbattā tebhūmakarūpārūpadhammā abhisaṅkhatasaṅkhārāti aṭṭhakathāsu (visuddhi. 2.587; vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa) vuttā. Tepi ‘‘aniccā va saṅkhārā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.186; 2.143; dī. ni. 2.221, 272) saṅkhatasaṅkhāresu saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Avijjāgato ayaṃ, bhikkhave, purisapuggalo puññañceva saṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāva āgatā tebhūmikakusalākusalacetanā abhisaṅkharaṇakasaṅkhārā nāma. ‘‘Yāvatikā abhisaṅkhārassa gati, tāvatikaṃ gantvā akkhāhataṃ maññe aṭṭhāsī’’tiādīsu āgataṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ payogābhisaṅkhāro nāma. ‘‘Saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassa kho, āvuso visākha, bhikkhuno paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāro, tato kāyasaṅkhāro, tato cittasaṅkhāro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.464) āgatā vitakkavicārā. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Assāsapassāsā kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Saññā ca vedanā ca cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā. Idha pana saṅkhatasaṅkhārā adhippetā.
“无常”,意思是生起之后就不存在。“苦”,意思是逼迫。“一切法”,这是把涅槃也包括在内而说的。“无我”,意思是没有自主性。在“此是苦圣谛”等说法里,本来应该说“苦的集”“苦的灭”,却说成“苦集”“苦灭”,这是语法上性数格的颠倒。不过,因为佛陀等圣者们证悟了它们,所以称为圣谛。正如经中所说:“比丘们,有这四圣谛……比丘们,这些就是四圣谛。圣者们证悟这些,因此称为圣谛。”也可以理解为“圣者的真谛”,所以叫圣谛。如说:“在包括天人的世间……如来是圣者,因此称为圣谛。”又因为如实彻底证悟这些而成就了圣者的身份,所以也是圣谛。如说:“比丘们,因为如实彻底证悟这四圣谛,如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者被称为圣者。”也可以理解为“圣性的真谛”,所以叫圣谛。“圣”就是不虚妄、不欺诳的意思。如说:“比丘们,这四圣谛是真实的、不虚妄的、不改变的,因此称为圣谛。”那么“谛”的真实含义是什么呢?用智慧眼观察时,它不像幻术那样颠倒,不像阳焰那样欺诳,也不像外道所构想的那样根本没有真实存在;相反,它以逼迫、生起、寂静、出离的方式,以真实不虚、非颠倒的状态,成为圣者智慧的所缘境。这种真实不虚、非颠倒的状态,就像火的热性、世间的常态一样,应当知道就是“谛”的真实含义。如经中详细说:“比丘们,这是苦,这是真实的、不虚妄的、不改变的。”再者——巴利
Aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena. Dukkhāti pīḷanaṭṭhena. Sabbe dhammāti nibbānampi antokatvā vuttā. Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena. Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccantiādīsu ‘‘dukkhasamudayo dukkhanirodho’’ti vattabbe ‘‘dukkhasamudayaṃ dukkhanirodha’’nti liṅgavipallāso kato. Yasmā pana buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccanti. Yathāha ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, ariyasaccāni…pe… imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri ariyasaccāni. Ariyā imāni paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti. Ariyassa saccānītipi ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘sadevake loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato ariyo, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1098). Etesaṃ abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhitopi ariyasaccāni. Yathāha ‘‘imesaṃ kho, bhikkhave, catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho ariyoti vuccatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1093). Ariyāni saccānītipi ariyasaccāni. Ariyānīti avitathāni, avisaṃvādakānīti attho. Yathāha ‘‘imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri ariyasaccāni tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni, tasmā ariyasaccānīti vuccantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1097). Saccānīti ko saccaṭṭhoti ce? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīcīva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ parikappitaattāva anupalabbhasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanapabhavasantiniyyānappakārena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hotiyeva. Esa aggilakkhaṇaṃ viya lokapakati viya ca tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvo saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Yathāha ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti, bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Apica –
苦非不逼迫,是故苦逼迫;苦外余诸法,皆非逼迫者。
依逼迫性之定律,是故此义名为真。
若无渴爱,苦不从他处生;此苦亦非不从彼生;
渴爱为苦因,是为定则;此即谛实,此即系缚。
除了涅槃,没有别的寂静;因为那(涅槃)并非不寂静。
通过寂静的显现规律,因此这被认为是真理。
除了道,没有别的出离;而它本身也不是不出离。
由于真实出离之性质,所以它被认为是真理。
四谛皆真实不颠倒,
苦等无别,智者说为谛义。巴利
Nābādhakaṃ yato dukkhaṃ, dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ; Bādhakattaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Taṃ vinā nāññato dukkhaṃ, na hoti na ca taṃ tato; Dukkhahetu niyāmena, iti saccaṃ visattikā. Nāññā nibbānato santi, santaṃ na ca na taṃ yato; Santabhāvaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Maggā aññaṃ na niyyānaṃ, aniyyāno na cāpi so; Tacchaniyyānabhāvena, iti so saccasammato. Iti tacchāvipallāsa-bhūtabhāvaṃ catūsvapi; Dukkhādīsvavisesena, saccaṭṭhaṃ āhu paṇḍitāti.
不过,这个“sacca”一词出现在多种含义中。比如“应当说真话,不应发怒”等句中,指的是言语之谛。“安住于谛的沙门婆罗门”等句中,指的是离妄语之谛。“为何人们说种种谛,自称善说者”等句中,指的是见解之谛。“谛只有一个,没有第二个,了知者不会因此与人争论”等句中,指的是究竟义之谛,即涅槃与道。“四谛中哪些是善、哪些是不善”等句中,指的是圣谛。而在这里,它也是用在圣谛的含义上。巴利
So panāyaṃ saccasaddo anekesu atthesu dissati. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 224) vācāsacce. ‘‘Sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.21.433) viratisacce. ‘‘Kasmā nu saccāni vadanti nānā, pavādiyāse kusalāvadānā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 891) diṭṭhisacce. ‘‘Ekañhi saccaṃ na dutīyamatthi, yasmiṃ pajā no vivade pajāna’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 890; mahāni. 119) paramatthasacce nibbāne ceva magge ca. ‘‘Catunnaṃ saccānaṃ kati kusalā kati akusalā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 216) ariyasacce. Svāyamidhāpi ariyasacce pavattatīti.
应遍知解说的注释巴利
Abhiññeyyaniddesavaṇṇanā
2 现在,为了按类别说明那些被收在回答式论题里的法,就开始了“这些法应当如何被遍知”等这一解说部分。其中,在应遍知解说等五种解说里,从最初开始,按一法、二法这样的方式,各有十种回答,再依照《十上经》的次第配合起来列出。在这些当中,先说应遍知解说里的“一切众生”:这是指在欲有、想有、一蕴有等一切有中的一切众生。“依食而住”:他们的存在依靠食物,所以叫依食而住。这里说的“住”,是指在各自那一刹那中的存在。因此,作为一切众生存在之因的食这一法,应当以更高的智慧去了知。因为一旦了知了缘,缘所生的法也就被了知了,这两者是互相观待的。这样就说了“知遍知”。那么,这样一来,岂不是和“无想有情天无因、无食、无触”等说法相矛盾吗?并不矛盾。因为对那些众生来说,禅那就是他们的食。即使这样,那又岂不是和“比丘们,有四种食,能使已生的众生住立,也能帮助寻求再生的众生。哪四种?段食,或粗或细;第二是触食;第三是意思食;第四是识食”这段经文相矛盾吗?这也不矛盾。因为在那部经里,是直接按食的特相来说诸法为食。而在这里,则是间接地把缘说为食。因为一切有为法都可以有缘,而那个缘产生什么果,就摄持什么果,所以叫食。因此才这样说:巴利
2. Idāni vissajjanuddesasaṅgahite dhamme pabhedato dassetuṃ kathaṃ ime dhammā abhiññeyyātiādi niddesavāro āraddho. Tattha abhiññeyyaniddesādīsu pañcasu ādito ekakādivasena dasa dasa vissajjanāni dasuttarapariyāyena saṃsandetvā uddiṭṭhāni. Tesu abhiññeyyaniddese tāva sabbe sattāti kāmabhavādīsu saññābhavādīsu ekavokārabhavādīsu ca sabbabhavesu sabbe sattā. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā. Ṭhitīti cettha sakakkhaṇe atthitā adhippetā. Iti sabbasattānaṃ ṭhitihetu āhāro nā eko dhammo adhikena ñāṇena jānitabbo. Paccaye hi abhiññāte paccayuppannāpi abhiññātā honti ubhinnampi aññamaññāpekkhattā. Etena ñātapariññā vuttā hoti. Nanu ca evaṃ sante yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘asaññasattā devā ahetukā anāhārā aphassakā’’tiādi (vibha. 1017), taṃ virujjhatīti. Tañca na virujjhati. Tesañhi jhānaṃ āhāroti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā, sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro? Kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṃ catuttha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) idaṃ virujjhatīti. Idampi na virujjhati. Etasmiñhi sutte nippariyāyena āhāralakkhaṇāva dhammā āhārāti vuttā. Idha pana pariyāyena paccayo āhāroti vutto. Sabbasaṅkhatadhammānañhi paccayo laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, so ca yaṃ yaṃ phalaṃ janeti, taṃ taṃ āharati nāma. Tasmā āhāroti vuccati. Tenevāha –
比丘们,我说无明是有食的,不说它没有食。比丘们,什么是无明的食呢?应该回答:五盖。比丘们,我说五盖是有食的,不说它们没有食。比丘们,什么是五盖的食呢?应该回答:不恰当作意。这就是这里所指的意思。巴利
‘‘Avijjampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāraṃ vadāmi, no anāhāraṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya āhāro? ‘Pañca nīvaraṇā’tissa vacanīyaṃ. Pañca nīvaraṇepāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāre vadāmi, no anāhāre. Ko ca, bhikkhave, pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ āhāro. ‘Ayoniso manasikāro’tissa vacanīya’’ntiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Ayaṃ idha adhippeto.
在这当中,一旦把握了缘食,那么无论是方便食还是直接食,全部都一并把握了。巴利
Etasmiñhi paccayāhāre gahite pariyāyāhāropi nippariyāyāhāropi sabbo gahitova hoti.
在这里,无想有中的众生也可以得到缘食。在佛陀还没有出世的时候,有人在外道的修行场所出家,以风遍作为所缘来修预备行,证得第四禅,从那里出定后,生起这样的认可和意乐:“呸,心!呸,心!心不存在才是好的。因为依靠心,才会生起杀、缚等缘所引生的苦;如果没有心,这些苦就不会有。”他保持着不退失的禅那命终,便投生到无想有中。他在人间习惯用哪种姿势,就以那种姿势投生,并在五百劫中安住。在这么长的时间里,他就像躺着、像坐着、像站着一样。像这样的众生,也可以得到缘食。因为他们修习禅那而投生,那个禅那就是他们的缘。就像被弓弦的力量射出的箭,只要弓弦的力量还在,就会一直飞行;同样,只要禅那这个缘还在,他们就一直存在。当这个缘结束时,他们就像箭的力量耗尽一样坠落下来。巴利
Tattha asaññabhave paccayāhāro labbhati. Anuppanne hi buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘dhī cittaṃ, dhī cittaṃ, cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu. Cittañhi nissāya vadhabandhanādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, citte asati nattheta’’nti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃkatvā asaññabhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā pañca kappasatāni tiṭṭhati. Ettakaṃ addhānaṃ nipanno viya nisinno viya ṭhito viya hoti. Evarūpānañca sattānaṃ paccayāhāro labbhati. Te hi yaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvetvā nibbattā , tade nesaṃ paccayo hoti. Yathā jiyāvegena khittasaro yāva jiyāvego atthi, tāva gacchati, evaṃ yāva jhānapaccayo atthi, tāva tiṭṭhanti. Tasmiṃ niṭṭhite khīṇavego saro viya patanti.
那些被称为“不靠勤勉之果活命、不靠福德之果活命”的地狱众生,他们以什么为食呢?他们的业本身就是他们的食。是不是有五种食呢?不能说“是五种,不是五种”。既然已经说过“缘就是食”,那么使他们投生到地狱的那份业,正是他们得以持续存在的缘,所以那就是他们的食。针对这一点,才有这样的说法:“只要那恶业还没有耗尽,他们就还不会死。”因此,“以食而存续”的意思就是“以缘而存续”。在这里,不应该就段食这件事起争论。因为就连他们口中生出的唾液,也能起到食的作用。唾液在地狱里成为苦受的缘,在天界则成为乐受的缘。这样一来,在欲界中,完全具备四种食;在色界和无色界中,除了无想有情之外,其余众生具备三种食;至于无想有情以及其他众生,则是以缘为食。靠着这种食,一切众生都以食而存续。巴利
Ye pana te nerayikā ‘‘nevuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvino na puññaphalūpajīvino’’ti vuttā, tesaṃ ko āhāroti? Tesaṃ kammameva āhāroti. Kiṃ pañca āhārā atthīti? ‘‘Pañca, na pañcā’’ti idaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Nanu ‘‘paccayo āhāro’’ti vutto, tasmā yena kammena te niraye nibbattā, tadeva tesaṃ ṭhitipaccayattā āhāro. Yaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na tāva kālaṃ karoti, yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.36; ma. ni. 3.250). Tasmā āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikāti attho. Kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ ārabbhāti cettha vivādo na kātabbo. Mukhe uppannakheḷopi hi tesaṃ āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Kheḷo hi niraye dukkhavedanīyo hutvā paccayo hoti, sagge sukhavedanīyo. Iti kāmabhave nippariyāyena cattāro āhārā, rūpārūpabhavesu ṭhapetvā asaññabhavaṃ sesānaṃ tayo , asaññānañceva avasesānañca paccayāhāroti iminā āhārena sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā.
“一切众生”这种说法,是以人为立足点来说法,真正的用意是指“一切行”。对世尊来说,依据法和人,说法有四种:以法为立足点说法,以法为立足点说人,以人为立足点说人,以人为立足点说法。比如“比丘们,我看不到有哪一种法像心这样,经过修习就变得柔软好用。比丘们,心经过修习就变得柔软好用”,这类就是以法为立足点说法。比如“比丘们,见具足的人把任何行执为常,这是不可能的,没有这个道理”,这类就是以法为立足点说人。比如“比丘们,一个人出现在世间,是为了大众的利益、大众的安乐、对世间的怜悯、为了天人的利益和安乐”,这类就是以人为立足点说人。比如“比丘们,一个人的出现,就是大眼的出现”,这类就是以人为立足点说法。在这些当中,这里是以人为立足点说法。要知道,因为上面一直到十法都只取了法,所以说取众生其实就是取法;或者更特别地说,因为应当用更殊胜的智慧,对属于众生相续的法从自性上加以观察,所以说取众生;又或者,依诸行而施设“众生”只是假名,因此以果来代称,把诸行说为“众生”。因为除了诸行之外,并没有任何依缘而立的众生,只是随顺世俗说法才这样说。这样就说明了已知遍知。巴利
Sabbe sattāti ca puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, sabbe saṅkhārāti adhippāyo. Bhagavatopi hi dhammapuggalānaṃ vasena catubbidhā desanā – dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā, dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā, puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanāti. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ bhāvitaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti, yathayidaṃ cittaṃ. Cittaṃ, bhikkhave, bhāvitaṃ kammaniyaṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 1.22) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.268) evarūpī dhammādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussāna’’nti (a. ni. 1.170, 309), evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā puggaladesanā. ‘‘Ekapuggalassa bhikkhave, pātubhāvā mahato cakkhussa pātubhāvo hotī’’ti (a. ni. 1.175-186) evarūpī puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā. Tāsu idha puggalādhiṭṭhānā dhammadesanā . Upari yāva dasakā dhammānaṃyeva gahitattā sattaggahaṇena dhammaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, visesena vā sattasantānapariyāpannadhammānaṃyeva adhikena ñāṇena sabhāvato upaparikkhitabbattā sattaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ, saṅkhāre upādāya sattoti paññattimattasambhavato vā phalopacārena saṅkhārā ‘‘sattā’’ti vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Na hi koci satto paccayaṭṭhitiko atthi aññatra saṅkhārehi, vohāravasena pana evaṃ vuccati. Evametena ñātapariññā vuttā hoti.
“二界”:就是有为界和无为界。其中,由种种缘和合而造作出来的五蕴,是有为界;非由任何缘所造作而成的涅槃,是无为界。巴利
Dve dhātuyoti saṅkhatā ca dhātu asaṅkhatā ca dhātu. Tattha anekehi paccayehi saṅgamma katā pañcakkhandhā saṅkhatā dhātu, kehici paccayehi akataṃ nibbānaṃ asaṅkhatā dhātu.
三界:欲界、色界、无色界(《分别论》181-182)。其中,什么是欲界?从最下面的无间地狱算起,到最上面的他化自在天为止,在这范围之内,属于此处的、摄于此处的蕴、界、处——色、受、想、行、识,这称为欲界(《分别论》182;《法集论》1287)。其中,什么是色界?从最下面的梵天世界算起,到最上面的色究竟天为止,在这范围之内,属于此处的、摄于此处的,无论是入定者的、投生者的,还是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为色界。其中,什么是无色界?从最下面的空无边处天算起,到最上面的非想非非想处天为止,在这范围之内,属于此处的、摄于此处的,无论是入定者的、投生者的,还是现法乐住者的心与心所法,这称为无色界。不过,在注释书中这样说:“欲界就是欲有,可以得到五蕴;色界就是色有,可以得到五蕴;无色界就是无色有,可以得到四蕴。”这是按照《十上经》的方式进行的搭配。巴利
Tisso dhātuyoti kāmadhātu rūpadhātu arūpadhātu (vibha. 181-182). Tattha katamā kāmadhātu? Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito paranimmitavasavattī deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā khandhā dhātū āyatanā rūpā vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati kāmadhātu (vibha. 182; dha. sa. 1287). Tattha katamā rūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito akaniṭṭhe deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā. Ayaṃ vuccati rūpadhātu. Tattha katamā arūpadhātu? Heṭṭhato ākāsānañcāyatanūpage deve pariyantaṃ karitvā uparito nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpage deve antokaritvā yaṃ etasmiṃ antare etthāvacarā ettha pariyāpannā samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā cittacetasikā dhammā. Ayaṃ vuccati arūpadhātu. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāmadhātūti kāmabhavo pañcakkhandhā labbhanti, rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo pañcakkhandhā labbhanti. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo cattāro khandhā labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ dasuttarapariyāyena yojanā.
按照《等诵经》的讲法,还有另外三善界:出离界、无嗔界、无害界。另外还有三界:色界、无色界、灭界。另外还有三界:下劣界、中界、殊胜界(《长部》1.3.305)。这些界在这里也同样适用(《分别论》181-182)。与出离相应的寻、伺……乃至正思惟,这称为出离界。一切善法都是出离界。与无嗔相应的寻、伺……乃至正思惟,是无嗔界。对众生所起的慈、慈爱、慈的状态、慈心解脱,这称为无嗔界。与无害相应的寻、伺……乃至正思惟,是无害界。对众生所起的悲、悲悯、悲的状态、悲心解脱,这称为无害界(《分别论》182)。色界和无色界如前文所说。灭界就是涅槃。下劣界指十二种不善心的生起;中界指其余属于三界的诸法;殊胜界指九种出世间法。而这一切,都因为无命之义,所以称为界。巴利
Saṅgītipariyāyena pana ‘‘tisso kusaladhātuyo – nekkhammadhātu abyāpādadhātu avihiṃsādhātu. Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo – rūpadhātu arūpadhātu nirodhadhātu. Aparāpi tisso dhātuyo – hīnā dhātu majjhimā dhātu paṇītā dhātū’’ti (dī. ni. 1.3.305) vuttā dhātuyopi ettha yujjanti (vibha. 181-182). Nekkhammapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo. Ayaṃ vuccati nekkhammadhātu. Sabbepi kusalā dhammā nekkhammadhātu. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo abyāpādadhātu. Yā sattesu metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettācetovimutti. Ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko…pe… sammāsaṅkappo avihiṃsādhātu. Yā sattesu karuṇā karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇācetovimutti. Ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātu (vibha. 182). Rūpārūpadhātuyo vuttāyeva. Nirodhadhātu nibbānaṃ. Hīnā dhātu dvādasākusalacittuppādā, majjhimā dhātu avasesā tebhūmakadhammā. Paṇītā dhātu nava lokuttaradhammā. Sabbāpi ca nijjīvaṭṭhena dhātu.
所谓四圣谛,就是:苦圣谛、苦集圣谛、苦灭圣谛、导向苦灭的道圣谛。这些的解释,将在解说圣谛的部分里说明。巴利
Cattāri ariyasaccānīti dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhasamudayaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ. Imesaṃ vaṇṇanā saccavissajjanesuyeva bhavissati.
所谓五种解脱处,就是:为了自己的利益而听闻别人说法;为了别人的利益而把自己听来的法讲给别人听;对自己听来的法加以读诵;用自己的心去反复思考听来的法;以及以遍处、不净等作为随顺的所缘。这五种就是解脱的原因。正如经中所说:巴利
Pañca vimuttāyatanānīti attano hitatthāya parehi pavattitadhammadesanāsavanaṃ, paresaṃ hitatthāya attano yathāsutadhammadesanā, yathāsutassa dhammassa sajjhāyakaraṇaṃ, yathāsutassa dhammassa cetasā anuvitakkanaṃ, kasiṇāsubhādīsu anukūlaṃ ārammaṇanti, imāni pañca vimuccanakāraṇāni. Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘的导师,或者某位受人尊敬的同梵行者,为他宣说法。比丘们,导师或某位受人尊敬的同梵行者怎样为这位比丘宣说法,他就怎样在那法中体会到义、体会到法。当他体会到义、体会到法时,欢悦就生起;欢悦之后,喜就生起;内心有喜之后,身体就变得轻安;身体轻安之后,就感受到乐;有乐之后,心就入定。这是第一种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī ca, tassa atthapaṭisaṃvedino dhammapaṭisaṃvedino pāmojjaṃ jāyati, pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,又有另一种情况:比丘不是由导师为他宣说法,也不是由某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他宣说法,而是把自己所听闻、所掌握的法,详细地为别人宣说。比丘们,随着他如实地、如所掌握地宣说那个法,他对这个法就有了义上的体证和法上的体证。有了义上的体证和法上的体证,欢悦就生起;欢悦了,喜悦就生起;心里喜悦,身体就轻安;身体轻安,就感受到乐;感受到乐,心就入定。这是第二种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno na heva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,还有第三种情况:一位比丘既没有导师为他说法,也没有某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法,他自己也不把所听闻、所学的法详细地为他人宣说,但他把所听闻、所学的法详细地读诵。比丘们,当他这样读诵时……内心快乐而得定。这是第三种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,又有一种情况:既没有导师为比丘说法,也没有某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法;他也没有把从听闻、学习得来的法详细地为别人宣说;他也没有把从听闻、学习得来的法详细地读诵;但他把从听闻、学习得来的法用心反复思考、反复观察,用意仔细审视。比丘们,当比丘这样用心审视法时……内心安乐而得定。这是第四种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti, api ca kho yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati. Yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno…pe… sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ catutthaṃ vimuttāyatanaṃ.
比丘们,又有一种情况:比丘不是由导师为他说法,也不是由某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他说法;他也没有把所听闻、所掌握的法详细地讲给别人听;也没有详细地背诵所听闻、所掌握的法;也没有用内心反复思考、反复观察、以意仔细审察所听闻、所掌握的法。但是,他对某个定相已经很好地把握、很好地作意、很好地持守、以智慧很好地通达。比丘们,比丘对某个定相把握得越好、作意得越好、持守得越好、以智慧通达得越好,他就越能在那个法上体会到义理,也体会到法。当他体会到义理、体会到法时,就生起欢悦;欢悦了就生起喜;心里有喜,身体就变得轻安;身体轻安,就感受到乐;有乐,心就入定。这是第五种解脱处。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno naheva kho satthā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniyo sabrahmacārī, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena paresaṃ deseti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ vitthārena sajjhāyaṃ karoti, nāpi yathāsutaṃ yathāpariyattaṃ dhammaṃ cetasā anuvitakketi anuvicāreti manasānupekkhati, api ca khvassa aññataraṃ samādhinimittaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti sumanasikataṃ sūpadhāritaṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāya, yathā yathā kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno aññataraṃ samādhinimittaṃ suggahitaṃ hoti sumanasikataṃ sūpadhāritaṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāya tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme atthapaṭisaṃvedī ca hoti dhammapaṭisaṃvedī ca. Tassa atthapaṭisaṃvedino dhammapaṭisaṃvedino pāmojjaṃ jāyati , pamuditassa pīti jāyati, pītimanassa kāyo passambhati, passaddhakāyo sukhaṃ vedeti, sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati. Idaṃ pañcamaṃ vimuttāyatana’’nti (a. ni. 5.26; dī. ni. 3.322).
这里说的“六种无上”:在这些当中,没有比它们更高的,所以叫“无上”;它们本身就是无上,也就是最殊胜的意思。世尊确实这样说过——巴利
Cha anuttariyānīti ettha natthi etesaṃ uttaranti anuttarāni, anuttarāni eva anuttariyāni, jeṭṭhakānīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有六种无上。哪六种呢?见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上、侍奉无上、随念无上。巴利
‘‘Chayimāni (a. ni. 6.8, 30), bhikkhave, anuttariyāni. Katamāni cha? Dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ, anussatānuttariyanti.
比丘们,什么是见无上?比丘们,在这里,有些人为了看象宝而出门,为了看马宝而出门,为了看珠宝而出门,或者为了看各种高低贵贱的东西而出门,或者为了见持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门而出门。比丘们,这确实也是一种见,我不会说它不存在。但是,比丘们,这种见是低劣的、粗俗的、凡夫的、非圣的、没有利益的,不导向厌离,不导向离欲,不导向灭尽,不导向寂止,不导向证智,不导向正觉,不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人怀着坚定深厚的信心、坚定深厚的敬爱、一心归向、完全净信,为了见如来或如来的弟子而出门——比丘们,这才是见中最无上的,能让众生清净,超越愁悲,灭除苦忧,证达正道,作证涅槃,也就是:怀着坚定深厚的信心、坚定深厚的敬爱、一心归向、完全净信,为了见如来或如来的弟子而出门。比丘们,这称为见无上。这就是见无上。巴利
‘‘Katamañca, bhikkhave, dassanānuttariyaṃ? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco hatthiratanampi dassanāya gacchati, assaratanampi dassanāya gacchati, maṇiratanampi dassanāya gacchati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana dassanāya gacchati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ dassanāya gacchati. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmi. Tañca kho etaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanaṃ hīnaṃ gammaṃ pothujjanikaṃ anariyaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ na nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya na upasamāya na abhiññāya na sambodhāya na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā dassanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, dassanānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāya dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāya ñāyassa adhigamāya nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā dassanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, dassanānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ.
比丘们,什么是闻无上呢?在这里,比丘们,有些人为了听鼓声而去,为了听琴声而去,为了听歌声而去,或者为了听各种高低不同的声音而去;也有人为了听法,而去找持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种听,我不会说这种听不存在。但是,比丘们,这种听是低劣的……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人怀着深植的信心、深植的爱敬、一心归向、极度清净的信心,为了听法而去找如来或如来的弟子——比丘们,这就是听中的无上,能让众生清净……能作证涅槃,也就是怀着深植的信心、深植的爱敬、一心归向、极度清净的信心,为了听法而去找如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这称为闻无上。以上就是见无上、闻无上。巴利
‘‘Savanānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco bherisaddampi savanāya gacchati, vīṇāsaddampi savanāya gacchati, gītasaddampi savanāya gacchati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana savanāya gacchati, samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā micchādiṭṭhikassa micchāpaṭipannassa dhammassavanāya gacchati. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, savanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmi . Tañca kho etaṃ, bhikkhave, savanaṃ hīnaṃ…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammassavanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, savanānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgatassa vā tathāgatasāvakassa vā dhammassavanāya gacchati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, savanānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ.
比丘们,什么是无上的获得呢?在这里,有些人得到儿子,得到妻子,得到财富,或者得到各种各样的东西;或者对持有邪见、行持邪道的沙门或婆罗门生起信心。比丘们,这也是一种获得,我不是说它不存在。但比丘们,这种获得是低劣的……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人对如来或如来的弟子生起信心,信心坚定,敬爱坚定,完全归向,极度清净信——比丘们,这在各种获得中是无上的,能让众生清净……能证得涅槃,也就是对如来或如来的弟子生起信心,信心坚定,敬爱坚定,完全归向,极度清净信。比丘们,这称为无上的获得。这样,就是见无上、闻无上、得无上。巴利
‘‘Lābhānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puttalābhampi labhati, dāralābhampi labhati, dhanalābhampi labhati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana lābhampi labhati. Samaṇe vā brāhmaṇe vā micchādiṭṭhike micchāpaṭipanne saddhaṃ paṭilabhati. Attheso, bhikkhave, lābho, neso natthīti vadāmi. So ca kho eso, bhikkhave, lābho hīno…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgate vā tathāgatasāvake vā saddhaṃ paṭilabhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, lābhānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgate vā tathāgatasāvake vā saddhaṃ paṭilabhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, lābhānuttariyaṃ . Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ.
比丘们,什么是修学无上呢?在这里,有些人学习骑象,学习骑马,学习驾车,学习射箭,学习刀术,或者学习各种高低不同的技艺;或者向持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门学习。比丘们,这也是一种修学,我不说它不存在。但是,比丘们,这种修学是卑下的……中略……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,在如来所宣说的法与律中,修学增上戒,修学增上心,修学增上慧——比丘们,这在各种修学中是无上的,能令众生清净……中略……证得涅槃,也就是以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、全然归向、极其明净的信心,在如来所宣说的法与律中,修学增上戒,修学增上心,修学增上慧。比丘们,这称为修学无上。如此,有见无上、闻无上、得无上、修学无上。巴利
‘‘Sikkhānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco hatthismimpi sikkhati, assasmimpi sikkhati, rathasmimpi sikkhati, dhanusmimpi sikkhati, tharusmimpi sikkhati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana sikkhati, samaṇassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā micchādiṭṭhikassa micchāpaṭipannassa sikkhati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, sikkhā, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, sikkhā hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave , sikkhānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgatappavedite dhammavinaye adhisīlampi sikkhati, adhicittampi sikkhati, adhipaññampi sikkhati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sikkhānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ.
什么是侍奉无上呢?比丘们,在这里,有些人侍奉刹帝利,也侍奉婆罗门,也侍奉居士,或者侍奉各种高低不同的人;或者侍奉持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种侍奉,我不说它不存在。然而,比丘们,这种侍奉是卑下的……乃至……不导向涅槃。而比丘们,如果有人以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度明净的信心,侍奉如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这在种种侍奉中是无上的,为了众生的清净……乃至……为了作证涅槃,也就是以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度明净的信心,侍奉如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这称为侍奉无上。如此,有见无上、闻无上、得无上、学无上、侍奉无上。巴利
‘‘Pāricariyānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco khattiyampi paricarati, brāhmaṇampi paricarati, gahapatimpi paricarati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana paricarati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ paricarati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, pāricariyā, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, pāricariyā hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā paricarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, pāricariyānaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā paricarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ. Iti dassanānuttariyaṃ, savanānuttariyaṃ, lābhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhānuttariyaṃ, pāricariyānuttariyaṃ.
什么是随念无上呢?比丘们,在这里,有些人随念得到儿子,随念得到妻子,随念得到财物,或者随念各种高低不同的事物,或者随念持邪见、行邪道的沙门或婆罗门。比丘们,这确实是一种随念,我不说它不存在。但是,比丘们,这种随念是低劣的……不导向涅槃。比丘们,如果有人以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度净信,随念如来或如来的弟子,比丘们,这才是一切随念中最无上的,为了众生的清净……为了证得涅槃,也就是以扎根的净信、扎根的敬爱、一心归向、极度净信,随念如来或如来的弟子。比丘们,这称为随念无上。比丘们,这些就是六种无上。巴利
‘‘Anussatānuttariyañca kathaṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, ekacco puttalābhampi anussarati, dāralābhampi anussarati, dhanalābhampi anussarati, uccāvacaṃ vā pana anussarati, samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā micchādiṭṭhikaṃ micchāpaṭipannaṃ anussarati. Atthesā, bhikkhave, anussati, nesā natthīti vadāmi. Sā ca kho esā, bhikkhave, anussati hīnā…pe… na nibbānāya saṃvattati. Yo ca kho, bhikkhave, tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā anussarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhikkhave, anussatīnaṃ sattānaṃ visuddhiyā…pe… nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya, yadidaṃ tathāgataṃ vā tathāgatasāvakaṃ vā anussarati niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo ekantagato abhippasanno. Idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, anussatānuttariyaṃ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cha anuttariyānī’’ti (a. ni. 6.30).
七种无十之事这句话里,这里没有这个十,就是无十。无十者的状态、无十的原因,就是无十之事。因为漏已尽的人在十岁般涅槃后,由于不再有结生,就不会再有十岁,所以称为无十。而且不只是不再有十岁,即使九岁……乃至连一刹那也不再有了。不只是十岁时般涅槃的人如此,即使在七岁时般涅槃的人,也是无众生、无十、无刹那的。然而,世尊把外道时期所用的这个说法,转用到教法中的漏已尽者身上,为了显示外道中没有那样的人,而这里却有,于是开示那种状态的原因,称为七种无十之事。正如所说——巴利
Satta niddasavatthūnīti ettha natthi etassa dasāti niddaso. Niddasassa niddasabhāvassa vatthūni kāraṇāni niddasavatthūni. Khīṇāsavo hi dasavassakāle parinibbuto puna paṭisandhiyā abhāvā puna dasavasso na hotīti niddasoti vuccati. Na kevalañca dasavassova na hoti, navavassopi…pe… ekamuhuttikopi na hotiyeva. Na kevalañca dasavassakāle parinibbuto, sattavassikakāle parinibbutopi nissatto niddaso nimuhutto hotiyeva. Titthiyasamaye uppannavohāraṃ pana sāsane khīṇāsavassa āropetvā tattha tādisassa abhāvaṃ, idha ca sabbhāvaṃ dassento bhagavā tādisasabhāvassa kāraṇāni ‘‘satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti āha. Yathāha –
比丘们,有七种“无十之事”。是哪七种呢?在这里,一位比丘对受持学处有强烈的意愿,并且对未来受持学处也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对法的审察有强烈的意愿,并且对未来法的审察也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对调伏欲望有强烈的意愿,并且对未来调伏欲望也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对独处静修有强烈的意愿,并且对未来独处静修也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对发起精进有强烈的意愿,并且对未来发起精进也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对正念与明察有强烈的意愿,并且对未来正念与明察也怀着不曾消退的爱乐;对通达见解有强烈的意愿,并且对未来通达见解也怀着不曾消退的爱乐。比丘们,这就是七种“无十之事”。巴利
‘‘Sattimāni, bhikkhave, niddasavatthūni. Katamāni satta? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo. Dhammanisantiyā tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca dhammanisantiyā avigatapemo. Icchāvinaye tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca icchāvinaye avigatapemo. Paṭisallāne tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca paṭisallāne avigatapemo. Vīriyārambhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca vīriyārambhe avigatapemo . Satinepakke tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca satinepakke avigatapemo. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe tibbacchando hoti, āyatiñca diṭṭhipaṭivedhe avigatapemo. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti (a. ni. 7.20).
长老也照样引述了那段教导,说道:七种无十之事。巴利
Theropi tatheva desanaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘satta niddasavatthūnī’’ti āha.
“八胜处”在这里是指:这些处被那些禅那所胜伏,所以叫“胜处”,也就是诸禅那。“处”则是从依止的意义上说,被称为处的那些遍处所缘。因为具有殊胜智慧的人,智慧明净,他会这样想:“在这里,于这个所缘上有什么须要入定的呢?要让心得一境性,对我来说并不是负担。”他胜伏这些所缘之后而入定,就在相生起的同时,在这里生起安止定,这就是它的意思。这样生起的诸禅那,就称为“胜处”。巴利
Aṭṭha abhibhāyatanānīti ettha abhibhuyyamānāni āyatanāni etesaṃ jhānānanti abhibhāyatanāni, jhānāni. Āyatanānīti adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanasaṅkhātāni kasiṇārammaṇāni. Ñāṇuttariko hi puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kiṃ ettha ārammaṇe samāpajjitabbaṃ. Na mayhaṃ cittekaggatākaraṇe bhāro atthī’’ti, tāni ārammaṇāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ nibbattetīti attho. Evaṃ uppāditāni jhānāni ‘‘abhibhāyatanānī’’ti vuccanti.
哪八种呢?一个人具有内在的色想,独自在外看到有限的各种色,有好看的也有难看的。他征服那些色而知道、看见:“我知道它们,我看见它们。”生起这样的想。这就是第一胜处。巴利
‘‘Katamāni (a. ni. 8.65) aṭṭha? Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ paṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心有色想,一人看到外在的诸色,这些色无量无边,有好看的也有难看的,他生起这样的想:“我战胜了那些色,我知道、我看见。”这就是第二胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心没有色想,独自向外看各种色,这些色是有限的、有美有丑;他生起这样的想法:“我战胜了那些色,我知道、我看见。”这就是第三胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati parittāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ tatiyaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色无量无边,有好看的也有难看的;他压伏了这些色之后,生起“我知、我见”这样的想。这就是第四胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati appamāṇāni suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ catutthaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心无色想,独自向外看见各种青色的事物,青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光。就像亚麻花,是青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都打磨光滑,是青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光。同样地,内心无色想,独自向外看见各种青色的事物,青色的、具有青色外观的、显现为青色的、散发青色的辉光,他生起这样的想:“我超越了那些事物,我知道,我看见。”这是第五胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma umāpupphaṃ nīlaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ nīlanidassanaṃ nīlanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ nīlaṃ nīlavaṇṇaṃ nīlanidassanaṃ nīlanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati nīlāni nīlavaṇṇāni nīlanidassanāni nīlanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ pañcamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种黄色的色,黄色、带黄色的外观、显现为黄色、散发黄色的光。就像迦尼迦罗花,是黄色的,带黄色的外观,显现为黄色,散发黄色的光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都打磨得很光滑,是黄色的,带黄色的外观,显现为黄色,散发黄色的光。同样地,内心不取色想的人,独自向外看见各种黄色的色,黄色、带黄色的外观、显现为黄色、散发黄色的光,他生起这样的想:“我战胜了那些色,我知道、我看见。”这是第六胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma kaṇikārapupphaṃ pītaṃ pītavaṇṇaṃ pītanidassanaṃ pītanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ pītaṃ pītavaṇṇaṃ pītanidassanaṃ pītanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati pītāni pītavaṇṇāni pītanidassanāni pītanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光。就像班杜吉瓦卡花,是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都打磨得很光滑,是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光。同样地,内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是红色的,有红的色泽,显现为红,放出红光,他生起这样的想:“我战胜了这些色,我知道、我看见。”这就是第七胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma bandhujīvakapupphaṃ lohitakaṃ lohitakavaṇṇaṃ lohitakanidassanaṃ lohitakanibhāsaṃ, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ lohitakaṃ lohitakavaṇṇaṃ lohitakanidassanaṃ lohitakanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati lohitakāni lohitakavaṇṇāni lohitakanidassanāni lohitakanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ sattamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ.
内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光。就像晨星是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光;又像波罗奈出产的布料,两面都精细光滑,是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光。同样地,内心不取色想,独自向外看见各种色,这些色是白色的,具有白色的外观,显现为白色,放出白色的光。他战胜这些色之后,生起这样的想:我知、我见。这是第八胜处。以上就是八胜处。巴利
‘‘Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni. Seyyathāpi nāma osadhitārakā odātā odātavaṇṇā odātanidassanā odātanibhāsā, seyyathāpi vā pana taṃ vatthaṃ bārāṇaseyyakaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ odātaṃ odātavaṇṇaṃ odātanidassanaṃ odātanibhāsaṃ, evameva ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passati odātāni odātavaṇṇāni odātanidassanāni odātanibhāsāni, ‘tāni abhibhuyya jānāmi passāmī’ti evaṃsaññī hoti. Idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ. Imāni aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni (a. ni. 8.65; dī. ni. 3.358).
九次第住:因为要一个接一个、按顺序去安住、去证入,所以这些安住就叫“次第住”,意思是按顺序依次证入的安住。巴利
Nava anupubbavihārāti pubbaṃ pubbaṃ anu anupubbaṃ, anupubbaṃ viharitabbato samāpajjitabbato vihārā anupubbavihārā, anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbavihārāti attho.
是哪九种呢?比丘们,在这里,一位比丘远离欲乐、远离不善法,进入并安住于初禅——有寻有伺,由远离而生起喜和乐。寻和伺平息下来后,内心清净,心念专一,进入并安住于第二禅——没有寻也没有伺,由定而生起喜和乐。由于对喜也离了贪,他安住在舍心中,具足正念和正知,以身感受乐,圣者们说这就是“舍、具念、住于乐”,他进入并安住于第三禅。由于舍弃了乐、舍弃了苦,以及先前喜和忧的消失,他进入并安住于第四禅——不苦不乐、舍念清净。他完全超越了一切色想,灭除了有对想,不再作意种种想,心里想着“虚空没有边际”,进入并安住于空无边处。他完全超越了空无边处,心里想着“识没有边际”,进入并安住于识无边处。他完全超越了识无边处,心里想着“什么都没有”,进入并安住于无所有处。他完全超越了无所有处,进入并安住于非想非非想处。他完全超越了非想非非想处,进入并安住于想受灭定。巴利
‘‘Katame nava? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti ‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’ti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 9.33; dī. ni. 3.343, 359) vuttā nava anupubbavihārāva.
十种断除的依据:正见等能断除、消灭邪见等,所以叫“断除”;“依据”就是原因。既是断除,又是依据,所以叫“断除依据”。这是正见等法的别名。巴利
Dasa nijjaravatthūnīti micchādiṭṭhādīni nijjarayanti nāsayantīti nijjarāni. Vatthūnīti kāraṇāni. Nijjarāni ca tāni vatthūni cāti nijjaravatthūni. Sammādiṭṭhādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
是哪十种呢?比丘们,对于有正见的人,邪见已经被灭尽。凡是依靠邪见而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,在他那里也已经被灭尽;而依靠正见生起的种种善法,则通过修习而达到圆满。巴利
‘‘Katamāni (a. ni. 10.106; dī. ni. 3.360) dasa? Sammādiṭṭhikassa, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammādiṭṭhipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于有正思惟的人,邪思惟就被彻底灭除了。凡是依靠邪思惟而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,在他那里也都被灭除了;而依靠正思惟的种种善法,则通过修习而达到圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāsaṅkappassa, bhikkhave, micchāsaṅkappo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāsaṅkappapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti , te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsaṅkappapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正语的人,邪语已经被彻底灭除。凡是依靠邪语而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也都被灭除了;而依靠正语的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāvācassa, bhikkhave, micchāvācā nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvācāpaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvācāpaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正业的人,邪业就被彻底消灭了。凡是依靠邪业而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,对那个人来说也都被消灭了;而依靠正业生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammākammantassa, bhikkhave, micchākammanto nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchākammantapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammākammantapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于有正命的人,邪命已经被消除。凡是依靠邪命而生起的种种恶的、不善的法,在他那里也都被消除了;而依靠正命生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāājīvassa, bhikkhave, micchāājīvo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāājīvapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāājīvapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正精进的人,邪精进已被断除。凡是因邪精进而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也已被断除;而因正精进而生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāvāyāmassa, bhikkhave, micchāvāyāmo nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāvāyāmapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvāyāmapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正念的人,邪念已被断除。凡是依靠邪念而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也已被断除;而依靠正念的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāsatissa, bhikkhave, micchāsati nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāsatipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsatipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于有正定的人,邪定就被灭尽了。那些以邪定为缘而生起的种种恶、不善法,在他那里也被灭尽;而以正定为缘的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāsamādhissa, bhikkhave, micchāsamādhi nijjiṇṇo hoti. Ye ca micchāsamādhipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāsamādhipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对于具足正智的人,邪智已经被消尽。凡是依靠邪智而生起的种种恶、不善法,在这样的人身上也都被消尽;而依靠正智的种种善法,则走向修习的圆满。巴利
‘‘Sammāñāṇissa, bhikkhave, micchāñāṇaṃ nijjiṇṇaṃ hoti. Ye ca micchāñāṇapaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāñāṇapaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti.
比丘们,对正解脱的人来说,邪解脱已被消尽。凡是因邪解脱而生起的种种恶、不善法,对他也都被消尽;而因正解脱生起的种种善法,则走向修习圆满。以上是《增支部》10.106和《长部》3.360中所说的十种消尽事。巴利
‘‘Sammāvimuttissa , bhikkhave, micchāvimutti nijjiṇṇā hoti. Ye ca micchāvimuttipaccayā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti, te cassa nijjiṇṇā honti, sammāvimuttipaccayā ca aneke kusalā dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchantī’’ti (a. ni. 10.106; dī. ni. 3.360) vuttāni dasa nijjaravatthūni.
3 应该明白,“诸比丘,一切应被遍知”等等,是世尊所说,这里引用来加以说明。“Kiñca”中的“ca”这个词,只是用来补足句子的虚词。眼等三十种解说,是在六个门中每一门各有五种,按照门、所缘、转起的顺序来说明的。其中,眼有两种:肉眼和慧眼。在这两者中,佛眼、遍眼、智眼、天眼、法眼,这五种属于慧眼。“诸比丘,我以佛眼观察世间时,看见了……”——这叫做佛眼。“遍眼被称为一切知智”——这叫做遍眼。“眼生起了,智生起了”——这叫做智眼。“诸比丘,我以清净的天眼,看见了……”——这叫做天眼。“远离尘垢、远离污秽的法眼生起了”——这叫做法眼,也就是下三道(须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含)所摄的智慧。巴利
3.Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, abhiññeyyantiādi bhagavatā vuttaṃ idha āharitvā dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Kiñca-iti ca-kāro padapūraṇamatte nipāto. Cakkhādīni tiṃsa vissajjanāni chasu dvāresu ekekasmiṃ pañca pañca katvā dvārārammaṇapavattikkamena niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha duvidhaṃ cakkhu – maṃsacakkhu paññācakkhu ca. Tesu buddhacakkhu samantacakkhu ñāṇacakkhu dibbacakkhu dhammacakkhūti pañcavidhaṃ paññācakkhu. ‘‘Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339; mahāva. 9) idaṃ buddhacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Samantacakkhu vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti (cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32; mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85) idaṃ samantacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ udapādi ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) idaṃ ñāṇacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Addasaṃ kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285) idaṃ dibbacakkhu nāma. ‘‘Virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.395) idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggattayasaṅkhātaṃ ñāṇaṃ dhammacakkhu nāma.
肉眼又分成两种:带辅助结构的眼和净色眼。所谓带辅助结构的眼,就是位于眼窝里,下面以眼窝骨、上面以眉骨为界,两边以眼角为界,外面以睫毛为界,从眼窝中间伸出一条筋丝连到脑髓,由白环、黑环、极黑环交织而成的一团肉。这就叫带辅助结构的眼。而依止在这里、系在这里,由四大种所造的净色,就叫净色眼。这里要说的就是它。这个净色眼位于带辅助结构的眼的白环所围绕的黑环中央,正对着面前身体形态出现的地方,在视野范围内,像油浸透七层棉布一样遍满七层眼膜,大小如半粒绿豆,适当地充当眼识等的依处和门而安住。它能看,所以叫眼,意思是它品尝色、辨明色。能显现,所以叫色,意思是当颜色发生变化时,能显示它进入心中的状态。从眼生起的识,或者眼的识,就是眼识。能触碰,就是触。加上前缀来修饰这个词,所以说“等触”。从眼生起的等触,就是眼触。以眼触为缘,就是以与眼识相应的触为缘。感受,就是领纳,是受的意思。那能让人快乐的,就是乐,意思是让生起它的人变得快乐。或者,能好好吞噬、挖除身心病痛的,就是乐。能让人痛苦的,就是苦,意思是让生起它的人变得痛苦。不苦也不乐,就是不苦不乐。这里的ma音是连音而说的。而这个眼触,对于与自己相应的受,以俱生、相互、依止、异熟、食、相应、有、不离去这八种方式成为缘;对于与领受相应的受,以无间、等无间、无间亲依止、非有、离去这五种方式成为缘;对于与推度等相应的受,只以亲依止的方式成为缘。巴利
Maṃsacakkhupi sasambhāracakkhu , pasādacakkhūti duvidhaṃ hoti. Yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake patiṭṭhito heṭṭhā akkhikūpakaṭṭhikena upari bhamukaṭṭhikena ubhato akkhikūṭehi bahiddhā akkhipakhumehi paricchinno akkhikūpakamajjhā nikkhantena nhārusuttakena matthaluṅge ābaddho setakaṇhātikaṇhamaṇḍalavicitto maṃsapiṇḍo, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yo pana ettha sito ettha paṭibaddho catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Idamidhādhippetaṃ. Tadetaṃ tassa sasambhāracakkhuno setamaṇḍalaparikkhittassa kaṇhamaṇḍalassa majjhe abhimukhe ṭhitānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānuppattidese diṭṭhimaṇḍale sattasu picupaṭalesu āsittatelaṃ picupaṭalāni viya satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā pamāṇato muggavidalamattaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Taṃ cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti vibhāveti cāti attho. Rūpayantīti rūpā, vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānā hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsentīti attho. Cakkhuto pavattaṃ viññāṇaṃ, cakkhussa vā viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Upasaggena padaṃ maṇḍetvā samphassoti vuttaṃ. Cakkhuto pavatto samphasso cakkhusamphasso. Cakkhusamphassapaccayāti cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassapaccayā. Vedayitanti vindanaṃ, vedanāti attho. Tadeva sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Na dukkhaṃ na sukhanti adukkhamasukhaṃ. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena vutto. So pana cakkhusamphasso attanā sampayuttāya vedanāya sahajāta aññamaññanissaya vipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā paccayo hoti, sampaṭicchanasampayuttāya anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatavasenapañcadhā, santīraṇādisampayuttānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
能听,所以叫耳。它位于带有扶根尘的耳孔内部、长着细软褐色毛发的指套状区域,在那里适当地充当耳识等的依处和门而存在。能被发出,就是声,意思是能被说出来。能嗅,所以叫鼻。它位于带有扶根尘的鼻腔内部、形如山羊蹄的区域,在那里适当地充当鼻识等的依处和门而存在。能散发气味,就是香,意思是能显示自己的来源。能唤取生命,就是舌;或者从品尝的意义上说,也叫舌。它位于带有扶根尘的舌上,避开舌尖、舌根和两侧,在上表面正中央、形如破开的青莲花瓣尖的区域,在那里适当地充当舌识等的依处和门而存在。有情品尝它们,就是味,意思是令满足。种种有漏的丑恶法由此集起,就是身。集起处就是生起之处。在这个有执受的身体中,只要有生命活动存在,身净色就大体上在那里适当地充当身识等的依处和门而存在。能被触碰,就是触。能了知,就是意,意思是能识别。能保持自相,就是法。意,指与转向俱行的有分心。法,指十二类法所缘。意识,指速行心。意触,指与彼相应的触。这个触对于相应受,除异熟缘外,以其余七缘为缘;对于无间受,也以那七缘为缘;对于其余受,只以亲依止缘为缘。巴利
Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Taṃ sasambhārasotabilassa anto tanutambalomācite aṅgulivedhakasaṇṭhāne padese sotaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Sappantīti saddā, udāharīyantīti attho. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Taṃ sasambhāraghānabilassa anto ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese ghānaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānaṃ tiṭṭhati. Gandhayantīti gandhā, attano vatthuṃ sūcentīti attho. Jīvitamavhāyatīti jivhā, sāyanaṭṭhena vā jivhā. Sā sasambhārajivhāya atiaggamūlapassāni vajjetvā uparimatalamajjhe bhinnauppaladalaggasaṇṭhāne padese jivhāviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamānā tiṭṭhati. Rasanti te sattāti rasā, assādentīti attho. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. So yāvatā imasmiṃ kāye upādiṇṇappavatti nāma atthi, tattha yebhuyyena kāyapasādo kāyaviññāṇādīnaṃ yathārahaṃ vatthudvārabhāvaṃ sādhayamāno tiṭṭhati. Phusīyantīti phoṭṭhabbā. Munātīti mano, vijānātīti attho. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Manoti sahāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ. Dhammāti dvādasapabhedā dhammārammaṇā dhammā. Manoviññāṇanti javanamanoviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti taṃsampayutto phasso. So sampayuttāya vedanāya vipākapaccayavajjehi sesehi sattahi paccayo hoti, anantarāya teheva, sesānaṃ upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti.
色等五种解说,是依蕴而说。因为被冷等所逼迫、损害,所以叫色。能感受,所以叫受。能识别,所以叫想。能造作,所以叫行。能了别,所以叫识。眼等乃至法伺这十种解说,是依六六而说;六十种解说,是依可爱、可悦而说。眼触所生受等,就是与各自相应的那种受。对色的想,就是色想。能思虑,所以叫思;意思是能连结。能渴求,所以叫渴爱;意思是渴。能寻思,所以叫寻;或者说,寻就是寻思,也就是粗的推度。心靠着它而在所缘上活动,所以叫伺;或者说,活动就是伺,也就是细的随行。巴利
Rūpādīni pañca vissajjanāni khandhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sītādīhi ruppati pīḷīyatīti rūpaṃ. Vedayatīti vedanā. Sañjānātīti saññā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Cakkhādīni dhammavicārapariyantāni dasa chakkavasena, saṭṭhi vissajjanāni piyarūpasātarūpavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhusamphassajādikā vedanā taṃtaṃsampayuttāva. Rūpesu saññā rūpasaññā. Sañcetayatīti sañcetanā, abhisandahatīti attho. Tasatīti taṇhā, pipāsatīti attho. Vitakketīti vitakko, vitakkanaṃ vā vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Ārammaṇe tena cittaṃ vicaratīti vicāro, vicaraṇaṃ vā vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
4 地界等解说,是简要地按名色来区分说明的。因为遍及各处,所以叫地。它能渗入,或被吸收,或使增长,所以叫水。它能发热,所以叫火。它能吹动,所以叫风。不能被耕、不能被拖,不能被切割或破坏,所以叫虚空。以没有众生的性质,所以叫界。巴利
4.Pathavīdhātādīni cha vissajjanāni saṃkhittena nāmarūpavavatthānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Patthaṭattā pathavī. Appeti, āpīyati, appāyatīti vā āpo. Tejayatīti tejo. Vāyatīti vāyo. Na kassati na nikassati, kasituṃ chindituṃ bhindituṃ vā na sakkāti ākāso. Nissattaṭṭhena dhātu.
地遍等十种解说,是依遍的修习而说的。所谓“遍”,因为能遍满一切,所以遍的圆盘、在它上面生起的相、以它为所缘的禅那,都叫做遍。但这里指的是禅那。最初四种是以四大为所缘的禅那,接下来四种是以颜色为所缘的禅那。空遍,是指限定虚空,以及以它为所缘的禅那;除去遍相的虚空,以及以它为所缘的空无边处。识遍,是指空无边处的识,以及以它为所缘的识无边处。巴利
Pathavīkasiṇādīni dasa vissajjanāni kasiṇabhāvanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Kasiṇanti sakalapharaṇavasena kasiṇamaṇḍalampi tasmiṃ upaṭṭhitanimittampi tadārammaṇaṃ jhānampi vuccati. Idha pana jhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Ādimhi cattāri mahābhūtakasiṇārammaṇāni jhānāni, tato parāni cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇāni. Ākāsakasiṇanti paricchedākāso, tadārammaṇañca jhānaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso, tadārammaṇañca ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Viññāṇakasiṇanti ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇaṃ, tadārammaṇañca viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ.
头发等三十二种(身体部分)的解说,是依据三十二行相的业处来说明的。在它们当中,当头发等以厌恶的方式呈现时,就是依身至念而修的不净业处;当以颜色相呈现时,就是遍业处;当以界相呈现时,就是四界差别的业处。还应当知道:头发等以厌恶或颜色相呈现时,以它们为所缘的诸禅那;以界相呈现时,那些部分以及以它们为所缘的界修习。巴利
Kesādīni dvattiṃsa vissajjanāni dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Tesu pana kesādīsu paṭikūlato upaṭṭhitesu kāyagatāsativasena asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, vaṇṇato upaṭṭhitesu kasiṇakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, dhātuto upaṭṭhitesu catudhātuvavatthānakammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, kesātiādīni ca paṭikūlato vaṇṇato vā upaṭṭhitānaṃ tadārammaṇāni jhānāni, dhātuto upaṭṭhitassa te ca koṭṭhāsā tadārammaṇā ca dhātubhāvanā veditabbā.
头发在两边以耳尖、前面以额际、后面以喉结为界,长在覆盖头骨的皮肉里,深入约一粒米那么长,数量有数十万根。巴利
Kesā ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi purato nalāṭantena, pacchato ca galavāṭakena paricchinnā sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā anekasatasahassasaṅkhā.
体毛除了头发等所占据的位置,以及手掌和脚底之外,大多数都长在身体皮肤上,在九万九千个毛孔中,进入约一粒虱卵的大小而安住。巴利
Lomā ṭhapetvā kesādīnaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsaṃ hatthatalapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena sarīracamme navanavutiyā lomakūpasahassesu likkhāmattaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā.
二十片指甲长在手指和脚趾的尖端背面。巴利
Nakhā aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu ṭhitā vīsati.
牙齿位于上下两颚的骨头上,通常有三十二颗。巴利
Dantā dvīsu haṇukaṭṭhikesu ṭhitā yebhuyyena dvattiṃsa.
皮肤即是覆盖整个身体后位于可见的提膜之上、表皮之下的皮。巴利
Taco sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā pākaṭakilomakassa upari chaviyā heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ cammaṃ.
九百片肉贴在三百多块骨头上。巴利
Maṃsaṃ sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpitvā ṭhitāni navamaṃsapesisatāni.
九百条筋遍布全身,把骨头连接起来,让它们保持在原位。巴利
Nhārū sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitāni nava nhārusatāni.
全身的骨头共有三百多块,下面的骨头支撑着上面的骨头。巴利
Aṭṭhī sakalasarīre heṭṭhā aṭṭhīnaṃ upari ṭhitāni sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni.
骨髓就是存在于每一块骨头内部的髓。巴利
Aṭṭhimiñjā tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā miñjā.
肾是两块肉团,由一根从喉窝伸出的粗筋连着;这根筋往前延伸一小段后分成两股,缠住并环绕心脏肌肉而停在那里。巴利
Vakkaṃ galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhā hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā.
心脏位于身体内部、两乳之间,是心所依止的地方,里面充满大约半掌量的血液,有一个像棠梨籽那么大的凹陷,这就是心脏肉。巴利
Hadayaṃ sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe ṭhitaṃ anto cittasannissayaṃ aḍḍhapasatamattalohitapuṇṇaṃ punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamattāvāṭakaṃ hadayamaṃsaṃ.
肝:位于两乳之间、靠近右侧而住立的一对肉膜。巴利
Yakanaṃ dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ.
缠绕肉有两种:一种覆盖心脏和肾脏而存在,称为“覆膜膈膜”;另一种遍布全身皮下,包裹肌肉而存在,称为“不覆膜膈膜”。巴利
Kilomakaṃ hadayavakkāni paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ paṭicchannakilomakasaṅkhātañca sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ appaṭicchannakilomakasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ.
脾位于心脏左侧,贴近腹腔膜的上方而住立,就是胃舌肉。巴利
Pihakaṃ hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ.
肺位于身体内部,在两乳头之间、心脏和肝脏的上方,覆盖着它们并向下悬垂而住,是由三十二块肉片组成的肺肉。巴利
Papphāsaṃ sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ antare hadayayakanānaṃ upari chādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ.
肠位于身体内部,上端绑在颈窝,下端绑在粪道,以颈窝和粪道为两端。男子的肠长三十二肘,女子的肠长二十八肘,在二十一个地方盘曲。巴利
Antaṃ upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitā purisassa dvattiṃsahatthā itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi.
肠间膜把二十一个肠环捆在一起,让它们不散开,自己则位于这些肠环之间。巴利
Antaguṇaṃ antabhoge ekato agalante ābandhitvā ekavīsatiyā antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ bandhanaṃ.
胃中物:就是被牙齿嚼碎、被舌头和手翻搅过、混着唾液和痰的食物。它落进胃里的那一瞬间,就失去了色泽、香气、味道等所有好处,像织布机上的污水,又像狗吐出来的东西。它被胆汁、痰和风包住,在胃火的烧灼和翻涌中沸腾,里面爬满了虫子,上面不断冒出泡沫和水泡,变成极度腐烂、恶臭、令人作呕的状态,停留在肚脐上方那层叫“生藏”的内膜里——也就是各种被吃下、喝下、嚼过、尝过的东西。巴利
Udariyaṃ dantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitaṃ kheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṃkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇabubbuḷakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambukaduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā āmāsayasaṅkhāte uparinābhiantapaṭale ṭhitaṃ nānappakārakaṃ asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ.
粪:指粪便,它位于肚脐与脊骨根部之间的下方,上下高度约八指宽,安住在肠道末端;这个地方叫作“熟藏”。巴利
Karīsaṃ pakkāsayasaṅkhāte heṭṭhā nābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃ antare ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatte antāvasāne ṭhitaṃ vaccaṃ.
胆汁有两种:一种叫“有缚胆”,它依附在心肉与肺之间的肝脏上,位于像大苦瓜囊一样的胆囊里;另一种叫“无缚胆”,它遍布全身其余部分,但不包括头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿这些没有肉的地方,以及又硬又干的皮肤。巴利
Pittaṃ hadayamaṃsapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ baddhapittasaṅkhātañca, kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ abaddhapittasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ pittaṃ.
痰:停留在胃壁上的痰,量有满满一钵他那么多。巴利
Semhaṃ udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ ekapatthapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ.
当身体某个部位被木桩、荆棘刺伤,或者被殴打、火烧等伤害,或者因为体内界扰动而生起疮、疖等时,那里血液的腐败成熟就是脓。血也有两种:一种叫积聚血,它充满肝脏下方,一点一点地从心脏、肾脏、肺的上方渗流出来,浸润着肾、心脏、肝、肺,量满一钵他;另一种叫循环血,除了头发、体毛、指甲、牙齿这些没有肉的地方以及坚硬干燥的皮肤之外,它沿着脉管网遍布整个已执取身。巴利
Pubbo khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate vā sarīrappadese abbhantaradhātukkhobhavasena vā uppannesu gaṇḍapīḷakādīsu paripakkalohitapariṇāmo. Lohitaṃ yakanassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ ekapatthapūramattaṃ sannicitalohitasaṅkhātañca, kesalomanakhadantānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca ṭhapetvā dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādiṇṇasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ saṃsaraṇalohitasaṅkhātañcāti duvidhaṃ lohitaṃ.
汗:当身体被火的热力、太阳的炙烤或季节变化等所灼热时,从一切毛发和毛孔中渗流出来的水界。巴利
Sedo aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi santatte sarīre sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu.
脂肪:在胖人身上,它遍布全身的皮肉之间;在瘦人身上,则依附在小腿肉等部位,是一种黏稠的油脂。巴利
Medo thūlassa sakalasarīre cammamaṃsantare kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito thinasineho.
眼泪:由喜、忧、不适宜的饮食和时节等生起,充满眼眶,或者停在那里,或者流出来,这就是水界。巴利
Assu somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhantī vā paggharantī vā āpodhātu.
油脂在火的热力、太阳的热力、季节不适等所产生的暖热中,大多数情况下停留在手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻翼、额头、肩峰等处,是已经融化的脂肪。巴利
Vasā aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgehi usmājātesu yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsāpuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhito vilīnasineho.
唾液在看见或想起那样的食物时,或在把食物放进嘴里时,或心脏感到疲惫时,或对某种东西生起厌恶时,就会更多地生起,从两边脸颊流下来,停在舌头上,是混着泡沫的水界。巴利
Kheḷo tathārūpaṃ āhāraṃ passantassa vā sarantassa vā mukhe vā ṭhapentassa hadayaṃ vā ākilāyantassa kismiñcideva vā jigucchaṃ uppādentassa bhiyyo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya tiṭṭhamānā pheṇamissā āpodhātu.
鼻涕:因不适宜的食物或时节导致生起之界被扰动,或者因为哭泣,从脑流下来,经过上颚中部的孔道落下去,充满鼻腔,或者停在那里,或者往下流,是腐臭的、不净的、黏滑的。巴利
Siṅghāṇikā visabhāgāhārautuvasena sañjātadhātukkhobhassa vā rodantassa vā antosīse matthaluṅgato galitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhantaṃ vā paggharantaṃ vā pūti asuci picchilaṃ.
关节滑液负责润滑关节,它住在全身一百八十个关节里面,是一种黏滑的腐肉。巴利
Lasikā aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānaṃ asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitaṃ picchilakuṇapaṃ.
尿:依靠食物和时节,住在膀胱内部的水界。巴利
Muttaṃ āhārautuvasena vatthipuṭabbhantare ṭhitā āpodhātu.
脑髓位于头盖骨内部,依靠四条缝合线而安住,是四个团块聚合而成的髓堆。巴利
Matthaluṅgaṃ sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya ṭhito catupiṇḍasamodhāno miñjarāsi.
眼处等十二种,是依十二处的分类而说明的。从“处”的含义来说,它是诸法到来的途径,是扩展,也是引导那漫长轮回的所在。因为在眼、色等当中,那些依各自的门与所缘而活动的心与心所法,以各自领受等作用而到来,也就是生起、努力、精勤,这叫作“来”。而这些处又使那些已到来的法扩展、增大,这叫作“扩展”。还有,在无始轮回中流转的极其漫长的轮回之苦,只要它还没有停止,这些处就引导它、使它持续流转,这叫作“引导”。巴利
Cakkhāyatanādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni dvādasāyatanavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Āyatanato, āyānaṃ tananato, āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanaṃ. Cakkhurūpādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādinā kiccena āyatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭanti, vāyamantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Te ca pana āyabhūte dhamme etāni tanonti, vitthārentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañca anamatagge saṃsāre pavattaṃ atīva āyataṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ yāva na nivattati, tāva nayanti, pavattayantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
另外,从“住处”的意义、“矿藏”的意义、“汇集处”的意义、“出生地”的意义和“原因”的意义来说,都叫“处”。就像在世间,“自在天处”“瓦苏迭瓦处”等说法里,住处被称为“处”;“金处”“银处”等说法里,是矿藏的意思。在教法中,“于可意的处所,群鸟依止它”等说法里,是汇集处的意思;“南牛道是牛的出生地”等说法里,是出生地的意思;“当有处存在时,他就在那里获得作证的能力”等说法里,是原因的意思。在眼等当中,种种心和心所法安住于其中,因为它们依眼等而活动,所以眼等是它们的住处;它们又遍布在眼等之中,因为以眼等为依止、以眼等为所缘,所以眼等是它们的矿藏;因为依各自的依处、门和所缘而在各处汇集,所以眼等是它们的汇集处;因为以眼等为依止和所缘就在那里生起,所以眼等是它们的出生地;因为眼等不存在它们就不存在,所以眼等是它们的原因。按照上面所说的意义,眼本身就是处,所以叫“眼处”。其余的处也是这样。巴利
Apica nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaraṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena sañjātidesaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanaṃ . Tathā hi loke ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘āyatana’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ rajatāyatana’’ntiādīsu ākaro. Sāsane pana ‘‘manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Dakkhiṇāpatho gunnaṃ āyatana’’ntiādīsu sañjātideso. ‘‘Tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.102; 5.23) kāraṇaṃ. Cakkhuādīsu cāpi te te cittacetasikā dhammā nivasanti tadāyattavuttitāyāti cakkhādayo nesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ , cakkhādīsu ca te ākiṇṇā tannissayattā tadārammaṇattā cāti cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ ākaro, tattha tattha vatthudvārārammaṇavasena samosaraṇato cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃnissayārammaṇabhāvena tattheva uppattito cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ sañjātideso, cakkhādīnaṃ abhāve abhāvato cakkhādayo ca nesaṃ kāraṇanti yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ āyatanañcāti cakkhāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi.
眼界等十八种解说,是依照十八界来说明的。在眼等每一种法中,随各自的情况,它安立、被保持,或者安立与被保持同时发生,或者通过它、在它之中被保持,所以叫“界”。世间的界确实是以原因的性质被确定的,就像金界、银界等能产生金、银那样,它们产生种种轮回之苦。又像挑担者承担重担一样,诸界被众生承担、担负,这就是它的意思。而且,由于不能自主,它们只是苦的安立者。以这些界为原因,轮回之苦被众生随顺着安立。那种被安立的状态也保持在这些界当中,也就是被安置,这是它的意思。再说,就像外道所说的“我”在自性上根本不存在,这些界却不是这样。这些界保持着自己的自性,所以叫“界”。又像世间把各种颜色的雌黄、雄黄等岩石成分叫做“界”一样,这些也类似界,所以叫“界”。因为它们各部分是被智慧所了知的对象。或者,就像在叫做“身体”的集合体中,味、血等组成部分各自有着互相不同的特相、彼此区分,而得到“界”这个名称;同样,在叫做五蕴的这个有身的组成部分中,也应当知道有“界”这个名称。因为这些眼等是互相有着不同特相而彼此区分的。再说,“界”是非命者的同义词。事实上,世尊在“这个比丘,人是六界所成”等经文中,就是为了消除命想而教导界。按照上面所说的意义,眼即是界,所以叫“眼界”。其余的界也是这样。意界是指三种意界。法界是指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴、十六种微细色以及涅槃。意识界是指七十六种意识界。巴利
Cakkhudhātādīni aṭṭhārasa vissajjanāni aṭṭhārasadhātuvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhādīsu ekeko dhammo yathāsambhavaṃ vidahati, dhīyate, vidhānaṃ vidhīyate, etāya, ettha vā dhīyatīti dhātu. Lokiyā hi dhātuyo kāraṇabhāvena vavatthitā hutvā suvaṇṇarajatādidhātuyo viya suvaṇṇarajatādiṃ, anekappakāraṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ vidahanti. Bhārahārehi ca bhāro viya sattehi dhīyante, dhārīyantīti attho. Dukkhavidhānamattameva cetā avasavattanato. Etāhi ca karaṇabhūtāhi saṃsāradukkhaṃ sattehi anuvidhīyati. Tathāvihitañcetaṃ etāsveva dhīyati, ṭhapīyatīti attho. Apica yathā titthiyānaṃ attā nāma sabhāvato natthi, na evametā. Etā pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhātuyo. Yathā ca loke vicittā haritālamanosilādayo selāvayavā dhātuyoti vuccanti, evametāpi dhātuyo viyāti dhātuyo. Vicittā hetā ñāṇaneyyāvayavāti. Yathā vā sarīrasaṅkhātassa samudāyassa avayavabhūtesu rasasoṇitādīsu aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnesu dhātusamaññā, evamevetesupi pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa attabhāvassa avayavesu dhātusamaññā veditabbā. Aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnā hete cakkhādayoti. Apica dhātūti nijjīvamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘chadhāturo ayaṃ bhikkhu puriso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.343-344) jīvasaññāsamūhananatthaṃ dhātudesanaṃ akāsīti. Yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ dhātu cāti cakkhudhātu. Evaṃ sesāpi. Manodhātūti ca tisso manodhātuyo. Dhammadhātūti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā soḷasa sukhumarūpāni nibbānañca. Manoviññāṇadhātūti chasattati manoviññāṇadhātuyo.
眼根等二十二种解答,是依二十二根来说明的。眼本身在“看”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫眼根。耳本身在“听”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫耳根。鼻本身在“嗅”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫鼻根。舌本身在“尝”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫舌根。身本身在“触”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫身根。能思量,所以叫意,就是了知的意思。不过义注师们说:就像用细管仔细测量,或者用大秤仔细称量一样,意能对所缘思量、了知,所以叫意;这意本身在“思量”这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫意根。巴利
Cakkhundriyādīni bāvīsati vissajjanāni bāvīsatindriyavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Cakkhumeva dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti cakkhundriyaṃ. Sotameva savanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti sotindriyaṃ. Ghānameva ghāyanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti ghānindriyaṃ. Jivhā eva sāyanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti jivhindriyaṃ. Kāyo eva phusanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti kāyindriyaṃ. Manate iti mano, vijānātīti attho. Aṭṭhakathācariyā panāhu – nāliyā minamāno viya mahātulāya dhārayamāno viya ca ārammaṇaṃ manati jānātīti mano, tadeva mananalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti manindriyaṃ.
诸法依靠它而存活,所以它就叫“命”;这个命本身又在守护的特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫“命根”。命根有两种:色命根和非色命根。与一切业生色同时生起、并守护这些俱生色的,是色命根;与一切心同时生起、并守护与心俱生的非色法的,是非色命根。巴利
Jīvanti tena taṃsahajātā dhammāti jīvitaṃ, tadeva anupālanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti jīvitindriyaṃ. Taṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ arūpajīvitindriyanti duvidhaṃ. Sabbakammajarūpasahajaṃ sahajarūpānupālanaṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, sabbacittasahajaṃ sahajaarūpānupālanaṃ arūpajīvitindriyaṃ.
女性因为胎儿在她体内凝结成团,所以叫“女性”;在女性特征等方面作主宰义,所以叫“根”;一定是女性才有的根,所以叫“女根”。巴利
Thīyati saṅghātaṃ gacchati etissā gabbhoti itthī, itthiliṅgādīsu indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, niyamato itthiyā eva indriyaṃ itthindriyaṃ.
“puṃ”称为地狱;在地狱里被伤害、被折磨,所以叫男子。在男性特征等上面行使主宰的作用,所以叫根;按固定的规则,只属于男子的根,就叫男根。在这两个根当中,每一个都依各自的自性,与各自的业生色同时生起。巴利
Puṃ-vuccati nirayo, puṃ saṅkhāte niraye risīyati hiṃsīyatīti puriso, purisaliṅgādīsu indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, niyamato purisasseva indriyaṃ purisindriyaṃ. Dvīsupetesu ekekaṃ sabhāvakassa ekekassa kammajarūpasahajaṃ hoti.
与善果报身识相应的乐,在身体舒适这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫根;这乐本身就是根,所以叫乐根。巴利
Kusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, kāyikasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, sukhameva indriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ.
与不善果报身识相应的苦,在身体不适这个特征上发挥根的作用,所以叫“根”;这苦本身就是根,所以叫“苦根”。巴利
Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ dukkhaṃ, kāyikaasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, dukkhameva indriyaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ.
因为与喜和悦相应,心变得美好,所以叫“悦心”;悦心的状态就是“悦”。它在内心愉悦这个特相上发挥根的作用,所以叫“根”;这悦本身就是根,所以叫“悦根”。巴利
Pītisomanassayogato sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, cetasikasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, somanassameva indriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ.
因为与忧相应,心变得恶劣,所以叫“心坏”;或者因为它是低劣的感受,心变得可鄙,所以叫“心坏”。心坏的状态就是忧。“根”的意思是:它在心所的不适这个特相上,起到根的主导作用;所以忧本身就是根,也就是忧根。
“舍”是指:它舍弃了苦和乐那种运作方式,因为安住于中舍的行相,所以以那种行相生起,因此叫舍。“根”的意思是:它在中舍这个特相上,起到根的主导作用;所以舍本身就是根,也就是舍根。巴利
Domanassayogato duṭṭhu mano assāti, hīnavedanattā vā kucchitaṃ mano assāti dummano, dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ, cetasikaasātalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, domanassameva indriyaṃ domanassindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhākārapavattiṃ upekkhati majjhattākārasaṇṭhitattā tenākārena pavattatīti upekkhā, majjhattalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, upekkhā eva indriyaṃ upekkhindriyaṃ.
人们以此而相信,或者它自己就相信,或者它仅仅是相信本身,所以叫信。因为它能战胜不信,具有主导作用,所以叫根;或者它在决断的特相上发挥根的支配作用,所以叫根。信本身就是根,这就是信根。巴利
Saddahanti etāya, sayaṃ vā saddahati, saddahanamattameva vā esāti saddhā, assaddhiyassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, adhimokkhalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, saddhāyeva indriyaṃ saddhindriyaṃ.
精进根:精进就是英雄的本性,或者说是英雄的行为,或者说是应当依照方法、依照理则去激励、去推动的,所以叫精进。它能战胜懈怠,具有增上的意义,所以叫根;或者它在策励这个特相上,行使根的支配作用,所以叫根。因此,精进本身就是根,就是精进根。巴利
Vīrabhāvo vīriyaṃ, vīrānaṃ vā kammaṃ, vidhinā vā nayena īrayitabbaṃ pavattayitabbanti vīriyaṃ, kosajjassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, paggahaṇalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, vīriyameva indriyaṃ vīriyindriyaṃ.
念的意思是:依靠它来忆念,或者自己就在忆念,或者它仅仅是忆念本身,所以叫念。它能克服失念,以主导作用称为根;或者在“现前”这个特征上行使主的作用,所以叫根。念本身就是根,就叫念根。巴利
Saranti tāya, sayaṃ vā sarati, saraṇamattameva vā esāti sati, muṭṭhasaccassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, sati eva indriyaṃ satindriyaṃ.
心以善的方式把持、安住于所缘,所以叫定。因为它能压伏散乱,以增上的意义而成为根;或者,它在不散乱的特相上发挥根的作用,所以是根。定本身就是根,所以叫定根。巴利
Ārammaṇe cittaṃ sammā ādhiyati ṭhapetīti samādhi, vikkhepassa abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, avikkhepalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, samādhi eva indriyaṃ samādhindriyaṃ.
以“这是苦”等方式了知诸圣谛,这就是慧。不过,在注疏中说:“以令了知无常、苦、无我的方式而称为慧。”由于能克服无明,以增上的意义而称为根;或者在“见”的特相上行使根的作用,所以称为根。因此,慧本身就是根,称为慧根。巴利
‘‘Idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayena ariyasaccāni pajānātīti paññā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhamanattāti paññāpanavasena paññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjāya abhibhavanato adhipatiatthena indriyaṃ, dassanalakkhaṇe vā indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, paññā eva indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ.
在无始轮回中,为了证知未曾证知的不死境界,或者为了了知四圣谛之法,而踏上“我将了知”这条修行道路的人,在他心中生起这种根;又因为它具备根的作用,所以叫“未知当知根”。这是入流道智的名称。巴利
Anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe anaññātaṃ amataṃ padaṃ catusaccadhammameva vā jānissāmīti paṭipannassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Sotāpattimaggañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
以初道所了知的界限为限,不超越这个界限,只了知那些由该道所了知的四圣谛法,又因为具备根的意义,所以叫已知根。这是入流果等六个阶段中智的名称。巴利
Paṭhamamaggena ñātaṃ mariyādaṃ anatikkamitvā tesaṃyeva tena maggena ñātānaṃ catusaccadhammānameva jānanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca ājānanakaṃ indriyaṃ aññindriyaṃ. Sotāpattiphalādīsu chasu ṭhānesu ñāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
具知根:对于已遍知四圣谛、已完成了智的作用的漏尽者,因为它的生起,以及因为根的意义得以成立,所以叫具知根;或者,对于已遍知者——也就是在四圣谛上已完成作用、通达四圣谛而安住的诸法当中——由于内在成就了主宰的意义,所以叫具知根。这是阿拉汉果智的名称。而所有这些根,随各自相应的情况,都以“根的印相意义、根由主宰所说、根由主宰所见、根由主宰所造、根由主宰所行”这几层意义而称为根。因为世尊、正自觉者由于具有最上的自在,所以是“主宰”;而善业和不善业,因为在诸业当中,任何其他人都对它们没有自在。正因如此,这里由业所生的诸根,能标示善业与不善业,并且是由那业所造的,所以依“根的印相意义”和“根由主宰所造的意义”而称为根。再者,所有这些根,都是由世尊、牟尼主如实开显、现等觉的,所以依“根由主宰所说的意义”和“根由主宰所见的意义”而称为根。也正因为如此,由世尊、牟尼主,某些根是通过行境的修习而被运用,某些根是通过修习的修习而被运用,所以也依“根由主宰所行的意义”而称为根。此外,这些根也依增上——也就是自在——的意义而称为根。因为在眼识等生起运作时,眼等的主宰作用是成立的:它们锐利时作用就锐利,迟钝时作用就迟钝。巴利
Aññātāvino catusaccesu niṭṭhitañāṇakiccassa khīṇāsavassa uppajjanato indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca aññātāvindriyaṃ, aññātāvīnaṃ vā catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitakiccānaṃ cattāri saccāni paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitānaṃ dhammānaṃ abbhantare indaṭṭhasādhanena aññātāvindriyaṃ. Arahattaphalañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sabbānipetāni yathāyogaṃ indaliṅgaṭṭhena indadesitaṭṭhena indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena indajuṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Bhagavā hi sammāsambuddho paramissariyabhāvato indo, kusalākusalañca kammaṃ kammesu kassaci issariyābhāvato. Tenevettha kammajanitāni indriyāni kusalākusalakammaṃ ulliṅgenti , tena ca siṭṭhānīti indaliṅgaṭṭhena indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Sabbāneva panetāni bhagavatā munindena yathābhūtato pakāsitāni abhisambuddhāni cāti indadesitaṭṭhena indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Teneva ca bhagavatā munindena kānici gocarāsevanāya, kānici bhāvanāsevanāya sevitānīti indajuṭṭhaṭṭhenapi indriyāni. Api ca ādhipaccasaṅkhātena issariyaṭṭhenapi etāni indriyāni. Cakkhuviññāṇādipavattiyañhi cakkhādīnaṃ siddhamādhipaccaṃ tasmiṃ tikkhe tikkhattā mande ca mandattāti.
欲界等十二界,是按存在种类的划分来安立的。与被称为欲贪的欲相应的界,就是欲界;或者,被称为欲的界,就是欲界。巴利
Kāmadhātuādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni bhavappabhedavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena yuttā dhātu kāmadhātu, kāmasaṅkhātā vā dhātu kāmadhātu.
舍弃了欲之后,与色相应而存在的界,就是色界;或者,以“色”来命名的那一界,就是色界。巴利
Kāmaṃ pahāya rūpena yuttā dhātu rūpadhātu, rūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu rūpadhātu.
舍弃了欲和色之后,与无色相应的界,就是无色界;或者,以无色来命名的界,就是无色界。巴利
Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūpena yuttā dhātu arūpadhātu, arūpasaṅkhātā vā dhātu arūpadhātu.
这些界,换个说法,又用“有”来讲。因为“存在”,所以就叫“有”。和想相应的有,就是“有想有”;和想一起存在的有,也是“有想有”;或者在这个有当中存在想,所以叫“有想有”。它可以是欲有,可以是除了无想有之外的色有,也可以是除了非想非非想有之外的无色有。巴利
Tā eva dhātuyo puna bhavapariyāyena vuttā. Bhavatīti hi bhavoti vuccati. Saññāya yutto bhavo saññābhavo, saññāsahagato vā bhavo saññābhavo, saññā vā ettha bhave atthīti saññābhavo. So kāmabhavo ca asaññābhavamutto rūpabhavo ca nevasaññānāsaññābhavamutto arūpabhavo ca hoti.
无想有不是有想有,它是色有的一部分。巴利
Na saññābhavo asaññābhavo, so rūpabhavekadeso.
因为不存在粗想,所以是“非想”;因为还有极微细的想存在,所以是“非非想”,合起来就是“非想非非想”。与这种状态相应的存在,就是“非想非非想有”。或者说,因为粗想不存在、细想还存在,所以这种存在状态中的众生就叫“非想非非想”,因此称为“非想非非想有”。这是无色有的一部分。巴利
Oḷārikattābhāvato nevasaññā, sukhumattena sambhavato nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, tāya yutto bhavo nevasaññānāsaññābhavo. Atha vā oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvā, sukhumāya ca bhāvā nevasaññānāsaññā asmiṃ bhaveti nevasaññānāsaññābhavo, so arūpabhavekadeso.
与一种色蕴混杂的有,具有一种构成成分,所以叫“一蕴有”,它也就是无想有。巴利
Ekena rūpakkhandhena vokiṇṇo bhavo ekena vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavo, so asaññabhavova.
与四种无色蕴混杂在一起的有,具有四种构成成分,所以叫四蕴有;它就是无色有。巴利
Catūhi arūpakkhandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo catūhi vokāro assa bhavassāti catuvokārabhavo, so arūpabhavo eva.
由五种蕴混杂而成的存在,以五种蕴为它的构成部分,所以叫五蕴有。它属于欲有,也属于色有的一部分。巴利
Pañcahi khandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo pañcahi vokāro assa bhavassāti pañcavokārabhavo, so kāmabhavo ca rūpabhavekadeso ca hoti.
6 初禅等十二种解答,是依禅那等至的状态来阐述的。这里说的“禅那”,只指梵住而言。与寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性相应的,是第一禅。与喜、乐、心一境性相应的,是第二禅。与乐、心一境性相应的,是第三禅。与舍、心一境性相应的,是第四禅。巴利
6.Paṭhamajjhānādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni jhānasamāpattivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Jhānanti idha brahmavihāramattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Vitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ. Pītisukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ. Sukhacittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ. Upekkhācittekaggatāsampayuttaṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ.
“慈”之所以叫慈,是因为它滋润、柔和,意思是让人感到亲切。或者说,它存在于友善的人身上,或者是友善之人的行为表现,所以叫“慈”。由于脱离了敌对的状态,又因为心倾向于所缘的对象,所以叫“解脱”;心的解脱就是“心解脱”;慈本身就是心解脱,所以叫“慈心解脱”。巴利
Medati mejjatīti mettā, siniyhatīti attho. Mitte vā bhavā, mittassa vā esā pavattīti mettā, paccanīkadhammehi muttattā ārammaṇe cādhimuttattā vimutti, cetaso vimutti cetovimutti, mettā eva cetovimutti mettācetovimutti.
悲的含义已经说过了。巴利
Karuṇā vuttatthā eva.
具有喜的人通过它而欢喜,或者它本身就欢喜,或者它只是欢喜的状态,所以称为“喜”。通过舍弃“愿他们没有怨敌”这类造作,以及进入平等心的状态,所以称为“舍”。慈等三种梵住分别与初禅、第二禅、第三禅相应。舍梵住则与第四禅相应。巴利
Modanti tāya taṃsamaṅgino, sayaṃ vā modati, modanamattameva vā tanti muditā. ‘‘Averā hontū’’tiādibyāpārappahānena majjhattabhāvūpagamanena ca upekkhatīti upekkhā. Mettādayo tayo brahmavihārā paṭhamādīhi tīhi jhānehi yuttā. Upekkhābrahmavihāro catutthajjhānena yutto.
由于遍满,它没有边际,所以叫“无边”。虚空是无边的,所以叫“空无边”,也就是除去遍处后的虚空。空无边本身就是空无边,它作为依处,对于与它相应的心所法和禅那来说,就是处所,如同“诸天神的天处”一样,所以叫“空无边处”。空无边处本身就是等至,所以叫“空无边处等至”。同样,由于遍满而没有边际,所以叫“无边”,那是取虚空为所缘的识。无边的就是“无边”,识的无边不说“识无边”,而说“识无边”。这里用的是惯用语。那识的无边作为依处,对于与它相应的心所法和禅那来说,就是处所,如同“诸天神的天处”一样,所以叫“识无边处”。没有任何东西,就是连一丝残余都没有,所以说“无所有”。无所有的状态就是“无所有”。这是空无边处识不存在的同义词。那无所有作为依处,对于与它相应的心所法和禅那来说,就是处所,如同“诸天神的天处”一样,所以叫“无所有处”。因为粗的想不存在,细的想存在,所以与它相应的心所法和禅那的想,既不是想也不是非想,所以叫“非想非非想”。非想非非想属于意处和法处,所以叫“非想非非想处”。或者说,这里的想因为不能执行明确的想的功能,所以叫“非想”;因为以残余行蕴的细微状态而存在,所以叫“非非想”,合起来就是“非想非非想”。非想非非想又作为其余诸法的依处,所以叫“处”,合起来就是“非想非非想处”。这是以无所有处为所缘的等至的同义词。在这里,不仅想是这样的,受也是非受非非受,心也是非心非非心,触也是非触非非触。其余相应法也依此类推。不过,这个开示是以想为首来说的。巴利
Pharaṇavasena natthi etassa antoti ananto. Ākāso ananto ākāsānanto, kasiṇugghāṭimākāso . Ākāsānantoyeva ākāsānañcaṃ, taṃ ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanameva samāpatti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti. Pharaṇavasena ca natthi etassa antoti anantaṃ, taṃ ākāsārammaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ. Anantameva ānañcaṃ, viññāṇaṃ ānañcaṃ ‘‘viññāṇānañca’’nti avatvā ‘‘viññāṇañca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha ruḷhisaddo. Taṃ viññāṇañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ. Natthi etassa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampi assa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇābhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ ākiñcaññaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa ‘‘devānaṃ devāyatanamivā’’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ. Oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvato, sukhumāya ca bhāvato nevassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa saññā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññaṃ. Nevasaññānāsaññañca taṃ manāyatanadhammāyatanapariyāpannattā āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Atha vā yāyamettha saññā sā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya nevasaññā, saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvena vijjamānattā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, nevasaññānāsaññā ca sā sesadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Ākiñcaññāyatanārammaṇāya samāpattiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Na kevalaṃ ettha saññā edisī, atha kho vedanāpi nevavedanā nāvedanā. Cittampi nevacittaṃ nācittaṃ. Phassopi nevaphasso nāphasso. Esa nayo sesasampayuttadhammesu. Saññāsīsena panāyaṃ desanā katāti.
无明等十二项解说,是依缘起支来指示的。身恶行等法,因为不可能圆满,所以叫“不应得”,意思是得不到。它却得到那不应得的东西,所以叫无明。反过来,身善行等法叫“应得”,它却得不到那应得的东西,所以也叫无明。它让人不知道蕴的积聚义、处的处义、界的空义、根的主宰义、谛的真实义,所以叫无明。对于苦等,依压迫等四方面所说的四重含义,它让人不知道,所以也叫无明。在无始的轮回中,它驱使众生奔走于一切生、趣、有、识住、有情居,所以叫无明。它在究竟意义上并不存在的女人、男人等事物上奔走,而对真实存在的蕴等事物却不奔走,所以叫无明。再者,它覆蔽眼识等的依处和所缘,以及缘起和缘生法,所以叫无明。造作有为法,所以叫行。了知,所以叫识。倾向,或者导向,所以叫名。会变坏,所以叫色。扩展并导向扩展,所以叫处。接触,所以叫触。感受,所以叫受。颤抖,所以叫渴爱。紧紧执取,所以叫取。存在,或者令存在,所以叫有。产生,叫生。衰老,叫老。以此而死,叫死。巴利
Avijjādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni paṭiccasamuppādaṅgavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Pūretuṃ ayuttaṭṭhena kāyaduccaritādi avindiyaṃ nāma, aladdhabbanti attho. Taṃ avindiyaṃ vindatīti avijjā. Tabbiparītato kāyasucaritādi vindiyaṃ nāma, taṃ vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Khandhānaṃ rāsaṭṭhaṃ, āyatanānaṃ āyatanaṭṭhaṃ, dhātūnaṃ suññaṭṭhaṃ, indriyānaṃ adhipatiyaṭṭhaṃ, saccānaṃ tathaṭṭhaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā. Dukkhādīnaṃ pīḷanādivasena vuttaṃ catubbidhaṃ catubbidhaṃ atthaṃ aviditaṃ karotītipi avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre sabbayonigatibhavaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsesu satte javāpetīti avijjā, paramatthato avijjamānesu itthipurisādīsu javati, vijjamānesupi khandhādīsu na javatīti avijjā, api ca cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannānañca dhammānaṃ chādanatopi avijjā. Saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti saṅkhārā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, nāmayatīti vā nāmaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ. Āye tanoti , āyatañca nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Paritassatīti taṇhā. Upādiyati bhusaṃ gaṇhātīti upādānaṃ. Bhavati, bhāvayatīti vā bhavo. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ.
7 苦等八百零八种解答,是依照四谛的关联方式来说明的。在“苦应被遍知”等当中,依六组四句的搭配方式,有二十四种解答;从“眼、老死”这类列举开始,一直到“眼应被遍知、耳应被遍知”等,最后以“生应被遍知”结束,这样配合起来一共说了一百九十五种解答。一百九十五组四句加起来,依这些四句来算,就有七百八十种解答。在“老死应被遍知”等四句当中,共有“四种解答”,这样全部加起来就是八百零八种解答。在这里应当知道,对每一种法来说,作为主要条件的缘就是“集”。空于一切有为法的涅槃,就是“灭”。因为这里指的是“未已知欲知根”等三种出世间根不存在,所以说“未已知欲知根之灭”等话是说得通的。而“趣向灭的道路”,在一切地方都只是指圣道。这样说来,在果位上也可以使用“道”这个称呼,所以对“已知根”和“具知根”也同样适用。再者,依苦等的“遍知”等含义,说明了八百零八种解答;又依苦等的“遍知通达”等含义,说明了八百零八种解答。遍知就是依“应当通达”这个意义而说通达,所以叫遍知通达。遍知通达这个意义,就是遍知通达的含义。巴利
7.Dukkhādīni aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni catusaccayojanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādīsu hi channaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena catuvīsati vissajjanāni ‘‘cakkhu jarāmaraṇa’’nti peyyāle ‘‘cakkhu abhiññeyyaṃ sotaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādinā ‘‘jāti abhiññeyyā’’ti pariyosānena pañcanavutādhikena vissajjanasatena yojetvā vuttāni. Pañcanavutādhikaṃ catukkasataṃ hoti, tesaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena asītiadhikāni satta vissajjanasatāni. ‘‘Jarāmaraṇaṃ abhiññeyya’’ntiādike catukke ‘‘cattāri vissajjanānī’’ti evaṃ sabbāni aṭṭha ca satāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni honti. Ettha ca tassa tassa dhammassa padhānabhūto paccayo samudayoti veditabbo. Sabbasaṅkhārehi suññaṃ nibbānaṃ nirodhoti veditabbaṃ. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīnaṃ tiṇṇampi hi lokuttarindriyānaṃ ettha abhāvaṃ sandhāya anaññātaññassāmītindriyanirodhotiādi yujjati . Nirodhagāminipaṭipadāti ca sabbattha ariyamaggo eva. Evañhi vuccamāne phalepi maggavohārasambhavato aññindriyaaññātāvindriyānampi yujjati. Puna dukkhādīnaṃ pariññaṭṭhādivasena aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, puna dukkhādīnaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhaṭṭhādivasena aṭṭhasatāni aṭṭha ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Pariññā ca sā paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭhena paṭivedho cāti pariññāpaṭivedho. Pariññāpaṭivedhova attho pariññāpaṭivedhaṭṭho.
8 再进一步,把那些以老死为终点的苦等二百零二句,分别与集等七句一一配合,按照二百零二组八句来计算,就说明了一千六百一十六种解答。其中,作为主导条件的缘就是集,它的灭就是集灭。欲本身就是贪,所以叫欲贪;因为对苦生起乐想,所以对苦有欲贪,它的灭就是欲贪灭。依于苦而生起的乐和喜悦,是苦的味。苦的无常、苦的变易本性,是苦的过患。调伏对苦的欲贪、舍断对苦的欲贪,是苦的出离。依据“凡是存在的、有为的、缘生的,其灭就是它的出离”这一说法,涅槃正是苦的出离。“苦灭、集灭、欲贪灭、苦的出离”——在这四处,是以不同的有为法对立面、用不同的同义语来说明涅槃,应当这样理解。不过有些人说:“由食的集起而有苦的集起,由食的灭而有苦的灭,这是从自性上说的集灭;或者,由观见生灭而说的集灭,连同观慧,就是道,就是欲贪灭。”如果这样说的话,因为出世间根不参与观照,就不能普遍适用,所以应当采用前面所说的方式。因为在出世间根中,本来就没有欲贪,所以说欲贪灭是合理的。对身体有欲贪,对身体各部分如头发等也有欲贪;对具有老死的事物有欲贪,对老死本身也有欲贪。味和过患也应当这样配合。再进一步,把那些以老死为终点的苦等二百零二句,分别与集等六句一一配合,按照二百零二组七句来计算,就说明了一千四百一十四种解答。巴利
8. Puna tāneva dukkhādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni dviadhikāni dve padasatāni samudayādīhi sattahi sattahi padehi yojetvā dviadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ aṭṭhakasatānaṃ vasena sahassañca cha ca satāni soḷasa ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha padhānabhūto paccayo samudayo, tassa nirodho samudayanirodho. Chando eva rāgo chandarāgo, dukkhe sukhasaññāya dukkhassa chandarāgo, tassa nirodho chandarāganirodho. Dukkhaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ sukhaṃ somanassaṃ dukkhassa assādo. Dukkhassa aniccatā dukkhassa vipariṇāmadhammatā dukkhassa ādīnavo. Dukkhe chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṃ dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ kho pana kiñci bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ nirodho tassa nissaraṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.24) vacanato nibbānameva dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhanirodho samudayanirodho chandarāganirodho dukkhassa nissaraṇa’’nti nānāsaṅkhatapaṭipakkhavasena nānāpariyāyavacanehi catūsu ṭhānesu nibbānameva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘āhārasamudayā dukkhasamudayo āhāranirodhā dukkhanirodho sarasavasena samudayanirodho, atha vā udayabbayadassanena samudayanirodho saha vipassanāya maggo chandarāganirodho’’ti vadanti. Evañca vuccamāne lokuttarindriyānaṃ avipassanūpagattā na sabbasādhāraṇaṃ hotīti paṭhamaṃ vuttanayova gahetabbo. Lokuttarindriyesu hi chandarāgābhāvatoyeva chandarāganirodhoti yujjati. Sarīre chandarāgeneva sarīrekadesesu kesādīsupi chandarāgo katova hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu chandarāgeneva jarāmaraṇesupi chandarāgo katova hoti. Evaṃ assādādīnavāpi yojetabbā. Puna dukkhādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni dviadhikāni dve padasatāni samudayādīhi chahi chahi padehi yojetvā dviadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ sattakasatānaṃ vasena nayasahassañca cattāri ca satāni cuddasa ca vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni.
9 现在,为了把以色等开始、一直到老死为终点的二百零一句,配合七种随观来解说,先列出了无常随观等七种随观。这些全部加起来,连同七种纯净随观的解答,一共有一千四百一十四种解答。以无常为所缘的随观,就叫无常随观,它是对治常想的。以苦为所缘的随观,就叫苦随观,它是对治乐想的。以无我为所缘的随观,就叫无我随观,它是对治我想的。前三种随观修满之后生起厌离,这厌离本身就是随观,所以叫厌离随观,它是对治喜的。前四种随观修满之后生起离染,这离染本身就是随观,所以叫离染随观,它是对治贪的。前五种随观修满之后生起灭,这灭本身就是随观,所以叫灭随观,它是对治集的。前六种随观修满之后生起弃舍,这弃舍本身就是随观,所以叫弃舍随观,它是对治执取的。即使没有出世间根,对于能趣入观照的诸法,依据“一切行无常,一切行苦,一切法无我”的教说,它们本身也具有无常、苦、无我的性质;在那里没有常想、乐想、我想,也没有喜和贪,因此它们是具有灭的,可以依此随观;又因为存在遍舍弃舍和趣入弃舍这两种弃舍的可能,所以它们也可以配合七种随观,应当这样理解。对于以老死为终点的诸法,以无常等来观见时,老死也就算是以无常等被观见了;对于以老死为终点的诸法,厌离者、离染者,对老死也是厌离和离染的;对于以老死为终点的诸法,以灭来观见时,老死也就算是以灭被观见了;对于以老死为终点的诸法,弃舍者,就是在弃舍老死。因此,应当理解老死也与七种随观相配合。巴利
9. Idāni rūpādīni jarāmaraṇapariyantāni ekādhikāni dve padasatāni sattahi anupassanāhi yojetvā niddisituṃ paṭhamaṃ tāva aniccānupassanādayo satta anupassanā niddiṭṭhā. Tāni sabbāni sattahi suddhikaanupassanāvissajjanehi saddhiṃ sahassañca cattāri ca satāni cuddasa ca vissajjanāni honti. Aniccanti anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Sā niccasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Dukkhanti anupassanā dukkhānupassanā. Sā sukhasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Anattāti anupassanā anattānupassanā. Sā attasaññāpaṭipakkhā. Tissannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā nibbindatīti nibbidā, nibbidā ca sā anupassanā cāti nibbidānupassanā. Sā nandipaṭipakkhā. Catassannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā virajjatīti virāgo, virāgo ca so anupassanā cāti virāgānupassanā. Sā rāgapaṭipakkhā. Pañcannaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā rāgaṃ nirodhetīti nirodho, nirodho ca so anupassanā cāti nirodhānupassanā. Sā samudayapaṭipakkhā. Channaṃ anupassanānaṃ paripūrattā paṭinissajjatīti paṭinissaggo, paṭinissaggo ca so anupassanā cāti paṭinissaggānupassanā. Sā ādānapaṭipakkhā. Lokuttarindriyānaṃ asatipi vipassanūpagatte ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti (dha. pa. 277-279; paṭi. ma. 1.31) vacanato tesampi aniccadukkhānattattā tattha niccasukhattasaññānaṃ nandiyā rāgassa ca abhāvā nirodhavantānīti anupassanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggapakkhandanapaṭinissaggasambhavato ca tehipi satta anupassanā yojitāti veditabbā. Jarāmaraṇavantesu aniccādito diṭṭhesu jarāmaraṇampi aniccādito diṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu nibbindanto virajjanto jarāmaraṇe nibbinno ca viratto ca hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu nirodhato diṭṭhesu jarāmaraṇampi nirodhato diṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, jarāmaraṇavantesu paṭinissajjanto jarāmaraṇaṃ paṭinissajjantova hotīti jarāmaraṇehi satta anupassanā yojitāti veditabbā.
10 现在,依照过患智所依的五种所缘——即生等——来说明它们的同义词,共有十五种解答;依照寂静智的对治所缘,来说明无生等,也有十五种解答;再把那些生与无生等词按对句的方式组合起来,说明三十种解答。这样,在这一理趣中,总共就有六十种解答。其中,“生”:是指以过去的业为缘,在这里生起。“转起”:是指这样生起之后的持续活动。“相”:是指一切行的行相;对修观的人来说,诸行显现得好像有形状一样,所以称为相。“积累”:是指成为未来结生之因的业;因为它有造作的含义,所以称为积累。巴利
10. Idāni ādīnavañāṇassa vatthubhūtānaṃ uppādādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ vasena uppādādīni tesaṃ vevacanāni pañcadasa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, santipadañāṇassa tappaṭipakkhārammaṇavasena anuppādādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni, puna tāneva uppādānuppādādīni padāni yugaḷakavasena yojetvā tiṃsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Evaṃ imasmiṃ nayeva saṭṭhi vissajjanāni honti. Tattha uppādoti purimakammapaccayā idha uppatti. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavatti. Nimittanti sabbampi saṅkhāranimittaṃ. Yogāvacarassa hi saṅkhārā sasaṇṭhānā viya upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā nimittanti vuccanti. Āyūhanāti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Tañhi abhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena āyūhanāti vuccati.
结生:指未来的投生。因为它连接前后世,所以称为结生。趣:指结生所依托的趣。因为那是应当前往之处,所以称为趣。再生:指诸蕴的产生。投生:即《无碍解道》中所说的“已入者或投生者……”那样,是异熟的现起。生:指诞生。当有情在各处投生时,诸蕴首次显现,也就是那些诸蕴的最初出现。老:指衰老。它有两种:一是被称为住异相的有为相,二是在生命相续中,属于同一期生命的诸蕴变旧的状态,也就是大家公认的牙齿脱落等。这里指的是后者。病:指由界扰动等因缘而生起的八种疾病,即由胆汁、痰、风、三者聚合、时节变化、不适当的养护、突发伤害、业异熟所导致的疾病。因为它带来种种痛苦,所以称为病;或者因为它折磨、烧恼、动摇,所以称为病。死:众生以它而死,所以称为死。它有两种:一是被称为衰亡相的有为相,二是在同一期生命中,生命根相续的断绝。这里指的是后者。巴利
Paṭisandhīti āyatiṃ uppatti. Sā hi bhavantarapaṭisandhānato paṭisandhīti vuccati. Gatīti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Sā hi gantabbato gatīti vuccati. Nibbattīti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattīti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.72) evaṃ vuttā vipākapavatti. Jātīti jananaṃ. Tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhāvo. Jarāti jīraṇaṃ. Sā duvidhā ṭhitaññathattalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhānaṃ purāṇabhāvo ca. Sā idha adhippetā. Byādhīti dhātukkhobhapaccayasamuṭṭhito pittasemhavātasannipātautuvipariṇāmavisamaparihāraupakkamakammavipākavasena aṭṭhavidho ābādho. Vividhaṃ dukkhaṃ ādahati vidahatīti byādhi, byādhayati tāpeti, kampayatīti vā byādhi. Maraṇanti maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ. Taṃ duvidhaṃ vayalakkhaṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca. Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
“愁”就是忧伤:当人遭遇亲友、财产、疾病、戒行、见解方面的灾祸时,内心受到灼烧般的苦恼。“悲叹”就是哀号:当人遭遇亲友等灾祸时,口中发出的哭诉。“绝望”就是极度忧恼:当人遭遇亲友等灾祸时,由极重的内心痛苦所产生的嗔恨。这里,生等五项是就过患智的对象来说的,其余则是它们的同义词。因为“再生”是“生起”的同义词,“生”是“结生”的同义词,“趣、再生”这两个词指的是转起,“老”等指的是相。而“不生起”等说法,则直接指的是涅槃。巴利
Sokoti socanaṃ. Ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa cittasantāpo. Paridevoti paridevanaṃ. Ñātibyasanādīhiyeva phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Upāyāsoti bhuso āyāso. Ñātibyasanādīhiyeva phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva ādīnavañāṇassa vatthuvasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. ‘‘Nibbattī’’ti hi uppādassa, ‘‘jātī’’ti paṭisandhiyā vevacanaṃ, ‘‘gati upapattī’’ti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti. Anuppādādivacanehi pana nibbānameva vuttaṃ.
接着,又把那些生起、不生起等六十个词,分别配合苦与乐、怖畏与安稳、有染着与无染着、行与涅槃这几组词,每一组都阐述了六十种解答。其中,“苦”是因为无常,所以是苦。“乐”是因为它是苦的反面,所以是乐。凡是苦的,就是“怖畏”。“安稳”是因为它是怖畏的反面,所以是安稳。凡是怖畏的,由于还没有脱离轮回的染着和世间的染着,所以是“有染着”。“无染着”是因为它是染着的反面,所以是无染着。凡是有染着的,那不过就是“行”而已。“涅槃”是因为它是行的反面,是寂静的,所以是涅槃。因为行是燃烧着的,而涅槃是寂静的。应当这样理解:针对苦的样子、怖畏的样子、有染着的样子、行的样子,如此依照每一种样子,就流转的情况而作了相应的分别述说。巴利
Puna tāneva uppādānuppādādīni saṭṭhi padāni dukkhasukhapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, bhayakhemapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, sāmisanirāmisapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni, saṅkhāranibbānapadehi yojetvā saṭṭhi vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Tattha dukkhanti aniccattā dukkhaṃ. Dukkhapaṭipakkhato sukhaṃ. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ bhayaṃ. Bhayapaṭipakkhato khemaṃ. Yaṃ bhayaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭāmisalokāmisehi avippamuttattā sāmisaṃ. Sāmisapaṭipakkhato nirāmisaṃ. Yaṃ sāmisaṃ, taṃ saṅkhāramattameva. Saṅkhārapaṭipakkhato santattā nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhārā hi ādittā, nibbānaṃ santanti. Dukkhākārena bhayākārena sāmisākārena saṅkhārākārenāti evaṃ tena tena ākārena pavattiṃ sandhāya tathā tathā vuttanti veditabbanti.
11 摄持义等三十一种解答,是依据圣道生起的刹那来阐述的。与圣道相应的那些法,从一开始就是为了生起而被摄持,所以叫“摄持”,它们自身的本性就是摄持义。正是这些法,以彼此互为眷属的状态存在,所以是眷属义。以修习达到圆满的状态,所以是圆满义。也正是这些法,凭借正定的力量专注于同一个所缘,所以是一境义。从它们不散乱到种种不同所缘这一点来看,所以是不散乱义。依于正精进的作用,所以是策励义。凭借正定的力量,就像沐浴香粉不会被水冲散一样,这些法不会离散,所以是不流散义。因为与正定结合而不混乱,所以是无浊义。因为不被摇动,所以是不动义。依于安住在一个所缘的状态,以及依于正定的结合而稳固地住立在一个所缘上的状态,所以是住立义;以不动状态住立于所缘,所以是住立义。彼以涅槃为所缘,以其为所依、所缘之状态,所以是所缘义。对于那个所缘能自在活动的状态,所以是行境义。涅槃即出离断,因此有断义。依于彻底舍弃烦恼的方式,所以是圣道的遍舍义。依于从两端一同出起的状态,所以是出起义。依于从相的转起中返还回来的状态,所以是退还义。因为已经寂灭,所以是寂静义。因为没有热恼,并且最为殊胜,所以是美妙义。因为已经从种种烦恼中解脱,并且一心倾向所缘,所以是解脱义。由于它不是诸漏活动的范围,是极为清净的,所以是无漏义。因为超越了烦恼荒漠和轮回荒漠,所以是渡越义。因为没有行的相状,所以是无相义。因为没有渴爱的愿望期求,所以是无愿义。因为没有可以作为我的坚实之物,所以是空义。以解脱的滋味而成为同一滋味,或者以止和观的滋味同一,所以是一味义。止与观彼此不互相超越,所以是不超越义。正是它们二者如同双驾马车并行的状态,所以是双运义。圣道从诸行中脱离开来,所以是出离义。因为能证得涅槃,所以是因义。因为能现前知见涅槃,所以是见义。以作为主导和上首的状态,所以是增上主义。巴利
11.Pariggahaṭṭhādīni ekatiṃsa vissajjanāni ariyamaggakkhaṇavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ariyamaggasampayuttā hi dhammā ādito pabhuti uppādanatthaṃ pariggayhante iti pariggahā, tesaṃ sabhāvo pariggahaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva aññamaññaparivārabhāvena parivāraṭṭho. Bhāvanāpāripūrivasena paripūraṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva samādhivasena ekārammaṇapariggahamapekkhitvā ekaggaṭṭho. Nānārammaṇavikkhepābhāvamapekkhitvā avikkhepaṭṭho. Vīriyavasena paggahaṭṭho. Samādhivasena udakena nhānīyacuṇṇānaṃ viya avippakiṇṇatā avisāraṭṭho. Samādhiyogena alulitattā anāvilaṭṭho. Avikampitattā aniñjanaṭṭho. Ekattupaṭṭhānavasenāti samādhiyogena ca ekārammaṇe bhusaṃ patiṭṭhānavasena ca. Ṭhitaṭṭhoti ārammaṇe niccalabhāvena patiṭṭhitaṭṭho. Tassa nibbānārammaṇassa ālambanabhāvena ārammaṇaṭṭho. Tattheva nikāmacārabhāvena gocaraṭṭho. Nissaraṇapahānabhāvena nibbānassa pahānaṭṭho. Kilesapariccāgavasena ariyamaggassa pariccāgaṭṭho. Dubhato vuṭṭhānavasena vuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Nimittapavattehi nivattanavasena nivattanaṭṭho. Nibbutattā santaṭṭho. Atappakattā uttamattā ca paṇītaṭṭho. Kilesehi vimuttattā, ārammaṇe ca adhimuttattā vimuttaṭṭho. Āsavānaṃ avisayabhāvena parisuddhattā anāsavaṭṭho. Kilesakantārasaṃsārakantārātikkamanena taraṇaṭṭho. Saṅkhāranimittābhāvena animittaṭṭho. Taṇhāpaṇidhiabhāvena appaṇihitaṭṭho. Attasārābhāvena suññataṭṭho. Vimuttirasena ekarasatāya, samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasatāya vā ekarasaṭṭho. Samathavipassanānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anativattanaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva yuganaddhaṭṭho. Ariyamaggassa saṅkhārato niggamane niyyānaṭṭho. Nibbānasampāpanena hetuṭṭho. Nibbānapaccakkhakaraṇena dassanaṭṭho. Adhipatibhāvena ādhipateyyaṭṭhoti.
12 止等四种解答,是依止与观来说明。因为随顺无常等相而一再观察,所以叫“随观义”。对于止与观二者如同双驾马车并行,由于它们一味一味、互不超越,所以叫“不超越义”。学等九种解答,是依圣道的初、中、后阶段来说明。应当修学,所以叫“学”。应当受持,所以叫“受持义”。依戒安住之后,以业处的方式执取的所缘,因为是修习持续生起的依处,也是心活动的行境,所以叫“行境义”。在修止或修观时,对于因懈怠而沉滞的心,以修习择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支来策励,这就是“策励义”。对于因掉举而浮躁的心,以修习轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支来使它平静,这就是“抑制义”。“两边清净”是指从两边都清净,也就是排除沉滞与浮躁两边之后清净的心。应当知道,这是就那些安住于中道、以平等状态持续运作的心,而用复数来说。在策励与抑制之中,没有造作者在起作用,这就是“旁观义”。依于平等运转的心而修习,证得殊胜,这就是“殊胜证得义”。以圣道显现,就是“更上通达义”。以圣道所成就的四谛通达,就是“谛现观义”。以果定安立于灭,就是“安立于灭义”——因为它使具足者安立于称为灭尽的涅槃之中。巴利
12.Samathādīni cattāri vissajjanāni samathavipassanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Aniccādivasena anu anu passanato anupassanaṭṭho. Yuganaddhassa samathavipassanādvayassa ekarasabhāvena anativattanaṭṭho. Sikkhādīni nava vissajjanāni ariyamaggassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sikkhitabbattā sikkhā. Tassā samādātabbato samādānaṭṭho. Sīle patiṭṭhāya kammaṭṭhānavasena gahitassa ārammaṇassa bhāvanāpavattiṭṭhānattā gocaraṭṭhānattā ca gocaraṭṭho. Samathakāle vipassanākāle vā kosajjavasena līnassa cittassa dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgabhāvanāvasena ussāhanaṭṭho paggahaṭṭho. Uddhaccavasena uddhatassa cittassa passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgabhāvanāvasena sannisīdāpanaṭṭho niggahaṭṭho. Ubho visuddhānanti ubhato visuddhānaṃ, līnuddhatapakkhato nivāretvā visuddhānaṃ cittānanti attho. Majjhimabhāve ṭhitānaṃ santativasena pavattamānānaṃ cittānaṃ vasena bahuvacanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Ussāhanasannisīdāpanesu sabyāpārābhāvo ajjhupekkhanaṭṭho. Samappavattassa cittassa vasena bhāvanā visesādhigamaṭṭho. Ariyamaggapātubhāvavasena uttaripaṭivedhaṭṭho. Ariyamaggasiddhacatusaccapaṭivedhavasena saccābhisamayaṭṭho. Phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe patiṭṭhāpakaṭṭho. Sā hi taṃsamaṅgipuggalaṃ nirodhasaṅkhāte nibbāne patiṭṭhāpeti.
信根等五个释答,是依据根的义理而说的。胜解义,就是胜解之义。近住义,就是靠近所缘并安住下来的意思。见义,就是观察自性的意思。信力等五个释答,是依据力的义理而说的。以不可动摇的义理来说,信本身就是力,所以叫信力。以不信,就是由于不信。所谓不信,是指与信对立的心生起。不可动摇义,就是不可被摇动的意思,也就是无法动摇的意思。以懈怠,就是由称为懒惰状态的昏沉睡眠。以放逸,就是由与念对立的心生起。以掉举,就是由称为不寂静的掉举。以无明,就是由愚痴。念觉支等七个释答,是依据觉支的义理而说的。觉者的支分,就是觉支。殊胜且善妙的觉支,就是善觉支;念本身就是善觉支,所以叫念觉支。能简择诸法,所以叫择法。这是慧的名称。简择义,就是审察的意思。能令喜悦,所以叫喜。遍满义,就是散布的意思。令止息,就是轻安。寂止义,就是无恼害的意思。依平等而观,所以叫舍,就是平等而观,不偏袒而观的意思。这里的舍,就是那中舍,也叫觉支舍。因为具有平衡的特相,所以叫审视义。巴利
Saddhindriyādīni pañca vissajjanāni indriyaṭṭhavasena vuttāni. Adhimokkhaṭṭhoti adhimuccanaṭṭho. Upaṭṭhānaṭṭhoti ārammaṇaṃ upecca patiṭṭhānaṭṭho. Dassanaṭṭhoti sabhāvapekkhanaṭṭho. Saddhābalādīni pañca vissajjanāni balaṭṭhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Akampiyaṭṭhena saddhāva balanti saddhābalaṃ. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyena. Assaddhiyanti ca saddhāpaṭipakkhabhūto cittuppādo. Akampiyaṭṭhoti akampetabbaṭṭho, kampetuṃ na sakkāti attho. Kosajjeti kusītabhāvasaṅkhātena thinamiddhena. Pamādeti satipaṭipakkhena cittuppādena. Uddhacceti avūpasamasaṅkhātena uddhaccena. Avijjāyāti mohena. Satisambojjhaṅgādīni satta vissajjanāni bojjhaṅgaṭṭhavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Bujjhanakassa aṅgo bojjhaṅgo. Pasattho sundaro ca bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo, satiyeva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Dhamme vicinātīti dhammavicayo. Paññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Pavicayaṭṭhoti vicāraṭṭho. Pīnayatīti pīti. Pharaṇaṭṭhoti visaraṇaṭṭho. Passambhanaṃ passaddhi. Upasamaṭṭhoti niddarathaṭṭho. Upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā, samaṃ pekkhati apakkhapatitāva hutvā pekkhatīti attho. Sā idha tatramajjhattupekkhā, bojjhaṅgupekkhātipi tassā nāmaṃ. Samavāhitalakkhaṇattā paṭisaṅkhānaṭṭho.
正见等八个解释,是依道的角度来说明的。正确地见,或者依它而正确地见,或者被称赞的、善妙的见,就是正见。这属于正见。正确地思惟,或者依它而正确地思惟,或者被称赞的、善妙的思惟,就是正思惟。安立的意思,就是令心安立于所缘的意思。也有“安立所缘”这个读法。正确地语,或者依它而正确地语,或者被称赞的、善妙的语,就是正语。这是远离邪语的名称。摄持的意思,就是摄持四种语律仪的意思。正确地作,或者依它而正确地作,或者被称赞的、善妙的业,就是正业,正业就是正行。这是远离邪业的名称。等起的意思,就是等起三种身律仪的意思。正确地活命,或者依它而正确地活命,或者被称赞的、善妙的活命,就是正命。这是远离邪命的名称。清净的意思,就是清净的意思。正确地精勤,或者依它而正确地精勤,或者被称赞的、善妙的精勤,就是正精进。正确地念,或者依它而正确地念,或者被称赞的、善妙的念,就是正念。正确地定,或者依它而正确地定,或者被称赞的、善妙的定,就是正定。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni maggavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sammā passati, sammā vā tāya passanti, pasatthā sundarā vā diṭṭhīti sammādiṭṭhi. Tassā sammādiṭṭhiyā. Sammā saṅkappeti, sammā vā tena saṅkappenti, pasattho sundaro vā saṅkappoti sammāsaṅkappo. Abhiropanaṭṭhoti cittassa ārammaṇāropanaṭṭho. Ārammaṇābhiniropanaṭṭhotipi pāṭho. Sammā vadati , sammā vā tāya vadanti, pasatthā sundarā vā vācāti sammāvācā. Micchāvācāviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Pariggahaṭṭhoti catubbidhavacīsaṃvarapariggahaṭṭho. Sammā karoti, sammā vā tena karonti, pasatthaṃ sundaraṃ vā kammanti sammākammaṃ, sammākammameva sammākammanto. Micchākammantaviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Samuṭṭhānaṭṭhoti tividhakāyasaṃvarasamuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Sammā ājīvati, sammā vā tena ājīvanti, pasattho sundaro vā ājīvoti sammāājīvo. Micchājīvaviratiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Vodānaṭṭhoti parisuddhaṭṭho. Sammā vāyamati, sammā vā tena vāyamanti, pasattho sundaro vā vāyāmoti sammāvāyāmo. Sammā sarati, sammā vā tāya saranti, pasatthā sundarā vā satīti sammāsati. Sammā samādhiyati, sammā vā tena samādhiyanti, pasattho sundaro vā samādhīti sammāsamādhi.
13 13. “根”等十项回答,把它们归拢之后,按顺序逐一说明。“增上义”,就是像因陀罗的作用那样,以主宰、支配的方式成为增上。“不可动摇义”,就是不能被对立面所动摇。“出离义”,就是从世间和出世间的对立面中脱离出来。“因义”,就是正见等是断除邪见等的因,或者说一切正见等都是使人到达涅槃的因,所以叫因义。在念处中,因为跃入所缘、投入所缘而现起,所以叫“安住”;念本身就是安住,所以叫“念处”。然而,对于身、受、心、法,它依执取不净、苦、无常、无我这些行相,以及完成舍弃净、乐、常、我想的作用而运作,所以有四种分类。这些在前分阶段,可以出现在不同的心中;但在道的刹那,只有一个念,却得到四种名称。巴利
13.Indriyādīni dasa vissajjanāni rāsikatvā anupubbapaṭipāṭivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhoti indaṭṭhakaraṇavasena adhipatiattho. Akampiyaṭṭhoti paṭipakkhehi kampetuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṭṭho. Niyyānaṭṭhoti lokiyalokuttarānampi paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Hetuṭṭhoti micchādiṭṭhādīnaṃ pahānāya sammādiṭṭhādayo hetūti vā sabbepi sammādiṭṭhādayo nibbānasampāpakahetūti vā hetuṭṭho. Satipaṭṭhānesu ārammaṇesu okkhanditvā pakkhanditvā upaṭṭhānato upaṭṭhānaṃ, satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāyavedanācittadhammesu panassā asubhadukkhāniccānattākāragahaṇavase subhasukhaniccattasaññāpahānakiccasādhanavasena ca pavattito catudhā bhedo hoti. Etāni pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana ekāyeva sati cattāri nāmāni labhati.
在诸正勤中,人们依靠它来精勤努力,所以叫“勤”;它是善妙的勤,所以叫“正勤”。或者说,人们正确地依靠它来精勤努力,所以叫“正勤”;或者说,它是善妙的,因为它远离了烦恼的丑恶,同时也是勤,因为它能带来利益和安乐,由于带来最殊胜的状态,能造成勤的状态,所以叫“正勤”。这是精进的同义词。不过,按照断除已生的不善法、不让未生的不善法生起、让未生的善法生起、让已生的善法安住这四种作用来运作,它就有四种分类。这些在修行前分阶段,也存在于不同的心中;但在圣道刹那,只有一个精进,却得到四种名称。“勤励之义”,就是策励的意思。也有写成“勤之义”的异读,意思是一样的。巴利
Sammappadhānesu padahanti etenāti padhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ padhānaṃ sammappadhānaṃ. Sammā vā padahanti etenāti sammappadhānaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā taṃ kilesavirūpattavirahato padhānañca hitasukhanipphādakattena seṭṭhabhāvāvahanato padhānabhāvakaraṇato vā sammappadhānaṃ. Vīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppannānuppannānaṃ anuppannuppannānañca akusalakusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pahānānuppattiuppādaṭṭhitikiccasādhanavasena pavattito panassa catudhā bhedo hoti. Etānipi pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ cattāri nāmāni labhati. Padahanaṭṭhoti ussāhanaṭṭho. Padhānaṭṭhotipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
在“神足”这个词里,欲、精进、心、观慧这四者,每一个都能成就,所以叫“神”,意思是能圆满、能生起。或者说,众生依靠它而成就、增长、达到最殊胜的状态,所以叫“神”。按第一种含义,神本身就是足,所以叫“神足”,意思是神的一部分。按第二种含义,是神的足,所以叫“神足”。“足”是立足处,意思是达到的方法。因为依靠它,人们才能一步一步进入并到达更殊胜的境界——也就是所谓的神——所以叫“足”。这些欲等法,在前期以主导作用存在于不同心中,但在道刹那则同时存在。“成就之义”即产生之义或安立处之义。“诸谛”指四圣谛。“如性之义”指如其自性之义。这八种解说混合了世间与出世间。“诸精勤”指四种圣道精勤。“止息之义”指四种圣果的止息之义。因为道精勤在果刹那已止息,所作已办。或者,由于果的生起,诸道精勤有止息的状态。“诸果之作证之义”指以回顾方式对诸圣果的现前作证之义。这是说所缘作证,或者在果刹那说获得作证。寻等五种解说依禅支而说。寻思是寻,意思是推度。伺察是伺,意思是随伺察。“随伺察之义”即反复审察之义。“润湿之义”即依定力而令心专一之义。巴利
Iddhipādānanti ettha chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsu ekeko ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti vā etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, paṭhamenatthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyenatthena iddhiyā pādoti iddhipādo. Pādoti patiṭṭhā, adhigamūpāyoti attho. Tena hi yasmā uparūpari visesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti, tasmā pādoti vuccati. Ete chandādayo pubbabhāge adhipativasena nānācittesu labbhanti, maggakkhaṇe pana saheva labbhanti. Ijjhanaṭṭhoti nipphajjanaṭṭho patiṭṭhānaṭṭho vā. Saccānanti catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ. Tathaṭṭhoti yathāsabhāvaṭṭho. Imāni aṭṭha vissajjanāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāni. Payogānanti catunnaṃ ariyamaggapayogānaṃ. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhoti catunnaṃ ariyaphalānaṃ paṭippassaddhaṭṭho. Maggapayogo hi phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddho hoti niṭṭhitakiccattā. Maggapayogānaṃ phalodayena paṭippassaddhabhāvo vā. Phalānaṃ sacchikiriyaṭṭhoti ariyaphalānaṃ paccavekkhaṇavasena paccakkhakaraṇaṭṭho. Ārammaṇasacchikiriyā vuttā hoti, phalakkhaṇe paṭilābhasacchikiriyā vā. Vitakkādīni pañca vissajjanāni jhānaṅgavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Upavicāraṭṭhoti anumajjanaṭṭho. Abhisandanaṭṭhoti temanaṭṭho samādhivasena cittassa ekaggaṭṭho.
转向等十五种解释,是按杂项分类来说明的。在五门和意门中,有两种心把心相续转向不同于有分所缘的其他所缘,这就是转向的作用。识的作用是了别。慧的作用是了知。想的作用是认知。定的作用是专一。因为在第二禅中,定单独生起,所以称为专一,意思是它不被寻和伺所覆盖,作为最上、最殊胜的状态而生起。世间中,最上者也被称为一。或者,它远离寻和伺,作为单独的、没有伴侣的状态生起,这样也说得通。又或者,一切善定因为是诸盖或掉举的对立面,不被它们所覆盖,所以作为最上状态而生起;或者因为远离它们而作为没有伴侣的状态生起;这两种情况下,都可以合理地称为专一。证智的已知作用,是依知遍知而了知自性的作用。遍知的审察作用,是依审度遍知,从无常等角度观察的作用。断的遍舍作用,是依断遍知而断除对立面的作用。平等转起的修习有一味的作用。触的作用是接触、感受。以压迫、荷负重担等意义,是蕴的作用。以空无等意义,是界的作用。以各自界限等意义,是处的作用。依诸缘和合而造作,是有为的作用。与此相反,是无为的作用。巴利
Āvajjanādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni pakiṇṇakavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Pañcadvāramanodvāresu bhavaṅgārammaṇato aññārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ namentānaṃ dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ āvajjanaṭṭho. Viññāṇassa vijānanaṭṭho. Paññāya pajānanaṭṭho. Saññāya sañjānanaṭṭho. Samādhissa ekodaṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānasmiñhi samādhi eko udetīti ekodīti vuccati, vitakkavicārehi anajjhāruḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā uppajjatīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvā udetītipi vaṭṭati. Sabbopi vā kusalasamādhi nīvaraṇādīnaṃ uddhaccasseva vā paṭipakkhattā tehi anajjhāruḷhoti aggo hutvā udetīti vā tehi virahitoti asahāyo hutvā udetīti vā ekodīti yujjati. Abhiññāya ñātaṭṭhoti ñātapariññāya sabhāvajānanaṭṭho. Pariññāya tīraṇaṭṭhoti tīraṇapariññāya aniccādito upaparikkhaṇaṭṭho. Pahānassa pariccāgaṭṭhoti pahānapariññāya paṭipakkhapajahanaṭṭho. Samappavattāya bhāvanāya ekarasaṭṭho. Phassanaṭṭhoti phusanaṭṭho vindanaṭṭho. Pīḷābhāravahanādinā khandhaṭṭho. Suññādinā dhātuṭṭho. Sakasakamariyādāyatanādinā āyatanaṭṭho. Paccayehi saṅgamma katavasena saṅkhataṭṭho. Tabbiparītena asaṅkhataṭṭho.
14 心义等十五种解释,是就与心的关联来说明的。关于“心义”:在这里,能思虑所缘的就是心,意思是“识知”。不过,其中如果是速行心,它依照速行路线的方式累积自己的相续,所以也叫心;如果是果报心,它由业和烦恼所造作,所以也叫心。一切心都随各自的情况,因为具有认知的性质而叫心,因为具有造作的性质而叫心。再者,凡是成为轮回之因、能累积轮回之苦的,也叫心。这样,由于对所缘有认知等性质,这就是“心义”。“无间”:在它之后,下一个心或果心生起时,中间没有任何间隔,所以叫无间。这种无间的性质,就是无间性。心的这种无间性,就是心无间性,这就是心无间性的含义。具体来说,除了阿拉汉的死亡心之外,任何一颗刚灭去的无间心,都有能力让下一个心生起;同样,道心灭后,能无间地令果心生起,这是它的要点。“心的出起”:种姓心从相出起,道心从相的相续出起,这就是出起的作用。“心的回转”:就是这两种心,按上面所说的方式出起后,转向涅槃,这就是回转的作用。“心的因”:心以九种因作为因缘,这就是因的作用。“心的缘”:心以依处、所缘等许多缘为缘,这就是缘的作用。“心的依处”:心以眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、心所依处为依处,这就是依处的作用。“心的地”:心依生起之处,有欲界等地的作用。“心的所缘”:以色等为所缘的作用。“心的行处”:以惯常所缘的转起处为行处的作用。“心的行”:按上面所说的识之行的方式,就是行的作用;或者,以发动和现行的意义为行的作用。“心的去”:即使心没有移动,但依取远、近所缘的方式,而有去的作用。“心的引出”:为了使心从已取的所缘转向其他所缘,而有引出的作用。“心的出离”:道心从轮回出离,这就是出离的作用。又如“已得离欲者,心从欲贪中解脱出来”等所说,按这种方式,心从烦恼中解脱,就是出离的作用。巴利
14.Cittaṭṭhādīni pañcadasa vissajjanāni cittasambandhena niddiṭṭhāni. Cittaṭṭhoti ettha ārammaṇaṃ cintetīti cittaṃ, vijānātīti attho. Yaṃ panettha javanaṃ hoti, taṃ javanavīthivasena attano santānaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ, yaṃ vipākaṃ hoti, taṃ kammakilesehi citantipi cittaṃ, sabbampi yathānurūpaṃ cittatāya cittaṃ, cittakaraṇatāya cittaṃ, yaṃ vaṭṭassa paccayo hoti, taṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ cinotītipi cittaṃ. Evaṃ ārammaṇe cittatādito cittaṭṭho. Cittuppādane phaluppādane vā nāssa antaramatthīti anantaraṃ, anantarassa bhāvo ānantariyaṃ, cittassa ānantariyaṃ cittānantariyaṃ, so cittānantariyaṭṭho. Arahato cuticittaṃ vajjetvā yassa kassaci samanantaraniruddhassa cittassa anantaracittuppādane samatthabhāvo maggacittassa anantaraṃ phaluppādane samatthabhāvoti adhippāyo. Cittassa vuṭṭhānaṭṭhoti gotrabhucittassa nimittato, maggacittassa nimittapavattato vuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Cittassa vivaṭṭanaṭṭhoti tasseva cittadvayassa yathāvuttato vuṭṭhitassa nibbāne vivaṭṭanaṭṭho. Cittassa hetuṭṭhoti cittassa hetupaccayabhūtānaṃ navannaṃ hetūnaṃ hetuṭṭho. Cittassa paccayaṭṭhoti cittassa vatthārammaṇādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paccayānaṃ paccayaṭṭho. Cittassa vatthuṭṭhoti cittassa vatthubhūtānaṃ cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyahadayavatthūnaṃ vatthuṭṭho. Cittassa bhūmaṭṭhoti cittassa uppattidesavasena kāmāvacarādibhūmiattho. Cittassa ārammaṇaṭṭhoti rūpādiārammaṇaṭṭho. Paricitassārammaṇassa sañcaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena gocaraṭṭho. Upari vuttaviññāṇacariyāvasena cariyaṭṭho. Atha vā payogasamudācāraṭṭho cariyaṭṭho. Cittassa gamanābhāvepi dūrasantikārammaṇagahaṇavasena gataṭṭho. Abhinīhāraṭṭhoti gahitārammaṇato aññārammaṇamanasikāratthaṃ cittassa abhinīharaṇaṭṭho. Cittassa niyyānaṭṭhoti maggacittassa vaṭṭato niyyānaṭṭho. ‘‘Nekkhammaṃ paṭiladdhassa kāmacchandato cittaṃ nissaṭaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.24, 191 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) nayena cittassa nissaraṇaṭṭho.
15 “一性”等四十二种解释,是联系“一性”来说明的。“一性”指所缘的单一性,意思是只有一个所缘。依初禅进入所缘,这是趋入的作用。依第二禅生起净信,这是净信的作用。依第三禅安住,这是安住的作用。依第四禅解脱,这是解脱的作用。依观察而见到“这是寂静的”,这是观见的作用。“已修习状态”等五种,是定自在力差别的表现。“已修习状态”是指变得像已调伏、随时可用的车乘一样。“已为所依状态”是指在稳固基础的意义上,变得像地基一样。“已现前状态”是指已经现前、已掌握的状态。“已熟习状态”是指从各方面完全熟悉、反复修习的状态。“善精勤状态”是指善于精勤,也就是善加完成的状态。或者,按转向自在、入定自在、决意自在、出定自在、观察自在的顺序,依次对应这五种词。当依遍处等所缘修习达到顶峰时,心与心所法被完全掌握、随顺和圆满,这是摄持、随从、圆满的作用。由于它们正确地安止于同一所缘,汇集一处,这是汇聚的作用。由于它们力量已臻圆满,能够胜伏所缘而安立,这是决意的作用。或者,依止与观,从最初起,以恭敬修习之力,这是修习的作用。以增长之力,这是修行的作用。以反复行持之力,这是多修的作用。已多修者以善能生起之力,这是善生起的作用。已善生起者,以善能从违逆法中解脱、以及对所缘善能胜解之力,这是善解脱的作用。巴利
15.Ekattādīni dvācattālīsa vissajjanāni ekattasambandhena niddiṭṭhāni. Ekatteti ārammaṇekatte, ekārammaṇeti attho. Paṭhamajjhānavasena pakkhandanaṭṭho. Dutiyajjhānavasena pasīdanaṭṭho. Tatiyajjhānavasena santiṭṭhanaṭṭho. Catutthajjhānavasena muccanaṭṭho. Paccavekkhaṇavasena etaṃ santanti passanaṭṭho. Yānīkataṭṭhādayo pañca samādhissa vasībhāvavisesā. Yānīkataṭṭhoti yuttayānasadisakataṭṭho. Vatthukataṭṭhoti patiṭṭhaṭṭhena vatthu viya kataṭṭho. Anuṭṭhitaṭṭhoti paccupaṭṭhitaṭṭho. Paricitaṭṭhoti samantato citaṭṭho. Susamāraddhaṭṭhoti suṭṭhu samāraddhaṭṭho , sukataṭṭhoti attho. Āvajjanasamāpajjanaadhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇavasitāvasena vā paṭipāṭiyā pañca padāni yojetabbāni. Kasiṇādiārammaṇabhāvanāya sikhāppattakāle cittacetasikānaṃ pariggahaparivāraparipūraṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva sammā samāhitattā ekārammaṇe samosaraṇena samodhānaṭṭho. Tesaṃyeva balappattiyā ārammaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā patiṭṭhānavasena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭho. Samathassa vipassanāya vā ādito, ādarena vā sevanavasena āsevanaṭṭho. Vaḍḍhanavasena bhāvanaṭṭho. Punappunaṃ karaṇavasena bahulīkammaṭṭho. Bahulīkatassa suṭṭhu samuṭṭhitavasena susamuggataṭṭho. Susamuggatassa paccanīkehi suṭṭhu vimuttivasena ārammaṇe ca suṭṭhu adhimuttivasena suvimuttaṭṭho.
依觉支来说,觉悟之义等四个词是:入流道觉支的作用是觉悟,一来道觉支的作用是随觉,不来道觉支的作用是对觉,阿拉汉道觉支的作用是正觉。或者,观智觉支的作用是觉悟,见道觉支的作用是随觉,修道觉支的作用是对觉,果位觉支的作用是正觉。应当知道,正如前面所说,诸觉支对相应的修行者以令觉悟等方式起作用,因此有觉悟之义等四种作用。正如前面所说的那些觉支,以觉悟之义成为被称为“觉者”的修行者的一方,所以叫菩提分法。应当知道,前面所说的那些觉支,其菩提分法之义等四种作用也是如此。依观智之慧照明所缘,这是照明的作用。依次依四种道智,有照明、辉照、对耀、遍耀的作用。或者,依次依四种道智有照明等作用,依果智则有遍耀的作用。巴利
Bujjhanaṭṭhādīni cattāri padāni bojjhaṅgavasena vuttāni. Sotāpattimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ bujjhanaṭṭho. Sakadāgāmimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ anubujjhanaṭṭho. Anāgāmimaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ paṭibujjhanaṭṭho. Arahattamaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ sambujjhanaṭṭho. Vipassanābojjhaṅgānaṃ vā bujjhanaṭṭho. Dassanamaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ anubujjhanaṭṭho. Bhāvanāmaggabojjhaṅgānaṃ paṭibujjhanaṭṭho. Phalabojjhaṅgānaṃ sambujjhanaṭṭho. Yathāvuttanayeneva bojjhaṅgānaṃ tassa tassa puggalassa bodhanādikaraṇena bodhanaṭṭhādayo cattāro atthā veditabbā. Yathāvuttānaṃyeva bojjhaṅgānaṃ bujjhanaṭṭhena ‘‘bodho’’ti laddhanāmassa puggalassa pakkhe bhavattā bodhipakkhiyā nāma. Tesaṃ yathāvuttānaṃyeva bodhipakkhiyaṭṭhādayo cattāro atthā veditabbā. Vipassanāpaññāvasena jotanaṭṭho. Kamato catumaggapaññāvasena ujjotanānujjotanapaṭijjotanasañjotanaṭṭho. Kamato catumaggapaññāvasena vā jotanaṭṭhādayo, phalapaññāvasena sañjotanaṭṭho veditabbo.
16 令光辉等十八个释义,是依圣道来说明的。圣道在谁心中生起,就使那个人发光、明亮、照耀,所以叫“令光辉”,这就是令光辉的涵义。由于圣道自身具有极其明亮的状态,所以有自照耀的涵义。由于能使烦恼干枯,所以有令热干的涵义。由于以无垢的涅槃为所缘,所以有无垢的涵义。由于与圣道相应的心所法没有污垢,所以有离垢的涵义。由于在以涅槃为所缘这件事上没有污垢,所以有无垢秽的涵义。或者也可以说:入流道有无垢的涵义;一来道和不来道有离垢的涵义;阿拉汉道有无垢秽的涵义。又或者说:声闻道有无垢的涵义;独觉道有离垢的涵义;正自觉者的道有无垢秽的涵义。由于没有烦恼所造成的不平等,所以有平等的涵义。就像“正确地通达慢”等经文里那样,以断除烦恼为意义,所以有通达的涵义。在镇伏断、彼分断、正断、止息断、出离断这五种远离中,因为圣道属于正断远离,所以有远离的涵义,也就是分离的涵义。由于践行于出离远离即涅槃,所以有远离行的涵义。在五种离贪中,因为属于正断离贪,所以有离贪的涵义,也就是离染的涵义。由于践行于出离离贪即涅槃,所以有离贪行的涵义。在五种灭中,因为属于正断灭,所以有灭的涵义。由于践行于苦灭即涅槃,所以有灭行的涵义。由于舍遣、跃入、放下的缘故,所以有放舍的涵义。因为圣道以正断的方式断除烦恼,所以是舍遣放舍;以取涅槃为所缘而跃入涅槃,所以是跃入放舍。而观则以彼分的方式断除烦恼,所以是舍遣放舍;由于倾向于涅槃,所以是跃入放舍。这里指的不是观。由于以放舍的方式行持,所以有放舍行的涵义。在五种解脱中,因为属于正断解脱,所以有解脱的涵义。由于践行于出离解脱,所以有解脱行的涵义。巴利
16.Patāpanaṭṭhādīni aṭṭhārasa vissajjanāni ariyamaggavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Ariyamaggo hi yassuppajjati, taṃ patāpeti pabhāseti virocāpetīti patāpano, tassa patāpanaṭṭho. Tasseva atipabhassarabhāvena sayaṃ virocanaṭṭho. Kilesānaṃ visosanena santāpanaṭṭho. Amalanibbānārammaṇattā amalaṭṭho. Sampayuttamalābhāvena vimalaṭṭho. Ārammaṇakaraṇamalābhāve nimmalaṭṭho. Atha vā sotāpattimaggassa amalaṭṭho. Sakadāgāmianāgāmimaggānaṃ vimalaṭṭho. Arahattamaggassa nimmalaṭṭho. Atha vā sāvakamaggassa amalaṭṭho. Paccekabuddhamaggassa vimalaṭṭho. Sammāsambuddhamaggassa nimmalaṭṭho. Kilesavisamābhāvena samaṭṭho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28; a. ni. 3.33; 5.200) viya kilesappahānaṭṭhena samayaṭṭho. Vikkhambhanatadaṅgasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇasaṅkhātesu pañcasu vivekesu samucchedavivekattā vivekaṭṭho, vinābhāvaṭṭho. Nissaraṇaviveke nibbāne caraṇato vivekacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu virāgesu samucchedavirāgattā virāgaṭṭho, virajjanaṭṭho. Nissaraṇavirāge nibbāne caraṇato virāgacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu nirodhesu samucchedanirodhattā nirodhaṭṭho. Dukkhanirodhe nibbāne caraṇato nirodhacariyaṭṭho. Pariccāgapakkhandanavosaggattā vosaggaṭṭho. Ariyamaggo hi samucchedavasena kilesappahānato pariccāgavosaggo, ārammaṇakaraṇena nibbānapakkhandanato pakkhandanavosaggo ca. Vipassanā pana tadaṅgavasena kilesappahānato pariccāgavosaggo, tanninnabhāvena nibbānapakkhandanato pakkhandanavosaggo. Na so idha adhippeto. Vosaggabhāvena caraṇato vosaggacariyaṭṭho. Pañcasu vimuttīsu samucchedavimuttittā vimuttaṭṭho. Nissaraṇavimuttiyaṃ caraṇato vimutticariyaṭṭho.
在欲、精进、心、观这四种被称为神足的法中,按照每一种神足各十条、依四种神足合计四十条来解说,对“欲之义”等四十项作了说明。欲之义,就是想要去做的作用。以欲为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。因为它是与它同时生起的诸法的依靠处,所以是足的作用;也可以读作足之义。由于是神足,以主导的地位策励修行,所以是精勤的作用。在实际用功的时候,它能成就所愿,所以是成就的作用。与信相应时,是坚定信解的作用。与精进相应时,是策励的作用。与念相应时,是现起的作用。与定相应时,是不散乱的作用。与慧相应时,是观见的作用。策励之义就是精进之义。以精进为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。因为本身就是精进,所以是策励的作用。思惟等作用就是心之义。以心为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。审察的作用就是观之义。以观为首、开始修习的时候,它是根本的作用。因为本身就是观,所以是观见的作用。巴利
Chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsaṅkhātesu catūsu iddhipādesu ekekaiddhipādavasena dasa dasa katvā caturiddhipādavasena chandaṭṭhādīni cattālīsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Kattukamyataṭṭho chandaṭṭho. Chandaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sahajātānaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvena pādaṭṭho. Padaṭṭhoti vā pāṭho. Iddhipādattā adhipatibhāvena padhānaṭṭho. Payogakāle ijjhanaṭṭho. Saddhāsampayogena adhimokkhaṭṭho. Vīriyasampayogena paggahaṭṭho. Satisampayogena upaṭṭhānaṭṭho. Samādhisampayogena avikkhepaṭṭho. Paññāsampayogena dassanaṭṭho. Paggahaṭṭho vīriyaṭṭho. Vīriyaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sayaṃ vīriyattā paggahaṭṭho. Cintanaṭṭhādiko cittaṭṭho. Cittaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Upaparikkhanaṭṭho vīmaṃsaṭṭho. Vīmaṃsaṃ sīsaṃ katvā bhāvanārambhakāle mūlaṭṭho. Sayaṃ vīmaṃsattā dassanaṭṭho.
17 苦的“逼迫义”等十六个解释,是依照四谛各自的真实特征来说明的。仅仅通过观察苦,就有逼迫义。通过观察苦的积聚即集,就有有为义。通过观察能消除一切烦恼热恼的清凉之道,就有热恼义。通过观察不变易法的灭,就有变易义。仅仅通过观察集,就有积聚义。通过观察由集所积聚的苦,就有因缘义。通过观察脱离联结的灭,就有联结义。通过观察作为出离的道,就有障碍义。仅仅通过观察灭,就有出离义。通过观察不离烦恼的集,就有远离义。通过观察有为的道,就有无为义。通过观察如毒般的苦,就有甘露义。仅仅通过观察道,就有出离义。通过观察不能成就涅槃的因即集,就有因义。通过观察极难见到的灭,就有见义。通过观察如贫贱之人般的苦,就显现出如高贵家族般的自在义。这样,通过观察各个圣谛以及观察其他圣谛,每一圣谛各有四种特征义,已经宣说完毕。巴利
17.Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīni soḷasa vissajjanāni saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Dukkhadassaneneva pīḷanaṭṭho. Dukkhāyūhanasamudayadassanena saṅkhataṭṭho. Sabbakilesasantāpaharasusītalamaggadassanena santāpaṭṭho. Avipariṇāmadhammanirodhadassanena vipariṇāmaṭṭho. Samudayadassaneneva āyūhanaṭṭho. Samudayāyūhitadukkhadassanena nidānaṭṭho. Visaññogabhūtanirodhadassanena saññogaṭṭho. Niyyānabhūtamaggadassanena palibodhaṭṭho. Nirodhadassaneneva nissaraṇaṭṭho. Avivekabhūtasamudayadassanena vivekaṭṭho. Saṅkhatabhūtamaggadassanena asaṅkhataṭṭho. Visabhūtadukkhadassanena amataṭṭho. Maggadassaneneva niyyānaṭṭho. Nibbānasampattiyā ahetubhūtasamudayadassanena hetuṭṭho. Sududdasanirodhadassanena dassanaṭṭho. Kapaṇajanasadisadukkhadassanena uḷārakulasadiso ādhipateyyaṭṭho pātubhavatīti. Evaṃ taṃtaṃsaccadassanena tadaññasaccadassanena ca ekekassa saccassa cattāro cattāro lakkhaṇaṭṭhā vuttā.
这里,“真实义”等十二个解答,是按统摄一切法的十二句来显示的。“真实义”,就是如自性存在的义;“无我义”,就是没有我的义;“谛义”,就是不欺诳的义;“通达义”,就是应当通达的义;“证知义”,就是应当证知的义;“遍知义”,就是应当以知遍知、度遍知来了知的义;“法义”,就是持自性等的义;“界义”,就是空等的义;“已知义”,就是能够了知的义;“作证义”,就是应当作证的义;“触达义”,就是应当以智触达的义;“现观义”,就是应当以省察智正确现观的义,或者应当以智获得的义。因为像“贤者以义现观”这样的说法里,获得也称为现观。巴利
Tathaṭṭhādīni dvādasa vissajjanāni sabbadhammasaṅgāhakadvādasapadavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Tathaṭṭhoti yathāsabhāvaṭṭho. Anattaṭṭhoti attavirahitaṭṭho. Saccaṭṭhoti avisaṃvādanaṭṭho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhoti paṭivijjhitabbaṭṭho. Abhijānanaṭṭhoti abhijānitabbaṭṭho. Parijānanaṭṭhoti ñātatīraṇapariññāya parijānitabbaṭṭho. Dhammaṭṭhoti sabhāvadhāraṇādiattho. Dhātuṭṭhoti suññādiattho. Ñātaṭṭhoti jānituṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭho. Sacchikiriyaṭṭhoti sacchikātabbaṭṭho. Phassanaṭṭhoti ñāṇena phusitabbaṭṭho. Abhisamayaṭṭhoti paccavekkhaṇañāṇena abhisammāgantabbaṭṭho, ñāṇena paṭilabhitabbaṭṭho vā. Paṭilābhopi hi ‘‘atthābhisamayā dhīro’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.130) viya abhisamayoti vuccati.
18 18. “出离”等七项解答,是依近行定来说明的。“出离”,就是与欲贪相对治的无贪。“光明想”,就是在与昏沉睡眠相对治的光明相上生起的想。“不散乱”,就是与掉举相对治的定。“法决定”,就是与疑相对治的智。“智”,就是与无明相对治的智。“喜悦”,就是与不喜相对治的喜。“初禅”等八项解答,是依色界与无色界等至来说明的。不过,前文在色界等至之后,紧接着依与色界禅那的关联,说明了四梵住。巴利
18. Nekkhammādīni satta vissajjanāni upacārajjhānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Nekkhammanti kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho alobho. Ālokasaññāti thinamiddhassa paṭipakkhe ālokanimitte saññā. Avikkhepoti uddhaccassa paṭipakkho samādhi. Dhammavavatthānanti vicikicchāya paṭipakkhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Ñāṇanti avijjāya paṭipakkhaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Pāmojjanti aratipaṭipakkhā pīti. Paṭhamajjhānādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni rūpārūpasamāpattivasena niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā pana rūpasamāpattianantaraṃ rūpajjhānasambandhena cattāro brahmavihārā niddiṭṭhā.
无常随观等,是在出世间道的前分,按十八种大观来说明的。前面则只说了能与色等配合的七种随观,这里则全部都说了。有人问:为什么不讲聚思惟和生灭随观呢?因为依靠这两种,无常随观等才能成就,所以说了这些,那两种也就等于说了;或者,离开了无常随观等,那两种就无法生起,所以说了这些,那两种也就等于说了。坏灭随观:就是观察现在色蕴等坏灭的智,以及见到每一蕴坏灭之后,紧接着观察以该蕴为所缘的心、心所坏灭的智。衰灭随观:就是在见到现在诸蕴坏灭之后,随即类推观察过去、未来诸蕴坏灭的智。变异随观:由于心已倾向于称为坏灭的灭尽,于是见到一切过去、未来、现在诸蕴都是变异的,这就是对一切诸蕴变异相的观察智。无相随观:这样见到一切行都是变异,进而以无常来观照时,那个无常随观由于断除常相、没有常相,就称为无相随观。无愿随观:在无常随观之后生起的苦随观,由于断除对乐的希求、没有愿求,就称为无愿随观。巴利
Aniccānupassanādīni lokuttaramaggassa pubbabhāge aṭṭhārasamahāvipassanāvasena niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā pana rūpādīhi yojanūpagā satta anupassanā eva vuttā, idha pana sabbāpi vuttā. Kalāpasammasanaudayabbayānupassanā kasmā na vuttāti ce? Tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ vasena aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sijjhanato imāsu vuttāsu tā dvepi vuttāva honti, aniccānupassanādīhi vā vinā tāsaṃ dvinnaṃ appavattito imāsu vuttāsu tā dvepi vuttāva honti. Khayānupassanāti paccuppannānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ bhaṅgadassanañāṇañca taṃtaṃkhandhabhaṅgadassanānantaraṃ tadārammaṇacittacetasikabhaṅgadassanañāṇañca. Vayānupassanāti paccuppannānaṃ khandhānaṃ bhaṅgadassanānantaraṃ tadanvayeneva atītānāgatakhandhānaṃ bhaṅgadassanañāṇaṃ. Vipariṇāmānupassanāti tasmiṃ bhaṅgasaṅkhāte nirodhe adhimuttattā, atha sabbepi atītānāgatapaccuppannā khandhā vipariṇāmavantoti sabbesaṃ vipariṇāmadassanañāṇaṃ. Animittānupassanāti evaṃ sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ vipariṇāmaṃ disvā aniccato vipassantassa aniccānupassanāva niccanimittapajahanavasena niccanimittābhāvā animittānupassanā nāma hoti. Appaṇihitānupassanāti aniccānupassanānantaraṃ pavattā dukkhānupassanāva sukhapatthanāpajahanavasena paṇidhiabhāvā appaṇihitānupassanā nāma hoti.
空随观:紧接在苦随观之后生起的,就是无我随观;它因为舍弃我执、见到诸法空无自我,所以叫空随观。增上慧法观:这样反复见到诸行的坏灭之后,以无常等角度观照的禅修者,见到诸行本身在坏灭,诸行的死灭之外没有别的什么;这是依坏灭而把握空之后生起的观。它既是增上慧,又是对诸法的观,所以叫增上慧法观。如实知见:反复见到坏灭之后,生起“诸行是可怖的”这种怖畏现起智。过患随观:依怖畏现起而生起的、见到一切生存状态等当中过患的智。依据《无碍解道》所说:“怖畏现起之慧、过患之智以及厌离,这些法意义同一,只是名称不同。”因此,说到怖畏现起和过患随观时,厌离随观在这里也已经被说到了;只是因为它从开头算起列为第四项,所以这里没有另外说。审察随观:由欲解脱智生起的、成为解脱方法的、名为审察随观的无常苦无我随观智。依据《无碍解道》所说:“欲解脱、审察随观以及行舍,这些法意义同一,只是名称不同。”因此,审察随观被说出时,欲解脱智和行舍智也就已经被说到了。转向随观:依随顺智而生起的种姓智。因为种姓智是依随顺智而成就的,所以说种姓智时,随顺智也就已经被说到了。这样,十八种大观的次第被宣说时,与巴利圣典文本是相符的。因为在根论中说道——巴利
Suññatānupassanāti dukkhānupassanānantaraṃ pavattā anattānupassanāva attābhinivesapajahanavasena attasuññatādassanato suññatānupassanā nāma hoti. Adhipaññādhammavipassanāti evaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgaṃ passitvā passitvā aniccādito vipassantassa saṅkhārāva bhijjanti, saṅkhārānaṃ maraṇaṃ na añño koci atthīti bhaṅgavasena suññataṃ gahetvā pavattā vipassanā. Sā hi adhipaññā ca dhammesu ca vipassanāti katvā adhipaññādhammavipassanāti vuccati. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti bhaṅgaṃ disvā disvā ‘‘sabhayā saṅkhārā’’ti pavattaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ. Ādīnavānupassanāti bhayatupaṭṭhānavasena uppannaṃ sabbabhavādīsu ādīnavadassanañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yā ca bhayatupaṭṭhāne paññā yañca ādīnave ñāṇaṃ yā ca nibbidā, ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vacanato bhayatupaṭṭhānādīnavānupassanāsu vuttāsu nibbidānupassanā idhāpi vuttāva hoti. Ādito catutthaṃ katvā vuttattā panidha na vuttā. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanāti muñcitukamyatāñāṇavasena uppannaṃ muñcanassa upāyakaraṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaññitaṃ aniccadukkhānattānupassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Yā ca muñcitukamyatā yā ca paṭisaṅkhānupassanā yā ca saṅkhārupekkhā, ime dhammā ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.227) vacanato paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya vuttāya muñcitukamyatāsaṅkhārupekkhāñāṇāni vuttāneva honti. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāti anulomañāṇavasena uppannaṃ gotrabhuñāṇaṃ. Anulomañāṇena gotrabhuñāṇassa sijjhanato gotrabhuñāṇe vutte anulomañāṇaṃ vuttameva hoti. Evañhi aṭṭhārasannaṃ mahāvipassanānaṃ paṭipāṭi vuccamānā pāḷiyā sameti. Vuttañhi indriyakathāyaṃ –
在前分阶段,以五根依初禅的方式,五根已从五根中脱离;在初禅中,以五根依第二禅的方式,五根已从五根中脱离。巴利
‘‘Pubbabhāge pañcahindriyehi paṭhamajjhānavasena pañcindriyāni nissaṭāni honti, paṭhame jhāne pañcahindriyehi dutiyajjhānavasena pañcindriyāni nissaṭāni hontī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.192) –
按照这样的方法,从最初开始,一直到阿拉汉果,诸根是依次第由低到高被宣说的。因此,十八种大观按照上面所说的顺序,与巴利圣典是相符的。不过在《清净道论》中——巴利
Ādinā nayena yāva arahattaphalā uttaruttaripaṭipāṭiyā indriyāni vuttāni. Tasmā aṭṭhārasa mahāvipassanā yathāvuttakkamena pāḷiyā yujjanti. Visuddhimagge pana –
坏灭随观:通过分解密集,以“无常即坏灭”之义,如此观见坏灭的智慧。变易随观:依色七法、非色七法等,超越各个分界而见其以其他方式转起;或见已生起者以老与死两种方式变易。如实智见:即把握有缘的名色。巴利
‘‘Khayānupassanāti ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti evaṃ khayaṃ passato ñāṇaṃ. Vipariṇāmānupassanāti rūpasattakaarūpasattakādivasena taṃ taṃ paricchedaṃ atikkamma aññathā pavattidassanaṃ. Uppannassa vā jarāya ceva maraṇena ca dvīhākārehi vipariṇāmadassanaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti sapaccayanāmarūpapariggaho’’ti (visuddhi. 2.850) –
已经说过了。那看起来和巴利圣典相矛盾。所谓“转向随观”,说的是行舍智和随顺智。那也看起来和巴利圣典相矛盾。因为在《行论》中说:巴利
Vuttaṃ. Taṃ tāya pāḷiyā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāti saṅkhārupekkhā ceva anulomañcāti vuttaṃ. Tañca pāḷiyā viruddhaṃ viya dissati. Cariyākathāyañhi –
为了无常随观而转向的,是唯作无记的识行;无常随观是智行……乃至为了审察随观而转向的,是唯作无记的识行;审察随观是智行。巴利
‘‘Aniccānupassanatthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākatā viññāṇacariyā. Aniccānupassanā ñāṇacariyā…pe… paṭisaṅkhānupassanatthāya āvajjanakiriyābyākatā viññāṇacariyā. Paṭisaṅkhānupassanā ñāṇacariyā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.71) –
对于每一种智,都能各自获得不同的转向,所以对每一种智都分别说明了各自的转向。但是,对于“转向随观”,并没有说明它的转向,而只是说“转向随观是智行”。如果行舍智和随顺智可以称为转向随观,那么既然这类转向可能存在,就应该为了这个目的而说明转向,然而并没有为了这个目的说明转向。至于种姓智,它没有单独的转向,因为它只生起于随顺转向的路心之中。因此,既然没有说明以转向随观为目的的转向,那么只有种姓智才恰好可以称为“转向随观”。巴利
Yassa yassa ñāṇassa visuṃ visuṃ āvajjanaṃ labbhati, tassa tassa visuṃ visuṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Vivaṭṭanānupassanāya pana āvajjanaṃ avatvāva ‘‘vivaṭṭanānupassanā ñāṇacariyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi saṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇāni vivaṭṭanānupassanā nāma siyuṃ, tadāvajjanasambhavā tadatthāya ca āvajjanaṃ vadeyya, na ca tadatthāya āvajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Gotrabhuñāṇassa pana visuṃ āvajjanaṃ natthi anulomāvajjanavīthiyaṃyeva uppattito. Tasmā vivaṭṭanānupassanatthāya āvajjanassa avuttattā gotrabhuñāṇameva ‘‘vivaṭṭanānupassanā’’ti yujjati.
19 入流道等八种解说,是依出世间道与果来阐明的。入流,就是进入圣流;这入流本身就是道,所以叫入流道。入流的果叫入流果;等至的意思是真正达到,入流果本身就是等至,所以叫入流果等至。依结生只再来这世间一次,所以叫一来者,他的道叫一来道。一来者的果叫一来果。依结生不再来欲界,所以叫不来者,他的道叫不来道。不来者的果叫不来果。因为远离烦恼、已杀尽烦恼之敌、已断轮回之轮的辐条、没有恶行的隐藏、值得承受资具供养等,所以叫阿拉汉;阿拉汉的状态就是阿拉汉性。那是什么?就是阿拉汉果。阿拉汉的道叫阿拉汉道,阿拉汉的果就是阿拉汉果。巴利
19.Sotāpattimaggādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni lokuttaramaggaphalavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sotassa āpajjanaṃ sotāpatti, sotāpatti eva maggo sotāpattimaggo. Sotāpattiyā phalaṃ sotāpattiphalaṃ, samāpajjīyatīti samāpatti, sotāpattiphalameva samāpatti sotāpattiphalasamāpatti. Paṭisandhivasena sakiṃyeva imaṃ lokaṃ āgacchatīti sakadāgāmī, tassa maggo sakadāgāmimaggo. Sakadāgāmissa phalaṃ sakadāgāmiphalaṃ. Paṭisandhivaseneva kāmabhavaṃ na āgacchatīti anāgāmī, tassa maggo anāgāmimaggo. Anāgāmissa phalaṃ anāgāmiphalaṃ. Kilesehi ārakattā, kilesārīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ hatattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā arahaṃ, arahato bhāvo arahattaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Arahattaphalaṃ. Arahattassa maggo arahattamaggo. Arahattameva phalaṃ arahattaphalaṃ.
“以决断之义称为信根”等,一直到“以真实之义称为谛”,一共指出了三十三种解答。这些和前文“信根具有决断之义”等三十三种解答是相同的。唯一的差别在于:那里是依诸法来说明其义,这里是依诸义来说明相应的法。“以不散乱之义称为止”等四种解答,与前文“止具有不散乱之义”等四种解答之间的差别,也应当按照同样的方式理解。巴利
‘‘Adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriya’’ntiādīni ‘‘tathaṭṭhena saccā’’tipariyantāni tettiṃsa vissajjanāni niddiṭṭhāni. Heṭṭhā ‘‘saddhindriyassa adhimokkhaṭṭho’’tiādīhi tettiṃsāya vissajjanehi samānāni. Kevalañhi tattha dhammehi atthā niddiṭṭhā, idha atthehi dhammā niddiṭṭhāti ayaṃ viseso. ‘‘Avikkhepaṭṭhena samatho’’tiādīnañca catunnaṃ vissajjanānaṃ heṭṭhā ‘‘samathassa avikkhepaṭṭho’’tiādīnañca catunnaṃ vissajjanānaṃ viseso vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“以防护之义”等八种解答,是依戒、定等直到力与究竟法的次第来说明的。戒清净,是指极其清净的巴帝摩卡防护等四种戒,因为它能洗净破戒之垢。心清净,是指近行定和八种等至。这里以心为首要而说定,因为它能净除心之垢,所以是心清净。见清净,是指如实照见名色,因为它能净除有身见之垢,所以是见清净。“以解脱之义”,是指依彼分而解脱随烦恼,以及于所缘决定信解。这就是彼分解脱。“以通达之义”而称为明:宿住随念智,以通达过去生的意义而称为明;天眼智,以通达众生生死流转的意义而称为明;漏尽智,以通达诸谛的意义而称为明。“以通达之义”,就是了知的意思。“以遍舍之义”而称为解脱:凡有所遍舍,就从那里面解脱出来,所以是果解脱。“以正断之义”而称为尽智:以断除烦恼之义,就是在能断尽烦恼的圣道中的智。“以寂止之义”而称为无生智:因为被称为道的作用的加行已经寂止,依结生而不再生起,对于各各道所断的烦恼达到无生的究竟时所生起的圣果智。巴利
Saṃvaraṭṭhenātiādīni aṭṭha vissajjanāni sīlādibalapariyosānadhammavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Sīlavisuddhīti suparisuddhapātimokkhasaṃvarādicatubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ dussīlyamalavisodhanato. Cittavisuddhīti saupacārā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Cittasīsena hettha samādhi vutto. So cittamalavisodhanato cittavisuddhi. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti nāmarūpānaṃ yathāsabhāvadassanaṃ sattadiṭṭhimalavisodhanato diṭṭhivisuddhi. Muttaṭṭhenāti tadaṅgavasena upakkilesato vimuttaṭṭhena ārammaṇe ca adhimuttaṭṭhena. Vimokkhoti tadaṅgavimokkho. Paṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ purimabhavapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ sattānaṃ cutūpapātapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ saccapaṭivedhaṭṭhena vijjā. Paṭivedhaṭṭhenāti jānanaṭṭhena. Pariccāgaṭṭhena vimuttīti yaṃ yaṃ pariccattaṃ, tato tato vimuttattā phalavimutti. Samucchedaṭṭhena khaye ñāṇanti kilesasamucchindanatthena kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ. Paṭippassaddhaṭṭhena anuppāde ñāṇanti maggakiccasaṅkhātapayogapaṭippassaddhattā paṭisandhivasena anuppādabhūte taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ anuppādapariyosāne uppanne ariyaphale ñāṇaṃ.
20 “欲以根义”等九种解答,是依圣道的初、中、后三个阶段来说明的。“欲以根义”:对善法生起想要去做的欲,因为它是修行和成就的根本,所以从根的意义上称为欲。“作意以等起义”:如理作意能等起一切善法,所以从等起的意义上称为作意。“触以和合义”:因为在渴爱中,受是特别主要的原因;而渴爱被断除时,特别要通过遍知受才能断除;对于那个受,触正是主要的原因;当触被遍知时,受也就被遍知了。因此,在七种应遍知的事中,触被最先说出。而且,触是依它自身的因——也就是所谓三事和合——而被说明的,并且被称为“以三事和合为现起”,所以应从和合的意义上遍知它。不过有些人说:“智触才是触。”巴利
20.Chando mūlaṭṭhenātiādīni nava vissajjanāni ariyamaggassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena niddiṭṭhāni. Chando mūlaṭṭhenāti kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kattukamyatāchando paṭipattiyā ca nipphattiyā ca mūlattā mūlaṭṭhena. Manasikāro samuṭṭhānaṭṭhenāti yonisomanasikāro sabbakusaladhamme samuṭṭhāpetīti samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena. Phasso samodhānaṭṭhenāti yasmā taṇhāya visesena vedanā padhānakāraṇaṃ, taṇhā ca pahīyamānā visesena vedanāya pariññātāya pahīyati, tassā ca vedanāya phassova padhānakāraṇaṃ, tasmiṃ pariññāte vedanā pariññātā hoti, tasmā sattasu abhiññeyyavatthūsu phasso paṭhamaṃ vutto. So ca tikasannipātasaṅkhātassa attano kāraṇassa vasena paveditattā ‘‘tikasannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vuttattā samodhānaṭṭhena abhiññeyyo. Keci pana ‘‘ñāṇaphasso phasso’’ti vadanti.
受能随心所欲地驱使心和心所,并汇入、进入它们之中,或者说,受直接进入心相续,所以受以“汇入”的意义而应当被遍知。不过有些人说:“一切应当被遍知的法都汇入受中;当受被遍知时,一切渴爱的立足处也就被遍知了。这是什么原因呢?因为一切渴爱都以受为条件。所以,受以汇入的意义而应当被遍知。”又因为定能像屋顶的尖梁收束所有椽子那样,把心和心所聚合在一起,在一切善法中最为首要、最为尊上,所以说定以“首要”的意义而应当被遍知。也有写成“以最上意义”的版本。又因为在修习止观的人那里,念是让所缘显现出来的主导力量;当念使所缘现前时,一切善法都能各自完成自己的作用,所以说念以“主导”的意义而应当被遍知。慧以“更超越”的意义而应当被遍知,也就是说,圣道之慧相对于那些善法,以更超越、最殊胜的意义而应当被遍知。或者也可以说,因为它能从那些烦恼中超越出去,从轮回的循环中超越出去,所以叫“彼更超越”,它的含义就是“更超越的意义”。也有写成“以彼更超越意义”的版本,意思是从那之上更超越。解脱以“坚实”的意义而应当被遍知:果位上的解脱因为不退失而坚固,所以是坚实的;又因为除了它之外,再没有别的什么需要去寻求,所以它也是坚实的。那解脱就以这种“坚实”的意义而应当被遍知。涅槃是“不死的归宿”:它没有被称为死亡的那种死,所以是不死;又因为它是烦恼之毒的对治法,所以也叫不死;又因为它是众生亲证真理的依托之处,所以叫归宿;又因为它是轮回之苦的止息,所以叫寂灭;在这里没有被称为渴爱的“织网”,所以叫涅槃。涅槃因为是整个教法的终点,所以以“终极”的意义而应当被遍知。如此,在这个关于应当被遍知者的解释中,一共有了七千七百四十个解答。巴利
Yasmā pana vedanā cittacetasike attano vase vattāpayamānā tattha samosarati pavisati, cittasantānameva vā pavisati, tasmā samosaraṇaṭṭhena abhiññeyyāti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘sabbānipi pariññeyyāni vedanāsu samosaranti, vedanāsu pariññātāsu sabbaṃ taṇhāvatthu pariññātaṃ hoti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Vedanāpaccayā hi sabbāpi taṇhā. Tasmā vedanā samosaraṇaṭṭhena abhiññeyyā’’ti vadanti. Yasmā sabbagopānasīnaṃ ābandhanato kūṭāgārakaṇṇikā viya cittacetasikānaṃ sampiṇḍanato samādhi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ pamukho hoti jeṭṭhako, tasmā samādhi pamukhaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Pāmukhaṭṭhenātipi pāṭho. Yasmā samathavipassanaṃ bhāventassa ārammaṇūpaṭṭhānādhipati hoti sati, satiyā upaṭṭhite ārammaṇe sabbepi kusalā dhammā sakaṃ sakaṃ kiccaṃ sādhenti, tasmā sati ādhipateyyaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ. Paññā taduttaraṭṭhenāti ariyamaggapaññā tesaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ uttaraṭṭhena seṭṭhaṭṭhena abhiññeyyā. Atha vā tato kilesehi, saṃsāravaṭṭato vā uttarati samatikkamatīti taduttarā, tassā attho taduttaraṭṭho. Tena taduttaraṭṭhena. Tatuttaraṭṭhenātipi pāṭho, tato uttaraṭṭhenāti attho. Vimutti sāraṭṭhenāti phalavimutti aparihānivasena thirattā sāro, taṃ atikkamitvā aññassa pariyesitabbassa abhāvatopi sāro. Sā vimutti tena sāraṭṭhena abhiññeyyā. Amatogadhaṃ nibbānanti natthi etassa maraṇasaṅkhātaṃ matanti amataṃ, kilesavisapaṭipakkhattā agadantipi amataṃ , sacchikiriyāya sattānaṃ patiṭṭhābhūtanti ogadhaṃ, saṃsāradukkhasantibhūtattā nibbutanti nibbānaṃ, natthettha taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ vānantipi nibbānaṃ. Taṃ sāsanassa niṭṭhābhūtattā pariyosānaṭṭhena abhiññeyyaṃ. Evaṃ imasmiṃ abhiññeyyaniddese sattasahassāni sattasatāni cattālīsañca vissajjanāni honti.
现在,针对刚才已经这样说明的那些法,作出总结:“凡是已被遍知的法,这些法就成为已知的。”意思是让心面向它们,使它们成为已知的。以“已被如此了知”这一含义来说,称为智,也就是对前面所说的那类法,以了知的作用来说,是智。以“了知”这一含义来说,称为慧,也就是从种种方面去了知的作用,是慧。从“因此说”等语句开始,是把所问的各个问题归结起来显示出来。由于这个原因,说:“‘这些法应当遍知’即是专注听闻,了知它们就是慧,是闻所成智。”这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Idāni tesaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ ‘‘ye ye dhammā abhiññātā, te te dhammā ñātā hontī’’ti nigamanaṃ karoti, tassa abhimukhaṃ katvā ñātā hontīti adhippāyo. Taṃñātaṭṭhena ñāṇanti tesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ dhammānaṃ jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ. Pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti pakārato jānanaṭṭhena paññā. Tena vuccatītiādito pucchitapucchā nigametvā dassitā. Tena kāraṇena ‘‘ime dhammā abhiññeyyāti sotāvadhānaṃ, taṃpajānanā paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti vuccatīti atthoti.
应遍知解说的注释巴利
Pariññeyyaniddesavaṇṇanā
21 在“应遍知”的解说中,虽然“遍知”这个词已经包含了知遍知、审察遍知、断遍知这三种遍知,但因为在前面“应了知”的部分已经讲了知遍知,后面“应断”的部分会讲断遍知,所以这里指的只是审察遍知。“有漏、有取的触”:说的是作为漏和取的缘、属于三地(欲界、色界、无色界)的触。因为它与以自己为所缘而生起的那些漏共同存在,所以叫“有漏”;它成为所缘之后,通过和取的联结而帮助诸取生起,所以叫“有取”。当触被审察遍知所遍知时,通过触这个入口,其余的非色法也随它一起被遍知,色法也随之被遍知,因此只举触来代表。其余的诸法也应当根据各自的情况这样来理解。巴利
21. Pariññeyyaniddese kiñcāpi pariññāsaddena ñātapariññā, tīraṇapariññā, pahānapariññāti tisso pariññā saṅgahitā. Heṭṭhā ‘‘abhiññeyyā’’ti ñātapariññāya vuttattā upari ‘‘pahātabbā’’ti pahānapariññāya vuttattā tīraṇapariññāva idha adhippetā. Phasso sāsavo upādāniyoti āsavānañceva upādānānañca paccayabhūto tebhūmakaphasso. Sopi hi attānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānehi saha āsavehīti sāsavo, ārammaṇabhāvaṃ upagantvā upādānasambandhanena upādānānaṃ hitoti upādāniyo. Yasmā phasse tīraṇapariññāya pariññāte phassamukhena sesāpi arūpadhammā tadanusārena ca rūpadhammā pariññāyanti, tasmā ekova phasso vutto. Evaṃ sesesupi yathāyogaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
名:指四个无色蕴以及涅槃。色:指四大种,以及四大种所造的二十四种所造色。四个蕴因为“朝向、倾向”的含义而称为名,因为它们面向所缘而倾向。其实一切法都以“倾向”的含义而称为名:因为四个蕴在所缘上互相倾向,涅槃则作为所缘增上缘,使自身中无过失的法倾向。色则是以相续的方式,被冷热等破坏,所以叫色。“被破坏”就是被扰动、动摇的意思。因为以相续变异的方式,能被冷热等所触及损害的法聚,就称为色。不过在这里,“名”只指世间的,而“色”则完全是指世间的。巴利
Nāmanti cattāro khandhā arūpino nibbānañca. Rūpanti cattāri ca mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpāni catuvīsati. Cattāro khandhā namanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Te hi ārammaṇābhimukhā namanti. Sabbampi nāmanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Cattāro hi khandhā ārammaṇe aññamaññaṃ nāmenti, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya attani anavajjadhamme nāmeti. Santativasena sītādīhi ruppanaṭṭhena rūpaṃ. Ruppanaṭṭhenāti kuppanaṭṭhena. Santativipariṇāmavasena hi sītādīhi ghaṭṭanīyaṃ dhammajātaṃ rūpanti vuccati. Idha pana nāmanti lokikameva adhippetaṃ, rūpaṃ pana ekantena lokikameva.
三种受:乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受。它们只是世间的。食就是缘。因为缘能带来自己的果,所以叫食。食有四种:段食、触食、意思食、识食。段食,因为要捏成团才能吃,所以叫段食;因为可以吞进去,所以叫食。这是指以饭团、粥等为载体的营养。因为它能带来以营养为第八法的色法,所以叫食。触食,眼触等六种触能带来三种受,所以叫食。意思食,是意的思,不是有情的思,所以叫意思食,就像说“心一境性”那样;或者说,与意相应的思叫意思食,就像说“骏马车”那样。这是指三地所摄的善和不善的思。因为它能带来三有,所以叫食。识食,指十九种结生识。因为它能带来结生的名色,所以叫食。取蕴,指取所行境的蕴,这里应理解为省略了中间的词。或者,由取所生的蕴叫取蕴,就像草火、糠火那样。或者,被取所执持的蕴叫取蕴,就像国王的人那样。或者,以取为因而生的蕴叫取蕴,就像花树、果树那样。取有四种:欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。从义理上说,强烈的执取就是取。五取蕴是:色取蕴、受取蕴、想取蕴、行取蕴、识取蕴。巴利
Tisso vedanāti sukhā vedanā, dukkhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā. Tā lokikā eva. Āhārāti paccayā. Paccayā hi attano phalaṃ āharantīti āhārā. Kabaḷīkāro āhāro phassāhāro manosañcetanāhāro viññāṇāhāroti cattāro. Vatthuvasena kabaḷīkātabbattā kabaḷīkāro , ajjhoharitabbattā āhāro. Odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sā hi ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharatīti āhāro. Cakkhusamphassādiko chabbidho phasso tisso vedanā āharatīti āhāro. Manaso sañcetanā, na sattassāti manosañcetanā yathā cittekaggatā. Manasā vā sampayuttā sañcetanā manosañcetanā yathā ājaññaratho. Tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā. Sā hi tayo bhave āharatīti āhāro. Viññāṇanti ekūnavīsatibhedaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā, majjhapadalopo daṭṭhabbo. Upādānasambhūtā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā tiṇaggi thusaggi. Upādānavidheyyā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā rājapuriso. Upādānappabhavā vā khandhā upādānakkhandhā yathā puppharukkho phalarukkho. Upādānāni pana kāmupādānaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ attavādupādānanti cattāri. Atthato pana bhusaṃ ādānanti upādānaṃ. Rūpupādānakkhandho, vedanupādānakkhandho, saññupādānakkhandho, saṅkhārupādānakkhandho, viññāṇupādānakkhandhoti pañca.
六内处:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、意处。巴利
Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ, sotāyatanaṃ, ghānāyatanaṃ, jivhāyatanaṃ, kāyāyatanaṃ, manāyatanaṃ.
七识住是哪七种呢?世尊曾经这样说过:巴利
Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti katamā satta? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有这样一类众生,他们身体各不相同,感知也各不相同。比如人类,还有一些天人和一些堕入恶道的众生。这是第一种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave (a. ni. 7.44; dī. ni. 3.332), sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṃ paṭhamā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
诸比丘,有一类众生身体各异、想同一,例如初化生的梵众天。这是第二种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṃ dutiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
诸比丘,有一类有情身同而想异,譬如光音天。这是第三识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṃ tatiyā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生的身体是同一种,想也是同一种,比如遍净天的天人。这就是第四种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino. Seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṃ catutthā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了色想,灭掉了有对想,不再作意种种想,他们以“虚空无边”进入空无边处。这就是第五个识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ pañcamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了空无边处,以“识是无边的”这一认知,投生到识无边处。这就是第六种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ chaṭṭhā viññāṇaṭṭhiti.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了识无边处,达到“什么都没有”的无所有处。这是第七种识住。比丘们,以上就是七种识住。巴利
‘‘Santi , bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamī viññāṇaṭṭhiti. Imā kho, bhikkhave, satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti (a. ni. 7.44; dī. ni. 3.332).
关于“识住”,指的是结生识的安住处,也就是有识的诸蕴。其中,“譬如”是表示举例的虚词。说“人类”,是因为在无量的轮围世界中,无量人类的肤色、相貌等没有两个是完全相同的。即使有些人在肤色或相貌上相似,他们在看、顾视等行为上也各不相同,所以称为“身异”。而他们的结生想,有的是三因,有的是二因,也有无因的,所以称为“想异”。说“一部分天人”,指六欲界天人。在他们当中,有些人的身体是青色的,有些是黄色等;而他们的想,有的是三因,有的是二因,没有无因的。说“一部分堕恶趣者”,指脱离四恶趣的众生,比如布那巴苏母夜叉、毕央伽罗母、普萨弥多、达摩瞿多等,以及其他在宫殿中受报的饿鬼。这些众生的身体,在肤色上有白、黑、黄褐、黑褐、金色等差别,在体型上有瘦、胖、短、长等差别,所以身各不同;和人类一样,他们的想也有三因、二因、无因的差别。但他们不像天人那样有大威德,而是像可怜的人类一样,威德微小,难以得到食物和衣服,备受痛苦煎熬。其中一些在黑半月受苦,在白半月享乐,正因为他们从安乐聚集之处堕落,所以称为“堕恶趣者”。其中那些三因的,也能证悟法理,就像毕央伽罗母等一样。巴利
Viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ṭhānāni saviññāṇakā khandhā eva. Tattha seyyathāpīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Manussāti aparimāṇesupi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā sadisā honti, tepi ālokitavilokitādīhi visadisāva honti, tasmā nānattakāyāti vuttā. Paṭisandhisaññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti, tasmā nānattasaññinoti vuttā. Ekacce ca devāti cha kāmāvacaradevā. Tesu hi kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītakādivaṇṇo, saññā pana nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi hoti, ahetukā na hoti. Ekacce ca vinipātikāti catuapāyavinimuttā punabbasumātā yakkhinī, piyaṅkaramātā, phussamittā, dhammaguttāti evamādayo aññe ca vemānikā petā. Etesañhi odātakāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisathūlarassadīghavasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya tihetukadvihetukāhetukavasena saññāpi. Te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā, kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti. Ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti, tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipātikāti vuttā. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti piyaṅkaramātādīnaṃ viya.
梵身天,就是梵众天、梵辅天和大梵天王。初禅所生,是说他们全都是依靠初禅而投生的。不过,梵众天是靠下品初禅投生,梵辅天是靠中品初禅投生,他们的身体也比前者更广大;大梵天王是靠上品初禅投生,身体又更加广大。这样一来,他们的身体各不相同,而想都同属于初禅,所以称为身异想一。四恶趣里的众生也是这样。地狱里,有些众生的身体有一由旬,有些半由旬,有些三由旬,而提婆达多的身体则有一百由旬;畜生里,有些小,有些大;饿鬼界里,有些身高六十肘,有些八十肘,有些金色,有些丑陋;黑耳阿修罗也是这样。此外,这里还有一种叫长背的饿鬼,身体甚至长达六十由旬。不过,他们所有的想都是不善异熟无因的。因此,恶趣众生也归入身异想一这一类。巴利
Brahmakāyikāti brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno. Paṭhamābhinibbattāti te sabbepi paṭhamajjhānena nibbattā. Brahmapārisajjā pana parittena, brahmapurohitā majjhimena, kāyo ca tesaṃ vipphārikataro hoti. Mahābrahmāno paṇītena, kāyo pana nesaṃ ativipphārikataro hoti. Iti te kāyassa nānattā, paṭhamajjhānavasena saññāya ekattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññinoti vuttā. Yathā ca te, evaṃ catūsu apāyesu sattā. Nirayesu hi kesañci gāvutaṃ, kesañci aḍḍhayojanaṃ , kesañci tigāvutaṃ attabhāvo hoti, devadattassa pana yojanasatiko jāto. Tiracchānesupi keci khuddakā honti, keci mahantā. Pettivisayesupi keci saṭṭhihatthā keci asītihatthā honti keci suvaṇṇā keci dubbaṇṇā. Tathā kālakañcikā asurā. Apicettha dīghapiṭṭhikā petā nāma saṭṭhiyojanikāpi honti, saññā pana sabbesampi akusalavipākāhetukāva hoti. Iti apāyikāpi ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti.
光音天:就像从火把的火焰中,火光一段一段地断裂、掉落、流散开来一样,这些天人的身体也一段一段地放出光明、流散开来,所以叫光音天。在五禅那的分类里,修习第二禅和第三禅的下品而往生的,叫少光天;修习中品而往生的,叫无量光天;修习上品而往生的,叫光音天。这里则是按最高标准来统摄,把所有这些天人都包括进来了。因为他们所有的天人身体放光都是同一种方式,但想则有唯无寻有伺和无寻无伺等种种差别。巴利
Ābhassarāti daṇḍaukkāya acci viya etesaṃ sarīrato ābhā chijjitvā chijjitvā patantī viya sarati visaratīti ābhassarā. Tesu pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānadvayaṃ parittaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā parittābhā nāma honti, majjhimaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā appamāṇābhā nāma honti, paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā uppannā ābhassarā nāma honti. Idha pana ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena sabbeva te gahitā. Sabbesañhi tesaṃ kāyo ekavipphārova hoti, saññā pana avitakkavicāramattā ca avitakkaavicārā cāti nānā.
遍净天:就是被清净的光辉所遍满、散布,整个身体的光色纯净一体,这是它的意思。因为他们的光明不像光音天那样一段一段地断续放出。在四禅那的分类里属于第三禅那,在五禅那的分类里属于第四禅那。依下品、中品、上品禅那的力量,往生后分别成为少净天、无量净天、遍净天。应当知道,这些天众全都是同一类身体,而且因为第四禅那之想而成为同一想者。广果天也属于第四识住。无想有情天因为没有识,所以不归入识住,而归入众生居。巴利
Subhakiṇhāti subhena vokiṇṇā vikiṇṇā, subhena sarīrappabhāvaṇṇena ekagghanāti attho. Etesañhi na ābhassarānaṃ viya chijjitvā chijjitvā pabhā gacchatīti. Catukkanaye tatiyassa, pañcakanaye catutthassa parittamajjhimapaṇītassa jhānassavasena parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhā nāma hutvā nibbattanti. Iti sabbepi te ekattakāyā ceva catutthajjhānasaññāya ekattasaññino cāti veditabbā. Vehapphalāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitimeva bhajanti. Asaññasattā viññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti, sattāvāsesu gacchanti.
净居天的众生站在还灭这一边,并不是任何时候都存在。即使经过百千劫、无数劫,在无佛出世的世间里,他们也不会出生;只有在十六千劫之中有佛出世时,他们才出生。他们就像转法轮世尊的临时营地一样。因此,他们既不归入识住,也不归入众生居。不过,玛哈斯瓦长老引用经文说:“舍利弗,这个众生居实在不容易得到,在这漫长的时间里,我从未住过,除了净居天的诸天神之外。”依据这段经文,净居天的众生也归入第四识住和第四众生居。由于这个说法无法被反驳,所以经典是认可它的。巴利
Suddhāvāsā vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā na sabbakālikā, kappasatasahassampi asaṅkhyeyampi buddhasuññe loke na uppajjanti, soḷasakappasahassabbhantare buddhesu uppannesuyeva uppajjanti, dhammacakkappavattassa bhagavato khandhāvārasadisā honti, tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ, na ca sattāvāsaṃ bhajanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana – ‘‘na kho pana so, sāriputta, sattāvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvutthapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.160) iminā suttena suddhāvāsāpi catutthaṃ viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthaṃ sattāvāsañca bhajantīti vadati, taṃ appaṭibāhitattā suttassa anuññātaṃ.
非想非非想处也跟想一样,因为识同样极其微细,所以既不能说有识、也不能说无识,因此在诸识住中没有提到它。巴利
Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ yatheva saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassāpi sukhumattā nevaviññāṇaṃ nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu na vuttaṃ.
八种世间法,就是:得利、失利、有名声、没名声、被讥嫌、被称赞、快乐、痛苦。这八种法在世间运行的过程中从不停息,是世间之法,所以叫世间法。没有任何众生能摆脱它们,连诸佛也一样。正如经中所说:巴利
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho, alābho, yaso, ayaso, nindā, pasaṃsā, sukhaṃ, dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokappavattiyā sati anuparamadhammakattā lokassa dhammāti lokadhammā. Etehi mutto satto nāma natthi, buddhānampi hontiyeva. Yathāha –
比丘们,有这八种世间法跟着世间转,世间也跟着这八种世间法转。是哪八种呢?得与失、誉与毁、讥与赞、乐与苦。比丘们,就是这八种世间法跟着世间转,世间也跟着这八种世间法转。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattati. Katame aṭṭha? Lābho ca alābho ca yaso ca ayaso ca nindā ca pasaṃsā ca sukhañca dukkhañca. Ime kho, bhikkhave, aṭṭha lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca ime aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.6).
在这里,“随转”的意思是跟随、不舍弃,也就是不随世间而退转。“利得”指出家人的衣钵等物,在家人则指钱财粮食等收入。当这些利得得不到时,利得就成了“衰”。如果只说“没有利得就是衰”,那在道理上就说不通,也就无法被正确了知。“誉”指眷属围绕。当这种誉得不到时,誉就成了“毁”。“讥”是指说人的坏话。“赞”是指说人的好话。“乐”指欲界众生身心两方面的乐受。“苦”指凡夫、入流者和一来者身心两方面的苦受;对不来者和阿拉汉来说,则只是身体上的苦受。巴利
Tattha anuparivattantīti anubandhanti nappajahanti, lokato na nivattantīti attho. Lābhoti pabbajitassa cīvarādi, gahaṭṭhassa dhanadhaññādi lābho. Soyeva alabbhamāno lābho alābho. Na lābho alābhoti vuccamāne atthābhāvāpattito pariññeyyo na siyā. Yasoti parivāro. Soyeva alabbhamānā yaso ayaso. Nindāti avaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Pasaṃsāti vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ. Sukhanti kāmāvacarānaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ. Dukkhanti puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ, anāgāmiarahantānaṃ kāyikameva.
九众生居,就是众生的住处,也就是居住的地方。不过,这些其实就是前面所说的那些蕴。是哪九种呢?因为世尊这样说过——巴利
Navasattāvāsāti sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho. Tāni pana tathāpakāsitā khandhā eva. Katame nava? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,有九种众生居。是哪九种呢?比丘们,有些众生身不同、想也不同,比如人类、某些天人和某些堕入恶趣的众生。这是第一种众生居。巴利
‘‘Navayime, bhikkhave (a. ni. 9.24; dī. ni. 3.341), sattāvāsā. Katame nava? Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi manussā ekacce ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā. Ayaṃ paṭhamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生身体各不相同,但想法一致,比如刚投生到梵身天的那些梵天。这就是第二种众生居。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā brahmakāyikā paṭhamābhinibbattā. Ayaṃ dutiyo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生身体是同一种,但想各不相同,比如光音天的天人。这是第三种众生居处。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā ābhassarā. Ayaṃ tatiyo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生身体是同一种,想也是同一种,比如遍净天的天人。这是第四种众生居住的地方。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, seyyathāpi devā subhakiṇhā. Ayaṃ catuttho sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生没有想,也没有感受,比如无想有情天的天神。这是第五种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā asaññino appaṭisaṃvedino, seyyathāpi devā asaññasattā. Ayaṃ pañcamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了色想,灭掉了有对想,不再作意种种想,他们安住在“虚空无边”的空无边处。这是第六种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ chaṭṭho sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了空无边处,达到“识是无边”的识无边处。这是第七种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ sattamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了识无边处,投生到“什么都没有”的无所有处。这是第八种众生居所。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanūpagā. Ayaṃ aṭṭhamo sattāvāso.
比丘们,有些众生完全超越了无所有处,投生到非想非非想处。这是第九种众生的居处。比丘们,以上就是九种众生的居处。巴利
‘‘Santi, bhikkhave, sattā sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanūpagā . Ayaṃ navamo sattāvāso. Ime kho, bhikkhave, nava sattāvāsā’’ti (a. ni. 9.24; dī. ni. 3.341).
十处就是眼处、色处、耳处、声处、鼻处、香处、舌处、味处、身处、触处,这样一共十种。意处和法处因为和出世间法混在一起,所以这里没有收进来。对这十处的解释,是依观的力量来说审察遍知。而在“比丘们,一切应当被遍知”等说法里,则是依证得的力量来说审察遍知——也就是通过证得未知当知根等三根,证得作为灭尽行道作证修习处的法,证得它们通达之处,证得对苦等出离、不生起等十五种法,证得摄益等三十一种,证得更上通达等三种,证得八支圣道,证得“加行止息之义”等两种,证得无为处的出起处等两种,证得出离处的随觉处等三种,证得随觉处等三种,证得随觉资粮等三种,证得照耀处等四种,证得光耀处等十八种,证得转向随观等九种,证得尽智和无生智中的慧解脱与涅槃。其余的法,应当知道是随各自情况,或者依观的力量、或者依证得的力量来说审察遍知。巴利
Dasāyatanānīti cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ sotāyatanaṃ saddāyatanaṃ ghānāyatanaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ jivhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ kāyāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatananti evaṃ dasa. Manāyatanadhammāyatanāni pana lokuttaramissakattā na gahitāni. Imesu dasasu vissajjanesu vipassanāvasena tīraṇapariññā vuttā, ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pariññeyya’’ntiādīsu pana anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, nirodhapaṭipadānaṃ sacchikiriyābhāvanaṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃyeva paṭivedhaṭṭhānaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ nissaraṇassa anuppādādīnaṃ pañcadasannaṃ, pariggahaṭṭhādīnaṃ ekatiṃsāya, uttaripaṭivedhaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, maggaṅgānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ, ‘‘payogānaṃ paṭippassaddhaṭṭho’’tiādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ, asaṅkhataṭṭhassa vuṭṭhānaṭṭhādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ, niyyānaṭṭhassa anubujjhanaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, anubodhanaṭṭhādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, anubodhapakkhiyādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, ujjotanaṭṭhādīnaṃ catunnaṃ, patāpanaṭṭhādīnaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ, vivaṭṭanānupassanādīnaṃ navannaṃ, khayeñāṇaanuppādeñāṇānaṃ paññāvimuttinibbānānanti imesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭilābhavasena tīraṇapariññā vuttā, sesānaṃ yathāyogaṃ vipassanāvasena ca paṭilābhavasena ca tīraṇapariññā vuttāti veditabbā.
为了证得哪些法而精进努力,那些法就会被证得。这样一来,那些法既已被遍知,也已被审察完毕。因此,这是从作用完成的角度来说明审察遍知。因为作用一旦完成,那些法就已经被证得了。不过有些人说:“不适用于观的法属于知遍知。”这种说法并不妥当,因为知遍知是就“应被证知”这一点来说的。所谓“既已被遍知,也已被审察完毕”,意思是:那些已被证得的法,才叫作被遍知、被审察完毕。这样,就是从作用完成的角度说明了遍知的含义。巴利
Yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭilābhatthāya vāyamantassa, te te dhammā paṭiladdhā honti. Evaṃ te dhammā pariññātā ceva honti tīritā cāti hi kiccasamāpanaṭṭhena tīraṇapariññā vuttā. Kicce hi samāpite te dhammā paṭiladdhā hontīti. Keci pana ‘‘avipassanūpagānaṃ ñātapariññā’’ti vadanti. Abhiññeyyena ñātapariññāya vuttattā taṃ na sundaraṃ. Pariññātā ceva honti tīritā cāti te paṭiladdhā eva dhammā pariññātā ca nāma honti, tīritā ca nāmāti attho. Evaṃ kiccasamāpanatthavasena pariññātattho vutto hoti.
22 现在,为了把同一个道理依照每一种法的获取方式逐一配起来说明,并在最后作总结,所以开始讲“出离”等内容。这一切都应该按照前面已经说过的来理解。巴利
22. Idāni tamevatthaṃ ekekadhamme paṭilābhavasena yojetvā ante ca nigametvā dassetuṃ nekkhammantiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ pubbe vuttānusāreneva veditabbanti.
应断分别的注释巴利
Pahātabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
23 在“应断”的解释中,“我慢”是指在色等五种取蕴上生起的“我是”之慢。当这个我慢被断除时,就证得了阿拉汉果。虽然在色贪等烦恼还存在时,也不提其余那些烦恼,而只说我慢,应当知道这是因为它与邪见相似,而且它的相状粗重。“无明”,依经教的方式,是指对苦等四事无知;依阿毗达摩的方式,则连同前际等一起,共为八事。对此,确实曾这样说——巴利
23. Pahātabbaniddese asmimānoti rūpādīsu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu asmīti māno. Tasmiñhi pahīne arahattaṃ pattaṃ hoti. Rūparāgādīsu vijjamānesupi sesāni avatvā asmimānasseva vacanaṃ diṭṭhipatirūpakattena tassa oḷārikattāti veditabbaṃ. Avijjāti suttantapariyāyena dukkhādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ, abhidhammapariyāyena pubbantādīhi saddhiṃ aṭṭhasu. Vuttañhetaṃ –
在这里,什么是无明?对苦无知,对苦的集起无知,对苦的灭尽无知,对通往苦灭尽的道路无知;对前际无知,对后际无知,对前后际无知;对依此缘性而缘起的诸法无知。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā avijjā? Dukkhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhe aññāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇaṃ, pubbante aññāṇaṃ, aparante aññāṇaṃ, pubbantāparante aññāṇaṃ, idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti (dha. sa. 1106; vibha. 226).
“有渴爱”就是对欲有等各类生命存在状态的渴求。正如经中所说——巴利
Bhavataṇhāti kāmabhavādīsu bhavesu patthanā. Yathāha –
在这里,什么是有渴爱?就是对各种生命存在状态的欲求、贪着、欢喜、渴爱、黏着、热恼、迷恋、执取。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando bhavarāgo bhavanandī bhavataṇhā bhavasineho bhavapariḷāho bhavamucchā bhavajjhosāna’’nti (vibha. 895).
三种渴爱:欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱。在阿毗达摩里,对它们是这样解释的:其中,什么是有渴爱?与有见相伴的贪……(中略)……心的贪染,这称为有渴爱。其中,什么是无有渴爱?与断见相伴的贪……(中略)……心的贪染,这称为无有渴爱。剩下的渴爱就是欲渴爱。其中,什么是欲渴爱?与欲界相关的贪……(中略)……心的贪染,这称为欲渴爱。其中,什么是有渴爱?与色界、无色界相关的贪……(中略)……其中,什么是无有渴爱?与断见相伴的贪……(中略)……(《分别论》916)巴利
Tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā, bhavataṇhā, vibhavataṇhā. Tāsaṃ abhidhamme evaṃ niddeso kato – tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Bhavadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati bhavataṇhā. Tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati vibhavataṇhā. Avasesā taṇhā kāmataṇhā. Tattha katamā kāmataṇhā? Kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo…pe… cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati kāmataṇhā. Tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Rūpadhātuarūpadhātupaṭisaṃyutto rāgo…pe… tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo…pe… (vibha. 916).
不过在注释书里则是这样说:对五种欲乐的贪染是欲渴爱;对色界和无色界存在的贪染,也就是对禅那的喜好以及与常见相应的贪染,以“有”的方式生起的渴求,这是有渴爱;与断见相应的贪染,这是无有渴爱。这是按照《十上经》的教导方式来组织的。而按照《合诵》的教导方式和阿毗达摩的教导方式,另外还有三种渴爱——“欲渴爱、色渴爱、无色渴爱”,以及另外三种渴爱——“色渴爱、无色渴爱、灭渴爱”(《长部》3.305;《分别论》917-918),这些渴爱的分类在这里也都适用。其中,前五种是与欲界、色界、无色界相应的,最后一种是与断见相应的。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā, rūpārūpabhavesu rāgo jhānanikantisassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavavasena patthanā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ dasuttarasuttapariyāyena yojanā. Saṅgītipariyāyena pana abhidhammapariyāyena ca ‘‘aparāpi tisso taṇhā kāmataṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā. Aparāpi tisso taṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā nirodhataṇhā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305; vibha. 917-918) vuttā taṇhāpi ettha yujjanti. Tāsu pañca kāmadhāturūpadhātuarūpadhātupaṭisaṃyuttā, antimā ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatā.
四种瀑流:欲瀑流、有瀑流、见瀑流、无明瀑流。对于具有这些瀑流的人,它们会把人冲走、使人沉没在轮回之中,所以叫瀑流。这些是力量很强的烦恼。在被称为五欲的欲乐对象上,那瀑流就是欲瀑流,这是欲渴爱的名称。在由业和投生两种方式所说的色界与无色界之有上,那瀑流就是有瀑流,这是有渴爱的名称。见本身就是瀑流,就是见瀑流,这是“世间是常”等见的名称。无明本身就是瀑流,就是无明瀑流,这是对苦等事无知的名称。巴利
Cattāro oghāti kāmogho, bhavogho, diṭṭhogho, avijjogho. Yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā. Balavakilesā ete. Kāmaguṇasaṅkhāte kāme ogho kāmogho. Kāmataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Rūpārūpasaṅkhāte kammato ca upapattito ca duvidhepi bhave ogho bhavogho. Bhavataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Diṭṭhi eva ogho diṭṭhogho. ‘‘Sassato loko’’tiādikāya diṭṭhiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Avijjā eva ogho avijjogho, dukkhādīsu aññāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
五种盖:欲贪盖、嗔恚盖、昏沉睡眠盖、掉举恶作盖、疑盖。它们遮蔽、缠缚心,所以叫“盖”。“欲求”就叫欲,即五种欲乐。对诸欲的欲望,就是欲贪。或者说,欲求本身就叫“欲”,这个欲本身就是意欲(chanda),不是想做某事的欲,也不是对佛法的善法欲,所以叫欲贪。这是欲渴爱的名称。由于它,心被嗔害所败坏,变得腐坏;或者它破坏威仪、正行、端正相貌所带来的安乐,所以叫嗔恚。这是嗔的名称。僵硬不灵活的状态是昏沉,昏昏欲睡的状态是睡眠,意思是缺乏精进、收缩、无力而障碍。心不精进是昏沉,心所不灵活、不堪作业是睡眠,昏沉和睡眠合在一起就是昏沉睡眠。心高举动荡的状态是掉举,意思是不寂静。这是散乱的名称。做了可耻的恶行,叫恶作;恶行的状态叫恶作,意思是做了应受责备的事。这是追悔的名称。决择已离去,就是疑,意思是智慧已离去。或者,以此探究诸法实相时,感到困顿、疲惫,就是疑。这是对佛等生起疑惑的名称。欲贪本身就是盖,所以叫欲贪盖。其余几种也是这样。巴利
Pañca nīvaraṇānīti kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccakukkuccanīvaraṇaṃ vicikicchānīvaraṇaṃ. Cittaṃ nīvaranti pariyonandhantīti nīvaraṇāni. Kāmīyantīti kāmā. Pañca kāmaguṇā. Kāmesu chando kāmacchando. Kāmayatīti vā kāmo, kāmo eva chando, na kattukamyatāchando na dhammacchandoti kāmacchando. Kāmataṇhāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Byāpajjati tena cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ gacchati, byāpādayati vā vinayācārarūpasampattihitasukhānīti byāpādo. Dosassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Thinanatā thinaṃ, middhanatā middhaṃ, anussāhasaṃhananatā asattivighāto cāti attho. Cittassa anussāho thinaṃ, cetasikānaṃ akammaññatā middhaṃ, thinañca middhañca thinamiddhaṃ. Uddhatassa bhāvo uddhaccaṃ, avūpasamoti attho. Vikkhepassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kucchitaṃ kataṃ kukataṃ, kukatassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ, garahitakiriyabhāvoti attho. Pacchānutāpassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vigatā cikicchāti vicikicchā, vigatapaññāti attho. Sabhāvaṃ vā vicinanto etāya kicchati kilamatīti vicikicchā. Buddhādīsu saṃsayassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Kāmacchando eva nīvaraṇaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.
有“六法”的读法,或“六法”的诵读。六渴爱身就是:色渴爱、声渴爱、香渴爱、味渴爱、触渴爱、法渴爱。对色的渴爱就是色渴爱。这个渴爱本身又按欲渴爱等分成很多种,因为它是聚集的意思,所以叫“身”。其余几种也是这样。巴利
Cha dhammā, chaddhammāti vā pāṭho. Cha taṇhākāyāti rūpataṇhā saddataṇhā gandhataṇhā rasataṇhā phoṭṭhabbataṇhā dhammataṇhā. Rūpe taṇhā rūpataṇhā. Sā eva kāmataṇhādibhedena anekabhedattā rāsaṭṭhena kāyoti vuttā. Evaṃ sesesupi.
七随眠:欲贪随眠、嗔恚随眠、慢随眠、见随眠、疑随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠。因为还没有被断除,所以它们一直潜伏着,因此叫随眠。对诸欲的贪就是欲贪;或者欲本身就是贪,所以叫欲贪。对所缘对象产生抵触,就是嗔。以不如实的看法为本质,就是见。以“我胜过别人”等想法来抬高自己,就是慢。对存在的贪,就是有贪。力量强猛的欲贪,就是欲贪随眠。其余几种也应当这样理解。巴利
Sattānusayāti kāmarāgānusayo paṭighānusayo mānānusayo diṭṭhānusayo vicikicchānusayo bhavarāgānusayo avijjānusayo. Appahīnaṭṭhena anusentīti anusayā. Kāmesu rāgo kāmarāgo, kāmo eva vā rāgoti kāmarāgo. Ārammaṇasmiṃ paṭihaññatīti paṭighaṃ. Ayāthāvadassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhi. Seyyādivasena maññatīti māno. Bhavesu rāgo bhavarāgo. Thāmagato kāmarāgo kāmarāgānusayo. Evaṃ sesesupi.
八邪道就是:邪见、邪思惟、邪语、邪业、邪命、邪精进、邪念、邪定。即使有人发愿说“愿这些能给我带来利益和安乐”,但因为事实并非如此,而且它们在不净等对象上生起“净”等颠倒想,所以其本质是邪的,因此称为邪道。邪见,就是以错误的方式去看,或者依它而错误地看。或者说,颠倒的见解就是邪见;不真实的见解就是邪见;偏离真实而执取的见解就是邪见;不能带来利益、被智者所呵责的见解就是邪见。邪思惟等其余各项,也应依同样的方式理解。邪见,就是执著常见或断见。邪思惟,就是欲思惟等三种思惟。邪语,就是妄语等四种语行。邪业,就是杀生等三种业行。邪命,就是发起邪命谋生方式的思。邪精进,就是与不善心相应的精进。邪念,就是与正念相对立的不善心生起。邪定,就是不善定。巴利
Aṭṭha micchattāti micchādiṭṭhi micchāsaṅkappo micchāvācā micchākammanto micchāājīvo micchāvāyāmo micchāsati micchāsamādhi. ‘‘Hitasukhāvahā me bhavissantī’’ti evaṃ āsīsitāpi tathāabhāvato asubhādīsuyeva subhantiādiviparītappavattito ca micchāsabhāvāti micchattā. Micchā passati, micchā vā etāya passantīti micchādiṭṭhi. Atha vā viparītā diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, ayāthāvadiṭṭhīti vā micchādiṭṭhi, virajjhitvā gahaṇato vā vitathā diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, anattāvahattā paṇḍitehi kucchitā diṭṭhīti vāmicchādiṭṭhi. Micchāsaṅkappādīsupi eseva nayo. Micchādiṭṭhīti sassatucchedābhiniveso. Micchāsaṅkappoti kāmavitakkāditividho vitakko. Micchāvācāti musāvādādicatubbidhā cetanā. Micchākammantoti pāṇātipātāditividhā cetanā. Micchāājīvoti micchājīvapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. Micchāvāyāmoti akusalacittasampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ. Micchāsatīti satipaṭipakkhabhūto akusalacittuppādo. Micchāsamādhīti akusalasamādhi.
九种以渴爱为根的法:依止渴爱而有寻求,依止寻求而有获得,依止获得而有裁决,依止裁决而有欲贪,依止欲贪而有执取,依止执取而有占有,依止占有而有悭吝,依止悭吝而有守护;由于守护,便生起执杖、执刀、斗诤、口角、争论、恶口、两舌、妄语等种种恶不善法。这就是九种以渴爱为根的法。渴爱是它们的根,所以叫以渴爱为根。寻求等这些本身就是不善的。“依止渴爱”是指依靠渴爱。“寻求”是指对色等所缘的寻求,因为有渴爱才有寻求。“获得”是指得到色等所缘,因为有寻求才有获得。而“裁决”有四种:依智、依渴爱、依见、依思惟。其中,“应知乐的裁决,知乐的裁决后,应于内追求乐”,这是智的裁决。“裁决有两种:渴爱的裁决和见的裁决”,这样传来的一百零八种渴爱的行相是渴爱的裁决,六十二种见是见的裁决。但在“帝释天神,欲以思惟为因”这部经里,这里所说的裁决其实就是思惟。得到之后,对可爱不可爱、美好不美好,都是用思惟来裁决:“这么多将为我作色所缘用,这么多作声等所缘用;这么多将归我,那么多归别人;这么多我要享用,这么多我要储存。”因此说“依止获得而有裁决”。“欲贪”是指这样以不善思惟思量之后,对那事物生起弱的贪和强的贪。这里“欲”是弱贪的别名,“贪”是强贪的别名。“执取”是指强烈地认定“这是我、这是我的”。“占有”是指以渴爱和见的方式据为己有。“悭吝”是指不能忍受与他人共有。古代注师就是这样解释它的词义:“这东西真稀奇,只该是我的,不该是别人的稀奇东西”,因为它这样发生,所以叫悭吝。“守护”是指关门、藏入箱中等种种严密的保护。“成为因”就是因。“守护为因”是依主释复合词,意思是守护的原因。在“执杖”等当中,为了阻止他人而拿起杖,是执杖;拿起单刃刀等武器,是执刀;身体冲突和言语冲突都是斗诤;前前的对立是口角;后后的争执是争论;“你你”是以不恭敬的方式互称“你”。巴利
Nava taṇhāmūlakāti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṃtuvaṃpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavanti (dī. ni. 2.104; 3.359). Ime nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā. Taṇhā mūlaṃ etesanti taṇhāmūlakā. Pariyesanādayo akusalā eva. Taṇhaṃ, paṭiccāti taṇhaṃ nissāya. Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi taṇhāya sati hoti. Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇapaṭilābho, so hi pariyesanāya sati hoti. Vinicchayo pana ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catubbidho. Tattha ‘‘sukhavinicchayaṃ jaññā, sukhavinicchayaṃ ñatvā ajjhattaṃ sukhamanuyuñjeyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.323) ayaṃ ñāṇavinicchayo. ‘‘Vinicchayoti dve vinicchayā taṇhāvinicchayo ca diṭṭhivinicchayo cā’’ti (mahāni. 102) evaṃ āgatāni aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni taṇhāvinicchayo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo diṭṭhivinicchayo. ‘‘Chando kho, devānaminda, vitakkanidāno’’ti (dī. ni. 2.358) imasmiṃ pana sutte idha vinicchayoti vutto vitakkoyeva āgato. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundarañca vitakkeneva vinicchināti ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo’’ti. Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati. Chandoti ettha dubbalarāgassādhivacanaṃ, rāgoti balavarāgassa. Ajjhosānanti ahaṃ mamāti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ. Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ. Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti. Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjūsagopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhaṇaṃ. Adhikarotīti adhikaraṇaṃ. Kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhahetūti attho. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃ daṇḍādānaṃ. Ekatodhārādinā satthassa ādānaṃ satthādānaṃ. Kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi kalaho. Purimo purimo virodho viggaho. Pacchimo pacchimo vivādo. Tuvaṃtuvanti agāravavasena tuvaṃtuvaṃvacanaṃ.
十种邪性,就是邪见……乃至邪定、邪智、邪解脱。其中,邪智是指:在造作恶行时,以盘算造恶手段的方式造恶,以及以“我做得很好”这样的心态反复回顾时,所生起的愚痴。邪解脱是指:明明没有解脱,却把它当成解脱。巴利
Dasa micchattāti micchādiṭṭhi…pe… micchāsamādhi micchāñāṇaṃ micchāvimutti. Tattha micchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena pāpaṃ katvā sukataṃ mayāti paccavekkhaṇākārena ca uppanno moho. Micchāvimuttīti avimuttasseva sato vimuttisaññitā.
现在,为了说明应当通过种种断来舍断的法,开始讲“二断”等内容。因为一旦明白了各种断,那些应当一一断除的法就容易理解了。在五种断当中,除了两种世间断和不费力的出离断之外,先说不费力的两种出世间断。能正确地斩断烦恼,所以叫“正断”;因为能断除,所以叫“断”。以正断为断,而不是以其余的断为断,所以叫“正断断”。由于烦恼已经止息,所以叫“止息”;因为已经断除,所以叫“断”;以止息为断,就叫“止息断”。超越世间,所以叫“出世间”。趋向被称为涅槃的灭尽,所以叫“趣灭”;这个趣向灭尽之道,就是“趣灭道”。对于修习此道的人来说,他的道就是正断断,这是它的含义。同样,在果位的那一刹那,只有出世间果才是止息断。巴利
Idāni anekabhedena pahānena pahātabbe dassetuṃ dve pahānānītiādi āraddhaṃ. Pahānesu hi viññātesu tena tena pahātabbā dhammā suviññeyyā honti. Pañcasu pahānesu lokikāni ca dve pahānāni appayogaṃ nissaraṇappahānañca ṭhapetvā appayogāneva dve lokuttarapahānāni paṭhamaṃ vuttāni. Sammā ucchijjanti etena kilesāti samucchedo, pahīyanti etena kilesāti pahānaṃ. Samucchedasaṅkhātaṃ pahānaṃ, na sesappahānanti samucchedappahānaṃ. Kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhattā paṭippassaddhi, pahīnattā pahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhisaṅkhātaṃ pahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ. Lokaṃ uttaratīti lokuttaro. Nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ gacchatīti khayagāmī, khayagāmī ca so maggo cāti khayagāmimaggo, taṃ bhāvayato so maggo samucchedappahānanti attho. Tathā phalakkhaṇe lokuttaraphalameva paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ.
在“这是诸欲的出离”等语句中,因为通过它从欲、从色、从有为法中出离,所以叫“出离”;或者因为已经从这些当中脱离,所以叫“出离”。这是指不净禅那。因为从诸欲中出离,所以叫“出离”。或者指不来道。因为不净禅那通过镇伏成为诸欲的出离,而以那禅那作为基础所生起的不来道,则通过彻底断除而成为诸欲的究竟出离。会变坏,所以叫“色”;不是色,就是“无色”,就像与朋友对立的是非朋友,与贪等对立的是无贪等一样,意思是与色对立。或者依果来说,这里没有“色”,所以是“无色”,无色本身就是“无色〔界〕”。是指无色禅那。那些是色的出离。阿拉汉道比无色禅更进一步,能令色法不再生起,所以称为从色彻底出离。生的,叫“已生”。由诸缘和合所作的,叫“有为”。依彼彼诸缘而正确共同生起的,叫“缘起”。第一句“已生”显示无常性;第二句显示即使无常存在,也依缘之力而有所依赖;第三句显示即使有所依赖存在,诸缘也无作用,从而显示法性如此。“灭”是指涅槃。因为依涅槃而苦灭,所以叫“灭”。而那正因为从一切有为法中出离,所以叫那有为法的出离。然而在义注中——巴利
Kāmānametaṃnissaraṇantiādīsu kāmato rūpato saṅkhatato nissaranti etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, tehi vā nissaṭattā nissaraṇaṃ. Asubhajjhānaṃ. Kāmehi nikkhantattā nekkhammaṃ. Anāgāmimaggo vā. Asubhajjhānañhi vikkhambhanato kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppāditaanāgāmimaggo pana samucchedato sabbaso kāmānaṃ accantanissaraṇaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, na rūpaṃ arūpaṃ mittapaṭipakkhā amittā viya, lobhādipaṭipakkhā alobhādayo viya ca rūpapaṭipakkhoti attho. Phalavasena vā natthettha rūpanti arūpaṃ, arūpameva āruppaṃ. Arūpajjhānāni. Tāni rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Arūpehipi arahattamaggo puna uppattinivāraṇato sabbaso rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Bhūtanti jātaṃ. Saṅkhatanti paccayehi saṅgamma kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti te te paccaye paṭicca sammā saha ca uppannaṃ. Paṭhamena sañjātattadīpanena aniccatā, dutiyena aniccassāpi sato paccayānubhāvadīpanena parāyattatā, tatiyena parāyattassāpi sato paccayānaṃ abyāpārattadīpanena evaṃdhammatā dīpitā hoti. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ. Nibbānañhi āgamma dukkhaṃ nirujjhatīti nirodhoti vuccati. So eva ca sabbasaṅkhatato nissaṭattā tassa saṅkhatassa nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“灭是它的出离”:这里,“灭”指的是阿拉汉果。因为通过阿拉汉果亲证涅槃之后,未来一切诸行不再生起,所以它被称为“灭”——这是就它作为名为阿拉汉的灭的缘而言。巴利
‘‘Nirodho tassa nissaraṇanti idha arahattaphalaṃ nirodhoti adhippetaṃ. Arahattaphalena hi nibbāne diṭṭhe puna āyatiṃ sabbasaṅkhārā na hontīti arahattasaṅkhātassa nirodhassa paccayattā nirodhoti vutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
在“已获得出离”等语句中:由于不净禅那是一种出离,所以通过镇伏断,欲被断除也被舍弃;由于不来道是一种出离,所以通过断除断,欲同样被断除也被舍弃。对于无色禅那是一种出离、以及阿拉汉道是一种出离,也应当以同样的方式配合到“色”上。因为通过断除对色的欲贪,色就被彻底断除。这里“色”这个词是做了语法性别的转换。由于涅槃是一种出离,所以通过出离断;由于阿拉汉果是一种出离,所以通过止息断——诸行既被断除也被舍弃。而涅槃作为一种出离,应当理解为是以作为所缘的方式而获得的。巴利
Nekkhammaṃ paṭiladdhassātiādīsu asubhajjhānassa nissaraṇatte vikkhambhanappahānena, anāgāmimaggassa nissaraṇatte samucchedappahānena kāmā pahīnā ceva honti pariccattā ca. Arūpajjhānānaṃ nissaraṇatte ca arahattamaggassa nissaraṇatte ca evameva rūpā yojetabbā. Rūpesu hi chandarāgappahānena rūpānaṃ samucchedo hoti. Rūpāti cettha liṅgavipallāso kato. Nibbānassa nissaraṇatte nissaraṇappahānena, arahattaphalassa nissaraṇatte paṭippassaddhippahānena saṅkhārā pahīnā ceva honti pariccattā ca. Nibbānassa ca nissaraṇatte ārammaṇakaraṇavasena paṭilābho veditabbo.
在“苦谛”等语句中,“遍知通达”等词是中性的抽象名词用法。以遍知而通达,就叫遍知通达;那个遍知通达(就是这里说的)。其余各处也按同样的方式理解。“舍断”:在这样那样地通达时,舍断应当被舍断的烦恼——应当这样理解其含义。无论在世间还是出世间,也都是通过舍断欲贪而舍断它们,这是其含义。也有写成“舍断”的异读。就像一艘船在同一刹那、没有先后地完成四件事:舍弃此岸、截断水流、运载货物、抵达彼岸;同样,道智在同一刹那、没有先后地现观四谛:以遍知现观而现观苦,以舍断现观而现观集,以修习现观而现观道,以作证现观而现观灭。这话说的是什么?因为《清净道论》中说“以灭为所缘,而到达、看见、通达四谛”,所以应当知道,即使在同一刹那中,也像是分别宣说那样,说为有舍断等。巴利
Dukkhasaccantiādīsu pariññāpaṭivedhantiādi bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ. Pariññāya paṭivedho pariññāpaṭivedho. Taṃ pariññāpaṭivedhaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Pajahātīti tathā tathā paṭivijjhanto pahātabbe kilese pajahatīti attho gahetabbo. Lokiyalokuttaresupi chandarāgappahānena vā tāni pajahatīti attho. Pajahatītipi pāṭho. Yathā nāvā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri kiccāni karoti, orimaṃ tīraṃ pajahati, sotaṃ chindati, bhaṇḍaṃ vahati, pārimaṃ tīraṃ appeti, evamevaṃ maggañāṇaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ ekakkhaṇe cattāri saccāni abhisameti, dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena abhisameti, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena abhisameti, maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena abhisameti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cattāri saccāni pāpuṇāti passati paṭivijjhatī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.839) vuttattā ekakkhaṇepi visuṃ visuṃ viya pahānāni vuttānīti veditabbāni.
在五种断里,就像把水罐丢进长满水藻的水中,水藻被排开一样,通过种种世间定,把盖等敌对法镇伏、排除掉,这叫作镇伏断。应当知道,说镇伏断是就“修习初禅的人断除诸盖”而说的,因为诸盖的断除很明显。诸盖在禅那的前分和后分都不会突然压住心,一旦心被盖压住,禅那就退失了;而寻等法在第二禅等之前和之后,都不是作为敌对法而现起的。所以,诸盖的镇伏是明显的。再者,就像夜里点亮的灯去除黑暗一样,通过作为观的一部分的种种禅支,以敌对的方式断除各种应断之法,这叫作彼分断。应当知道,说彼分断是就“修习能摧破恶见的抉择分定的人断除恶见”而说的,这是从粗重法的角度来说的。因为恶见是粗重的,常想等则是微细的。其中,“恶见”就是指恶见本身,就像“粪所行处”“尿所行处”等说法一样。又因为没有可去之处,恶见只是所到之处,所以也叫恶见;由于包含在六十二见之中,所以也叫入于诸见中者。这里用复数,是指那些恶见。“抉择分定”就是与观相应的定。再者,就像被雷击中的树不再生长一样,通过圣道智,使结缚之法永不再生起,这样的断除叫作正断。灭就是涅槃,也就是被称为灭的涅槃。巴利
Pañcasu pahānesu yaṃ sasevāle udake pakkhittena ghaṭena sevālassa viya tena tena lokiyasamādhinā nīvaraṇādīnaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ dūrīkaraṇaṃ, idaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Vikkhambhanappahānañca nīvaraṇānaṃ paṭhamaṃjhānaṃ bhāvayatoti nīvaraṇānaṃyeva pahānaṃ pākaṭattā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānassa pubbabhāgepi pacchābhāgepi na sahasā cittaṃ ajjhottharanti, ajjhotthaṭesu ca tesu jhānaṃ parihāyati, vitakkādayo pana dutiyajjhānādito pubbe pacchā ca appaṭipakkhā hutvā pavattanti. Tasmā nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ pākaṭaṃ. Yaṃ pana rattibhāge samujjalitena padīpena andhakārassa viya tena tena vipassanāya avayavabhūtena jhānaṅgena paṭipakkhavaseneva tassa tassa ca pahātabbadhammassa pahānaṃ, idaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ nāma. Tadaṅgappahānañca diṭṭhigatānaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ samādhiṃ bhāvayatoti diṭṭhigatānaṃyeva pahānaṃ oḷārikavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Diṭṭhigatañhi oḷārikaṃ, niccasaññādayo sukhumā. Tattha diṭṭhigatānanti diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’ntiādīni (a. ni. 9.11) viya. Gantabbābhāvato cadiṭṭhiyā gatamattamevetantipi diṭṭhigataṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhīsu antogadhattā diṭṭhīsu gatantipi diṭṭhigataṃ. Bahuvacanena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ. Nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ samādhinti vipassanāsampayuttaṃ samādhiṃ. Yaṃ pana asanivicakkābhihatassa (visuddhi. 2.851) rukkhassa viya ariyamaggañāṇena saṃyojanānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathā na puna pavattati, evaṃ pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Nirodhonibbānanti nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ.
像这样,从舍断的角度说明了应当断除的诸法之后,现在为了再从这些法本身的角度说明应当断除的诸法,于是说“诸比丘,一切皆应断”等等。其中,眼等应当通过断除欲贪来断除。在“见色时即舍断”等语句中,意思是:以无常等角度观察色时,便舍断了应当断除的烦恼。在“眼……乃至……老死……乃至……深入不死之处的涅槃”这两处省略重复的段落中,对于“观察未知当知根时即舍断”等语句,应当根据各法的特性来配合理解:当观察、注视、期待、希求那些出世间法中的未知当知根时,在观的刹那便舍断了应当断除的烦恼。巴利
Evaṃ pahānavasena pahātabbe dhamme dassetvā idāni sarūpeneva puna pahātabbe dhamme dassetuṃ sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, pahātabbantiādimāha. Tattha cakkhādīni chandarāgappahānena pahātabbāni. Rūpaṃ passanto pajahātītiādīsu rūpaṃ aniccādito passanto pahātabbe kilese pajahāti. Cakkhuṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ…pe… amatogadhaṃ nibbānanti peyyāladvaye anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ ‘‘passanto pajahātī’’tiādīsu tesu lokuttaresu anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ passanto udikkhanto apekkhamāno icchamāno vipassanākkhaṇesu pahātabbe kilese pajahātīti taṃtaṃdhammānurūpena yojetabbaṃ.
应修的注释巴利
Bhāvetabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
25 25. 在“应当修习”的解说中,“身至念”是指《身至念经》等经典中所说的念,它与入出息念、四威仪、小威仪、三十二身分、四界差别、九种坟场不净观、以及抉择作意相应,并且随其适合而与色界禅那相应。因为这种念进入并运行于这些“身”中,所以称为“身至”。“与乐俱行”是指与被称为甘美之乐的乐受达到同生等状态。在佛陀的教法中,“俱行”一词出现在五种含义中:同体、混杂、所缘、所依、相杂。比如“那种导致再有、伴随喜贪的渴爱”中,是指同体,意思是喜贪本身。“那种与懈怠俱行的考察”中,是指混杂,意思是被偶尔生起的懈怠所混杂。“获得与色俱行或与无色俱行的等至”中,是指所缘,意思是以色界或无色界为所缘。“修习与骨想俱行的念觉支”中,是指所依,意思是依止骨想、修习骨想而获得。“此乐与此喜俱行、俱生、相应”中,是指相杂,意思是相互混合。在这里,“乐俱行”也是指相杂。因为与乐相杂,所以说为“乐俱行”。实际上,除了第四禅以外,其余禅那中它都是与乐俱行的。虽然在第四禅中是与舍俱行,但按照多数情况而说为“乐俱行”;或者因为第四禅以之前的禅那为根本,所以说乐俱行时,与舍俱行的第四禅也被包括在内;又或者因为世尊在舍的寂静之乐中说为乐俱行,所以与第四禅相应的也被说为乐俱行。巴利
25. Bhāvetabbaniddese kāyagatāsatīti kāyagatāsatisuttante (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) vuttā ānāpānacatuiriyāpathakhuddakairiyāpathadvattiṃsākāracatudhātunavasivathikāpaṭikūla- vavatthāpakamanasikārasampayuttā yathānurūpaṃ rūpajjhānasampayuttā ca sati. Sā hi tesu kāyesu gatā pavattāti kāyagatāti vuccati. Sātasahagatāti madhurasukhavedayitasaṅkhātena sātena saha ekuppādādibhāvaṃ gatā. Tabbhāve vokiṇṇe ārammaṇe nissaye saṃsaṭṭhe dissati sahagatasaddo pañcasu atthesu jinavacane. ‘‘Yāyaṃ taṇhā ponobbhavikā nandirāgasahagatā’’ti (vibha. 203) ettha tabbhāve, nandirāgabhūtāti attho. ‘‘Yā, bhikkhave, vīmaṃsā kosajjasahagatā kosajjasampayuttā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.832) ettha vokiṇṇe, antarantarā uppajjamānena kosajjena vokiṇṇāti attho. ‘‘Lābhī hoti rūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīnaṃ arūpasahagatānaṃ vā samāpattīna’’nti (pu. pa. 3-8) ettha ārammaṇe, rūpārūpārammaṇānanti attho. ‘‘Aṭṭhikasaññāsahagataṃ satisambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.238) ettha nissaye, aṭṭhikasaññānissayaṃ aṭṭhikasaññaṃ bhāvetvā paṭiladdhanti attho. ‘‘Idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagataṃ hoti sahajātaṃ sampayutta’’nti (vibha. 578) ettha saṃsaṭṭhe, sammissanti attho. Imasmimpi pade saṃsaṭṭho adhippeto. Sātasaṃsaṭṭhā hi sātasahagatāti vuttā. Sā hi ṭhapetvā catutthaṃ jhānaṃ sesesu sātasahagatā hoti, satipi ca upekkhāsahagatatte yebhuyyavasena sātasahagatāti vuttā, purimajjhānamūlakattā vā catutthajjhānassa sātasahagatāya upekkhāsahagatāpi vuttāva hoti , upekkhāya pana sante sukhe vuttattā bhagavatā sātasahagatāti catutthajjhānasampayuttāpi vuttāva hoti.
止与观:所谓“止”,就是让欲贪等敌对的法平息、消灭,所以叫止。这是定的名称。所谓“观”,就是依无常等,以种种方式观察诸法,所以叫观。这是慧的名称。不过,这两种在《十上经》的教示里被称为前分,在《集异门经》的教示里则说是世间与出世间混合的。
三种定:有寻有伺定、无寻唯伺定、无寻无伺定。与当下现起的寻相应,就是有寻;与当下现起的伺相应,就是有伺。这有寻有伺定,就是刹那定、观定、近行定、初禅定。没有寻,就是无寻。在寻和伺两者中,伺是“唯”,是最上,是极限,所以叫唯伺,意思是不再和寻相应。这无寻唯伺定,在五法论中是第二禅定。两者都没有,就是无寻无伺定,在四法论中是第二禅等,在五法论中是第三禅等,也就是色界定。这三种定都只是世间的。在《集异门经》的教示中,还说了另外三种定——空定、无相定、无愿定,但这里说的不是那些。巴利
Samatho ca vipassanā cāti kāmacchandādayo paccanīkadhamme sameti vināsetīti samatho. Samādhissetaṃ nāmaṃ. Aniccatādivasena vividhehi ākārehi dhamme passatīti vipassanā. Paññāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ime pana dve dasuttarapariyāye pubbabhāgāti vuttā, saṅgītipariyāye ca lokiyalokuttaramissakāti. Tayo samādhīti savitakko savicāro samādhi , avitakko vicāramatto samādhi, avitakko avicāro samādhi. Sampayogavasena vattamānena saha vitakkena savitakko, saha vicārena savicāro. So khaṇikasamādhi, vipassanāsamādhi, upacārasamādhi, paṭhamajjhānasamādhi. Natthi etassa vitakkoti avitakko. Vitakkavicāresu vicāro mattā paramā pamāṇaṃ etassāti vicāramatto, vicārato uttari vitakkena sampayogaṃ na gacchatīti attho. So pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi, tadubhayavirahito avitakko avicāro samādhi. So catukkanaye dutiyajjhānādi, pañcakanaye tatiyajjhānādi rūpāvacarasamādhi. Ime tayopi lokiyā eva. Saṅgītipariyāye aparepi tayo samādhī vuttā – ‘‘suññato samādhi, animitto samādhi, appaṇihito samādhī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.305). Na te idha adhippetā.
四念处:就是身随观念处、受随观念处、心随观念处、法随观念处。应当知道,在前期阶段,以十四种方式把握身,是身随观念处;以九种方式把握受,是受随观念处;以十六种方式把握心,是心随观念处;以五种方式把握法,是法随观念处。不过,这里说的并不是出世间的念处。五支定:因为它具有五个支分,所以叫五支,指的是第四禅定。五个支分是:喜遍满、乐遍满、心遍满、光明遍满、观察相。喜遍满生起,指的是两种禅那中的慧,叫喜遍满。乐遍满生起,指的是三种禅那中的慧,叫乐遍满。遍满他人之心而生起,指的是他心智,叫心遍满。遍满光明而生起,指的是天眼智,叫光明遍满。观察智就叫观察相。这也是曾经说过的:巴利
Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Pubbabhāge cuddasavidhena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhato kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, navavidhena vedanaṃ pariggaṇhato vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittaṃ pariggaṇhato cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, pañcavidhena dhamme pariggaṇhato dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ pana idha na adhippetaṃ. Pañcaṅgiko samādhīti pañca aṅgāni assa santīti pañcaṅgiko, catutthajjhānasamādhi. Pītipharaṇatā, sukhapharaṇatā, cetopharaṇatā, ālokapharaṇatā, paccavekkhaṇanimittanti pañca aṅgāni. Pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā nāma. Sukhaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā nāma. Paresaṃ ceto pharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā nāma. Ālokaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā nāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
在两种禅那中,慧是喜遍满;在三种禅那中,慧是乐遍满;他心智是心遍满;天眼智是光明遍满;从每一种定出来之后的观察智,就是观察相。巴利
‘‘Dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā, tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā, paracittapaññā cetopharaṇatā, dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhitassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimitta’’nti (vibha. 804).
这个相之所以被称为“相”,是因为它能把握住从定中出来的人所生起的行相。在这里,喜遍满和乐遍满就像两只脚,心遍满和光明遍满就像两只手,作为神通基础的第四禅就像躯干,观察相就像头部。这样,具寿法将舍利弗长老就把五支正定展示成一个四肢五体俱全的人。巴利
Tañhi vuṭṭhitasamādhissa pavattākāragahaṇato nimittanti vuttaṃ. Tattha ca pītipharaṇatā sukhapharaṇatā dve pādā viya, cetopharaṇatā ālokapharaṇatā dve hatthā viya, abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ majjhimakāyo viya, paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ sīsaṃ viya. Iti āyasmā dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero pañcaṅgikaṃ sammāsamādhiṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasampannaṃ purisaṃ viya katvā dassesi.
“六随念处”:因为一再地生起,所以念本身就是随念;又因为它只在应当运作的所缘上生起,所以对依信心出家的善男子来说,念也是相应的随念;而这些随念正是喜等生起之处,所以称为随念处。是哪六种呢?佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念。
“觉支”:是觉悟的支分,或者觉悟者的支分。这里说的是:圣弟子依靠在出世间道的刹那中生起的那一组法——也就是被称为念、择法、精进、喜、轻安、定、舍的这一法之组合,它能对治昏沉、掉举、停滞、过度精进、贪著欲乐、自我折磨、执断、执常等种种过患——而觉悟,因此,那法之组合就称为“觉悟”。所谓“觉悟”,就是从烦恼相续所形成的睡眠中醒来,或者通达四圣谛,或者亲证涅槃。属于那被称为“法之组合”的觉悟的支分,所以称为觉支,就像禅支、道支等一样。或者,按照上面所说的方式,圣弟子因为依靠那种法之组合而觉悟,所以称为“觉悟者”,属于这位觉悟者的支分,也可以称为觉支,就像军队的支分、战车的部件一样。因此,注释师们说:“或者是觉悟者的支分,所以是觉支。”此外,觉支的含义还应按照“觉支是什么含义?能导向觉悟,所以是觉支”等理趣来理解。
“圣八支道”:因为远离该道所应断除的种种烦恼,因为能造就圣者的品质,因为能获得圣者的果证,所以是“圣”。具有八个支分,所以是“八支”。这就像四支的军队、五支的乐器一样,只是支分的组合,离开支分就没有独立的自体。觉支和道支属于出世间,但按照十上经的理趣,前行阶段(世间)的也可以纳入其中。巴利
Cha anussatiṭṭhānānīti punappunaṃ uppajjanato satiyo eva anussatiyo, pavattitabbaṭṭhānasmiṃyeva pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satiyotipi anussatiyo, anussatiyo eva pītiādīnaṃ ṭhānattā anussatiṭṭhānāni. Katamāni cha? Buddhānussati dhammānussati saṅghānussati sīlānussati cāgānussati devatānussati (dī. ni. 3.327). Bojjhaṅgāti bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā esā dhammasāmaggī yāya lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhattakilamathānuyogaucchedasassatābhinivesādīnaṃ anekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayavīriyapītipassaddhisamādhiupekkhāsaṅkhātāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhatīti katvā bodhīti vuccati. Bujjhatīti kilesasantānaniddāya vuṭṭhahati, cattāri vā ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhati, nibbānameva vā sacchikaroti, tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgādayo viya. Yo panesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako bodhīti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgātipi bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Tenāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘bujjhanakassa puggalassa aṅgāti vā bojjhaṅgā’’ti. Apica ‘‘bojjhaṅgāti kenaṭṭhena bojjhaṅgā, bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 2.17) nayena bojjhaṅgaṭṭho veditabbo. Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā ariyabhāvakarattā ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Soyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya ca tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi. Bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgā lokuttarā, dasuttarapariyāyena pubbabhāgāpi labbhanti.
九种清净精勤支:戒清净是清净精勤支,心清净是清净精勤支,见清净是清净精勤支,度疑清净是清净精勤支,道非道知见清净是清净精勤支,行道知见清净是清净精勤支,知见清净是清净精勤支,慧是清净精勤支,解脱是清净精勤支。
所谓“戒清净”,指能使人达到清净的四遍净戒,因为这种戒能清除犯戒的污垢。“清净精勤支”的意思是:作为清净状态中最殊胜的精勤支分。
所谓“心清净”,指作为观禅立足处、已经修习熟练的八种等至。因为那些等至能清除欲贪等心的污垢。所谓“见清净”,指了知有缘的名色。因为那能清除有情之见的污垢。所谓“度疑清净”,指缘起相的智慧。因为通过它,以缘的方式观察诸法在三世中生起者,就能超越三世中有情的疑惑之垢而清净。所谓“道非道知见清净”,指在生灭随观之时生起的光明、智、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍、欲这十种观随烦恼不是道,而进入轨道的生灭智是道,如此名为道非道的智。因为通过它,能清除非道之垢。所谓“行道知见清净”,指进入轨道的生灭随观智、坏随观智、怖畏现起随观智、过患随观智、厌离随观智、欲脱智、审察随观智、行舍智、随顺智,这九种观智。因为它们能清除常想等污垢。所谓“知见清净”,指四圣道的慧。因为它以断除的方式清除各自道所应断的烦恼污垢。所谓“慧”,指阿拉汉果的慧。所谓“解脱”,指阿拉汉果的解脱。巴利
Navapārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgānīti sīlavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, cittavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, diṭṭhivisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, ñāṇadassanavisuddhi pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, paññā pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ, vimutti pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgaṃ (dī. ni. 3.359). Sīlavisuddhīti visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Tañhi dussīlyamalaṃ visodheti. Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti parisuddhabhāvassa padhānaṃ uttamaṃ aṅgaṃ. Cittavisuddhīti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtā paguṇā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi kāmacchandādicittamalaṃ visodhenti. Diṭṭhivisuddhīti sappaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ. Tañhi sattadiṭṭhimalaṃ visodheti. Kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhīti paccayākārañāṇaṃ. Tena hi tīsu addhāsu paccayavasena dhammā pavattantīti passanto tīsupi addhāsu sattakaṅkhāmalaṃ vitaranto visujjhati. Maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhīti udayabbayānupassanakkhaṇe uppannā obhāsañāṇapītipassaddhisukhaadhimokkhapaggahaupaṭṭhānaupekkhānikantīti dasa vipassanupakkilesā, na maggo, vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ maggoti evaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇaṃ nāma. Tena hi amaggamalaṃ visodheti. Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti vīthipaṭipannaṃ udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānānupassanāñāṇaṃ ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ anulomañāṇanti imāni nava vipassanāñāṇāni. Tāni hi niccasaññādimalaṃ visodhenti. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti catuariyamaggapaññā. Sā hi samucchedato sakasakamaggavajjhakilesamalaṃ visodheti. Paññāti arahattaphalapaññā. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti.
十遍处,就是经里说的:“有人认知地遍,向上、向下、横向,无二、无量;有人认知水遍……乃至……有人认知火遍……乃至……有人认知风遍……乃至……有人认知青遍……乃至……有人认知黄遍……乃至……有人认知红遍……乃至……有人认知白遍……乃至……有人认知虚空遍……乃至……有人认知识遍,向上、向下、横向,无二、无量。”这样说了十种。这些之所以叫“遍”,是因为它们以完全遍满为义;之所以叫“处”,是因为它们对以它们为所缘的诸法有田地的意义,或者有确立的意义。向上,是朝向上方虚空界。向下,是朝向下方地界。横向,是像田地的圆形范围那样,在一切方位上划定界限。因为有些人只向上扩大遍,有些人向下,有些人向一切方位。也有人以这样那样的原因,像想看色的人扩展光明那样,把它这样伸展出去。因此说:“有人认知地遍,向上、向下、横向。”无二,这是为了说明它不随顺于成为别的什么。譬如进入水中的人,在一切方向只有水,没有别的;同样,地遍就只是地遍,没有它与别的遍混杂。这个道理在一切处都一样。无量,这是依它各自遍满的无量而说。因为以心遍满它时,就遍满全部,不取“这是它的开始,这是它的中间”这样的量。虚空遍,是除去遍后的虚空以及作为分划虚空的遍。识遍,是在除去遍后的虚空中转起的识。其中,依遍的方面,应在除去遍后的虚空中;依除去遍后的虚空的方面,应在那里转起的识中,了知向上、向下、横向;因为作为分划虚空的遍也应扩大,所以也依它的方面(了知)。巴利
Dasa kasiṇāyatanānīti ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ advayaṃ appamāṇaṃ, āpokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… tejokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… vāyokasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… nīlakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… pītakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… lohitakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… odātakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… ākāsakasiṇameko sañjānāti…pe… viññāṇakasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriyaṃ advayaṃ appamāṇa’’nti (a. ni. 10.25; dī. ni. 3.360) evaṃ vuttāni dasa. Etāni hi sakalapharaṇaṭṭhena kasiṇāni, tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ khettaṭṭhena adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vā āyatanāni. Uddhanti uparigaganatalābhimukhaṃ. Adhoti heṭṭhābhūmitalābhimukhaṃ. Tiriyanti khettamaṇḍalamiva samantā paricchinnaṃ. Ekacco hi uddhameva kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍheti ekacco adho, ekacco samantato. Ekopi tena tena vā kāraṇena evaṃ pasāreti ālokamiva rūpadassanakāmo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriya’’nti (a. ni. 10.25; dī. ni. 3.360). Advayanti idaṃ pana ekassa aññabhāvānupagamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi udakaṃ paviṭṭhassa sabbadisāsu udakameva hoti na aññaṃ, evameva pathavīkasiṇaṃ pathavīkasiṇameva hoti, natthi tassa aññakasiṇasambhedoti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Appamāṇanti idaṃ tassa tassa pharaṇaappamāṇavasena vuttaṃ. Tañhi manasā pharanto sakalameva pharati, na ‘‘ayamassa ādi idaṃ majjha’’nti pamāṇaṃ gaṇhātīti. Ākāsakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāso paricchedākāsakasiṇañca. Viññāṇakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattaviññāṇaṃ. Tattha kasiṇavasena kasiṇugghāṭimākāse, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsavasena tattha pavattaviññāṇe uddhaṃadhotiriyatā veditabbā, paricchedākāsakasiṇassapi vaḍḍhanīyattā tassa vasenapīti.
26 现在要说明修习的分类,所以说了“二种修习”等话。其中,在“世间的”等词里,“世间”是指以毁坏、崩坏为意义的轮回。因为被包含在轮回之中、系属于世间,所以叫“世间的”;世间法的修习,就是“世间修习”。虽然按习惯说法叫“法的修习”,但离开那些法并没有另外的修习——那些法本身在被修习时,就叫作修习。“超越的”即“更上的”,因为不属于世间、超越了世间,所以叫“出世间”。巴利
26. Idāni bhāvanāpabhedaṃ dassento dve bhāvanātiādimāha. Tattha lokiyātiādīsu loko vuccati lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ, tasmiṃ pariyāpannabhāvena loke niyuttāti lokiyā, lokiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanā lokiyā. Kiñcāpi dhammānaṃ bhāvanāti vohāravasena vuccati, tehi pana visuṃ bhāvanā natthi. Te eva hi dhammā bhāviyamānā bhāvanāti vuccanti. Uttiṇṇāti uttarā, loke apariyāpannabhāvena lokato uttarāti lokuttarā.
色界,就是名为“色界”的色法;在其中活动的,就是色界(色界心、色界法)。不过在这里,“善”这个词可以在无病、无过失、善巧、乐果这几种意思上出现。比如“尊者身体还好吗?尊者没有病痛吗?”这类句子里,是指无病。在“那么,尊者,什么样的身行是善呢?大王,没有过失的身行就是善”以及“再者,尊者,世尊在善法方面说法,这是无上的”这类句子里,是指无过失。在“王子,你认为怎样?你善巧于车的各个部件吗?”以及“那些善巧歌舞的才艺女子”这类句子里,是指善巧。在“因为受持善法,这样福德就增长”以及“由于已作、已积集的善业”这类句子里,是指乐果。在这里,无病、无过失、乐果这几个意思都适用。再说词义:那些能令可憎的、邪恶的法动摇、颤动、被摧毁、被破坏的,就是善;或者以可憎的方式存在、活动的,就是“俱舍”(kusa);它们切断、斩断名为不善的“俱舍”,所以是善;或者可憎之法的削减、变少就是“俱舍”,也就是智慧。以这个“俱舍”而可得到、可把握、可令其活动的,就是善;又像“俱舍”草割断手部上下两边的部位一样,这些法也以已生和未生的方式割断属于烦恼的那一边,因此像“俱舍”草一样割断的,就是善。这些色界善法的修习,就是色界修。无色界,就是名为“无色界”的无色法;在其中活动的,就是无色界。属于三界轮回、被包含、被摄在内的,是“有摄”;不属于那里面的,是“无摄”,也就是出世间。巴利
Rūpabhavasaṅkhāte rūpe avacarantīti rūpāvacarā. Kusalasaddo panettha ārogyaanavajjachekasukhavipākesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ? Kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129) ārogye. ‘‘Katamo pana, bhante, kāyasamācāro kusalo? Yo kho, mahārāja, kāyasamācāro anavajjo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.361) ca ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhante, etadānuttariyaṃ, yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti kusalesu dhammesū’’ti (dī. ni. 3.145) ca evamādīsu anavajje. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, rājakumāra, kusalo tvaṃ rathassa aṅgapaccaṅgāna’’nti? (Ma. ni. 2.87) ‘‘kusalā naccagītassa sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’ti (jā. 2.22.94) ca ādīsu cheke. ‘‘Kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samādānahetu evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.80) ‘‘kusalassa kammassa katattā upacitattā’’ti (dha. sa. 431) ca ādīsu sukhavipāke. Svāyamidha ārogyepi anavajjepi sukhavipākepi vaṭṭati. Vacanattho panettha kucchite pāpake dhamme salayanti calayanti kampenti viddhaṃsentīti kusalā, kucchitena vā ākārena sayanti pavattantīti kusā, te akusalasaṅkhāte kuse lunanti chindantīti kusalā, kucchitānaṃ vā sānato tanukaraṇato kusaṃ, ñāṇaṃ. Tena kusena lātabbā gahetabbā pavattetabbāti kusalā, yathā vā kusā ubhayabhāgagataṃ hatthappadesaṃ lunanti, evamimepi uppannānuppannabhāvena ubhayabhāgagataṃ saṃkilesapakkhaṃ lunanti, tasmā kusā viya lunantīti kusalā. Tesaṃ rūpāvacarakusalānaṃ bhāvanā. Arūpabhavasaṅkhāte arūpe avacarantīti arūpāvacarā. Tebhūmakavaṭṭe pariyāpannā antogadhāti pariyāpannā, tasmiṃ na pariyāpannāti apariyāpannā, lokuttarā.
如果有人问:为什么欲界善法的修习没有被说成“修习”呢?因为在阿毗达摩里,“修习”指的就是已经达到安止的修习。正如在那里所说的——巴利
Kāmāvacarakusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanā kasmā na vuttāti ce? Appanāppattāya eva bhāvanāya abhidhamme bhāvanāti adhippetattā. Vuttañhi tattha –
在那些属于修行所依的业处、技艺处或知识领域中,对于“业属于自己的”或“随顺真理”的内容——也就是“色是无常的”“受是无常的”“想是无常的”“行是无常的”“识是无常的”——如果他没有从别人那里听闻,就自己获得了这类随顺的忍、见、喜好、柔软、观察、对法审察的忍,这就叫作思所成慧。在那些属于修行所依的业处……中略……如果他是从别人那里听闻之后,才获得对法审察的忍,这就叫作闻所成慧。而已经证入等至的人,他的一切智慧都是修所成慧。巴利
‘‘Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā sippāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā vijjāṭṭhānesu kammassakataṃ vā saccānulomikaṃ vā rūpaṃ aniccanti vā, vedanā aniccāti vā, saññā aniccāti vā, saṅkhārā aniccāti vā, viññāṇaṃ aniccanti vā yaṃ evarūpaṃ anulomikaṃ khantiṃ diṭṭhiṃ ruciṃ mudiṃ pekkhaṃ dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato asutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccati cintāmayā paññā. Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu…pe… dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato sutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccati sutamayā paññā. Sabbāpi samāpannassa paññā bhāvanāmayā paññā’’ti (vibha. 768).
不过要知道,欲界的这种修习,由于被转向心和有分心的生起所间断,所以不称为“修习”。但一切福德都含摄在三种福行事之中,因此近行定和观定也就成立为修所成福。不过在这里,只把它们归入世间修习。色界和无色界的修习有下劣、中等、殊胜三种:低劣的就叫“下劣”;处在下劣和殊胜之间的就叫“中等”,也有读作“中等的”;被引向精勤努力的状态,就叫“殊胜”,也就是最上等的意思。应当根据策励用功的状态来理解这里的下劣、中等、殊胜:如果在策励的那个刹那,欲、精进、心或审察慧当中任何一个属于下劣,这种修习就叫“下劣”;如果这些法属于中等,就叫“中等”;如果这些法属于殊胜,就叫“殊胜”。或者说,与软弱的根相应的叫“下劣”,与中等的根相应的叫“中等”,与强力的根相应的叫“殊胜”。至于不属于三界的出世间修习,因为没有下劣和中等这两种状态,所以只说它是“殊胜”。因为它具有最上之义、无热恼之义,所以是“殊胜”。巴利
Sā pana kāmāvacarabhāvanā āvajjanabhavaṅgapātehi antaritattā bhāvanāti na vuttāti veditabbā. Sabbesaṃ pana puññānaṃ tividhapuññakiriyavatthūnaṃ antogadhattā upacārasamādhivipassanāsamādhīnaṃ bhāvanāmayapuññatā siddhā. Idha pana lokiyabhāvanāya eva saṅgahitā. Rūpārūpāvacarānaṃ tividhabhāve hīnāti lāmakā. Hīnuttamānaṃ majjhe bhavā majjhā, majjhimātipi pāṭho. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītāti paṇītā, uttamāti attho. Āyūhanavasena ayaṃ hīnamajjhimapaṇītatā veditabbā. Yassā hi āyūhanakkhaṇe chando vā hīno hoti vīriyaṃ vā cittaṃ vā vīmaṃsā vā, sā hīnā nāma. Yassā te dhammā majjhimā, sā majjhimā nāma. Yassā te dhammā paṇītā, sā paṇītā nāma. Mudukehi vā indriyehi sampayuttā hīnā nāma, majjhimehi indriyehi sampayuttā majjhimā, adhimattehi indriyehi sampayuttā paṇītā nāma. Apariyāpannāya hīnamajjhimattābhāvā paṇītatā eva vuttā. Sā hi uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītā.
27 在第一种四类修习里,“修习”是指在同一个刹那,以各种方式通达而修习圣道。在第二种四类修习里,“寻求修习”是指在安止之前的阶段所修的修习。因为它以这个来寻求安止,所以称为“寻求”。“获得修习”是指安止本身的修习。因为通过那个寻求而获得它,所以称为“获得”。“一味修习”是指已经获得安止、想要达到自在的人,在加行阶段的修习。因为它通过一次次的舍断,从种种烦恼中解脱出来,以解脱之味而成为一味,所以称为“一味”。“习行修习”是指已经获得安止、达到自在的人,在随意受用时的修习。因为它被大量地亲近运用,所以称为“习行”。然而有些人解释说:“习行修习是自在业,一味修习是遍一切处的。”在四类分别中,“正在入定的人”是指正在现起的近处之语。其中所生起的,是指在那个前行阶段所生起的。成为一味,是指在安止生起时具有相同作用。对于已入定的人,是指已安止者的安止。其中所生起的,是指由那种安止所生起的。互相不超过,是指在完全现起时不互相超越。在“以决意之义而修习信根”等当中,即使在同一个刹那,当每一个根各自执行自己的作用时,依各自各自的所依,其余诸根也各自执行自己的作用,以解脱之味而成为一味,因此就是以解脱之味的一味之义而修习。在力、觉支、道支当中也是同样的道理。而“一味”一词是作了性别的颠倒。巴利
27. Paṭhamabhāvanācatukke bhāvetīti ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe tathā tathā paṭivijjhanto ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Dutiyabhāvanācatukke esanābhāvanāti appanāpubbabhāge bhāvanā. Sā hi appanaṃ esanti etāyāti esanāti vuttā. Paṭilābhabhāvanāti appanābhāvanā. Sā hi tāya esanāya paṭilabbhatīti paṭilābhoti vuttā. Ekarasābhāvanāti paṭilābhe vasībhāvaṃ pattukāmassa payogakāle bhāvanā. Sā hi tena tena pahānena tehi tehi kilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāti katvā ekarasāti vuttā. Āsevanābhāvanāti paṭilābhe vasippattassa yathāruci paribhogakāle bhāvanā. Sā hi bhusaṃ sevīyatīti āsevanāti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘āsevanābhāvanā vasīkammaṃ, ekarasābhāvanā sabbatthikā’’ti vaṇṇayanti. Catukkavibhāge samādhiṃ samāpajjantānanti vattamānasamīpe vattamānavacanaṃ. Tattha jātāti tasmiṃ pubbabhāge jātā. Ekarasā hontīti appanuppādane samānakiccā honti. Samādhiṃ samāpannānanti appitappanānaṃ. Tattha jātāti tassā appanāya jātā. Aññamaññaṃ nātivattantīti samappavattiyā aññamaññaṃ nātikkamanti. Adhimokkhaṭṭhenasaddhindriyaṃbhāvayatotiādīsu ekakkhaṇepi ekekassa indriyassa sakasakakiccakaraṇe taṃtaṃnissayavasena sakasakakiccakārakāni sesānipi indriyāni vimuttirasena ekarasā hontīti vimuttiraseneva ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā. Balabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgesupi eseva nayo. Ekarasāti ca liṅgavipallāso kato.
这里说“比丘”,是指在这样的教法中的比丘。因为他在轮回中看到怖畏,所以叫比丘。“在上午时分”等说法,用的是表示极强关联的宾格,但从意义上看其实就是处格,意思是“在一天的前一段时间”。“习行”是指反复不断地运用已经达到自在的定。“在正午时分”,是指在一天的正中间。“在傍晚时分”,是指在一天的傍晚时候。“食前”,是指在日中午餐之前。“食后”,是指在日中午餐之后。“也在初夜分”,是指在夜间的第一个时段。“在黑分”,是指在黑半月的日子。“在白分”,是指在白半月的日子。“也在早期的寿份”,是指在早期年龄的范围内,也就是“初期之年龄”。在三种年龄中,对于寿量百岁之人而言,每个年龄阶段为三十三年零四个月。巴利
Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhatīti bhikkhu. Pubbaṇhasamayantiādīsu accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ, atthato pana bhummameva , divasassa pubbakāleti attho. Āsevatīti vasippattaṃ samādhiṃ bhusaṃ sevati. Majjhanhikasamayanti divasassa majjhakāle. Sāyanhasamayanti divasassa sāyanhakāle. Purebhattanti divābhattato purekāle. Pacchābhattanti divābhattato pacchākāle. Purimepi yāmeti rattiyā paṭhame koṭṭhāse. Kāḷeti kāḷapakkhe. Juṇheti sukkapakkhe. Purimepi vayokhandheti paṭhame vayokoṭṭhāse, paṭhamavayeti attho. Tīsu ca vayesu vassasatāyukassa purisassa ekekasmiṃ vaye catumāsādhikāni tettiṃsa vassāni honti.
28 在第三种四类修习中,“在那里生起的诸法互不超越”的意思是:在出离等各类修习中,定与慧这两种被称为“双运法”的法同时生起,它们彼此之间不会互相越过、互相压过。所谓“诸根一味”,是说就在这些修习当中,信等诸根因为已经从种种烦恼中解脱出来,所以以解脱为味,成为一味。“随顺于彼的精进承载”是说:对于那些互不超越、成为一味的法,随顺它们、与它们相称的精进起到了承载、运载的作用。“习行”是指在那时进行的反复练习。以那习行的习行性。巴利
28. Tatiyabhāvanācatukke tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhenāti tattha nekkhammādīsu bhāvanāvisesesu jātānaṃ samādhipaññāsaṅkhātānaṃ yuganaddhadhammānaṃ aññamaññaṃ anatikkamanabhāvena. Indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhenāti tattheva saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasabhāvena. Tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhenāti tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikassa vīriyassa vāhanabhāvena. Āsevanaṭṭhenāti yā tassa tasmiṃ samaye pavattā āsevanā. Tassā āsevanāya āsevanabhāvena.
色想:依善、异熟、唯作来分,有十五种,就是属于色界禅那的想。色界禅那本身在“有色者见色”等经文里也被称为色,而那个禅那的所缘,在“在外见色,有妙色、有恶色”等经文里也被称为色。因为是以想为首,对色生起想,所以称为色想。有对想:善异熟五种、不善异熟五种,这样共十种有对想。与双五识相应的想,因为是由眼等依处和色等所缘的撞击而生起的,所以称为有对想。色想、声想、香想、味想、触想,这些也都是它的名字。种种想:八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善异熟想、两种不善异熟想、十一种欲界唯作想,这样共四十四种,就是种种想。因为这种想在种种不同自性、种种不同种类的色、声等不同境界上生起,所以是种种想;或者,由于四十四种分类而各不相同、自性相异、彼此不相似,所以称为种种想。想虽然有很多种,但按总类来举,所以用单数。巴利
Rūpasaññanti kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasavidhaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ rūpasaññaṃ. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi rūpanti vuccati ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.174; a. ni. 8.66; dha. sa. 248), tassa jhānassa ārammaṇampi ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.173; a. ni. 8.65-66; dha. sa. 247, 249). Rūpāvacarajjhānañhi saññāsīsena rūpe saññāti katvā rūpasaññāti vuccati. Paṭighasaññanti kusalavipākā pañca, akusalavipākā pañcāti evaṃ dasavidhaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇasampayuttā hi saññā cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena uppannattā paṭighasaññāti vuccati. Rūpasaññā saddasaññā gandhasaññā rasasaññā phoṭṭhabbasaññātipi etissā eva nāmaṃ. Nānattasaññanti aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā , ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti evaṃ catucattālīsavidhaṃ nānattasaññaṃ. Sā hi nānatte nānāsabhāve rūpasaddādibhede gocare pavattā saññāti nānattasaññā, catucattālīsabhedato nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā saññāti vā nānattasaññāti vuccati. Saññābahukattepi jātiggahaṇena ekavacanaṃ kataṃ.
“常想”就是认为“常”的想,也就是常想。同样地,乐想、我想也是这样。“欢喜”是指带有喜的渴爱。“贪”是指没有喜的渴爱。“集”是指贪的集起。或者说,因为在坏灭随观中只看到坏灭本身,所以这里说诸行的生起。“执取”是指依烦恼生起而执取,或者因为看不到过患而对有为所缘的执取。“密集想”是指依相续而认为“密集”的想。“造作”是指为了诸行而付出努力。“恒常想”是指认为“坚固”的想。“相”是指常相。“希求”是指对快乐的希求。“执著”是指“有我”的执著。“执取实有的执著”是指执取常、坚实、实体的执著。“痴迷执著”是指以“我过去世是否存在过”这类方式,以及以“世界是由自在主所生”这类方式产生的痴迷执著。“依着执著”是指由于见有过患,仍然执著“这是应该依附的”。“不正思惟”是指执取错误的方法。“结缚执著”是指欲缚等烦恼的活动。巴利
Niccasaññanti niccanti saññaṃ niccasaññaṃ. Evaṃ sukhasaññaṃ attasaññaṃ. Nandinti sappītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Rāganti nippītikaṃ taṇhaṃ. Samudayanti rāgassa samudayaṃ. Atha vā bhaṅgānupassanāya bhaṅgasseva dassanato saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ. Ādānanti nibbattanavasena kilesānaṃ, adosadassāvitāya saṅkhatārammaṇassa vā ādānaṃ. Ghanasaññanti santativasena ghananti saññaṃ. Āyūhananti saṅkhārānaṃ atthāya payogakaraṇaṃ. Dhuvasaññanti thiranti saññaṃ. Nimittanti niccanimittaṃ. Paṇidhinti sukhapatthanaṃ. Abhinivesanti atthi attāti abhinivesaṃ. Sārādānābhinivesanti niccasārattasāragahaṇābhinivesaṃ. Sammohābhinivesanti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādivasena (saṃ. ni. 2.20) ‘‘issarato loko sambhotī’’tiādivasena ca sammohābhinivesaṃ. Ālayābhinivesanti ādīnavādassanena allīyitabbamidanti abhinivesaṃ. Appaṭisaṅkhanti anupāyagahaṇaṃ. Saññogābhinivesanti kāmayogādikaṃ kilesappavattiṃ.
“见共住”是指与诸见共同住在一个(人)当中,所以叫“见共住”。那些就是“见共住”。能烧恼、能逼迫,所以叫“烦恼”。那些就是“烦恼”。共住有两种:断除共住和俱生共住。
“断除共住”是指:以有身见为首的六十二见,直到被入流道断除为止,都住在同一个人当中。这里指的就是这个意思。因为在十种烦恼里,这里只提到了见烦恼。至于其余九种能使人堕入恶趣的烦恼——贪、嗔、痴、慢、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧——与见一起以断除共住的方式,被入流道断除;或者说,在以贪、嗔、痴为首的一千五百种烦恼中,当入流道断除见时,与见一起能使人堕入恶趣的一切烦恼都以断除共住的方式被断除。俱生共住是指与见共同住在一个心中。当入流道断除两种与见相应、无行的心时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼以俱生共住的方式被断除;当入流道断除两种与见相应、有行的心时,与它们俱生的贪、痴、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧这些烦恼以俱生共住的方式被断除。“粗烦恼”是指粗重的欲贪和嗔恚。“随细烦恼”是指微细的欲贪和嗔恚。“一切烦恼”是指被三道所断除的剩余部分。巴利
Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhīhi saha ekasmiṃ ṭhitāti diṭṭhekaṭṭhā. Te diṭṭhekaṭṭhe. Kilesenti upatāpenti, vibādhenti vāti kilesā. Te kilese. Duvidhañhi ekaṭṭhaṃ pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sahajekaṭṭhañca. Pahānekaṭṭhaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhipamukhāhi tesaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi saha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.118) yāva sotāpattimaggena pahānā, tāva ekasmiṃ puggale ṭhitāti attho. Idamidhādhippetaṃ. Dasasu hi kilesesu idha diṭṭhikilesoyeva āgato. Sesesu pana apāyagamanīyo lobho doso moho māno vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti nava kilesā diṭṭhiyā saha pahānekaṭṭhā hutvā sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, rāgadosamohapamukhesu vā diyaḍḍhesu kilesasahassesu sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhiyā pahīyamānāya diṭṭhiyā saha apāyagamanīyā sabbakilesā pahānekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, sahajekaṭṭhe diṭṭhiyā saha ekasmiṃ citte ṭhitāti attho. Sotāpattimaggena hi dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttaasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti, dvīsu diṭṭhisampayuttasasaṅkhārikacittesu pahīyamānesu tehi sahajāto lobho moho thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime kilesā sahajekaṭṭhavasena pahīyanti. Oḷārike kileseti oḷārikabhūte kāmarāgabyāpāde. Anusahagate kileseti sukhumabhūte kāmarāgabyāpāde. Sabbakileseti maggattayena pahīnāvasese.
“策励精进”的意思是:瑜伽行者让精进运转起来。前面说的“寻求”“获得”“一味”“习行”这些词,是为了显示各种修习之间的差别,才说“如是所成的修习”。而这里说的“以不超越那些生起之法为义,以诸根一味为义,以推动随顺的精进为义,以习行为义”,是为了显示修习的因,才说“由这个因和那个因而有修习”。前面是从不同刹那的角度说“习行修习”,这里则是从同一刹那的角度说“以习行之义为修习”,这就是差别所在。“见色而修习”等句中,意思是以应当见色的方式去见色等,从而修习应当修习的修习。“成为一味”:是以解脱味,或者以作用味而成为一味。解脱味就是成就味。因为说过“由作用成就之义而称为味”。巴利
Vīriyaṃ vāhetīti yogāvacaro vīriyaṃ pavatteti. Heṭṭhā esanāpaṭilābhaekarasaāsevanavacanāni bhāvanānaṃ visesadassanatthaṃ vuttāni ‘‘evaṃbhūtā ca bhāvanā’’ti. Idha ‘‘tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena āsevanaṭṭhenā’’ti vacanāni bhāvanāhetudassanatthaṃ vuttāni ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca hetunā bhāvanā’’ti. Heṭṭhā āsevanābhāvanāti nānākkhaṇavasena vuttā, idha āsevanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti ekakkhaṇavasenāti viseso. Rūpaṃ passanto bhāvetītiādīsu rūpādīni passitabbākārena passanto bhāvetabbaṃ bhāvanaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Ekarasā hontīti vimuttirasena, kiccarasena vā ekarasā honti. Vimuttirasoti sampattiraso. Kiccasampattiatthena raso nāma pavuccatīti hi vuttanti.
应证得解说注释巴利
Sacchikātabbaniddesavaṇṇanā
29 在“应证得”的解说中,以证得和亲证的方式,说了十种增一法的解答。其中,“不动心解脱”是指阿拉汉果的解脱。它不会被动摇、不会变动、不会退失,所以叫“不动”;又因为心已经从一切烦恼中解脱,所以叫“心解脱”。“明”是指三种明。“解脱”按《增十经》的方式是指阿拉汉果,但按《等诵经》的方式则说“解脱有两种:心的胜解和涅槃”。在这里,八种等至因为完全从五盖等烦恼中解脱,所以叫解脱;涅槃因为从一切有为法中解脱,所以叫解脱。“三明”:能回忆过去世住处的智慧是明,能了知有情死生(死亡与再生)的智慧是明,能了知诸漏灭尽的智慧是明。以照破黑暗之义为明,以令事物被清楚认知之义也为明。也就是说,回忆宿住的智慧生起时,能照破遮蔽过去世住处的黑暗,并清楚地了知过去世住处,所以是明。了知死生的智慧能照破遮蔽死亡与结生的黑暗,并清楚地了知死与生,所以是明。了知漏尽的智慧能照破遮蔽四圣谛的黑暗,并清楚地了知四圣谛法,所以是明。“四沙门果”:即入流果、一来果、不来果、阿拉汉果。能平息并消灭恶法,所以叫沙门;沙门的境界就是沙门性。这是四种圣道的名称。沙门性的果,就是沙门果。巴利
29. Sacchikātabbaniddese dasa ekuttaravissajjanāni paṭilābhasacchikiriyāvasena vuttāni. Tattha akuppā cetovimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Sā hi na kuppati na calati na parihāyatīti akuppā, sabbakilesehi cittassa vimuttattā cetovimuttīti vuccati. Vijjāti tisso vijjā. Vimuttīti dasuttarapariyāyena arahattaphalaṃ vuttaṃ, saṅgītipariyāyena pana ‘‘vimuttīti dve vimuttiyo cittassa ca adhimutti nibbānañcā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.304) vuttaṃ. Ettha ca aṭṭha samāpattiyo nīvaraṇādīhi suṭṭhu vimuttattā vimutti nāma, nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatato vimuttattā vimutti nāma. Tisso vijjāti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ vijjā sattānaṃ cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ vijjā āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ vijjā. Tamavijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇañhi uppajjamānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ chādetvā ṭhitaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, pubbenivāsañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, cutūpapātañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ catusaccacchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, catusaccadhamme ca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cattāri sāmaññaphalānīti sotāpattiphalaṃ, sakadāgāmiphalaṃ, anāgāmiphalaṃ, arahattaphalaṃ. Pāpadhamme sameti vināsetīti samaṇo, samaṇassa bhāvo sāmaññaṃ. Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Sāmaññassa phalāni sāmaññaphalāni.
五法蕴:戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴、解脱蕴、解脱知见蕴。法蕴的意思是法的分类、法的组成部分。戒蕴等也同样这样理解。世间的戒、定、慧和出世间的戒、定、慧,本身就是戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴。断除解脱、止息解脱、出离解脱,本身就是解脱蕴。对解脱的三种省察,本身就是解脱知见蕴。而这个解脱知见蕴只是世间的。以了知之义就是知,以照见之义就是见,所以叫知见;对解脱的知见,就称为解脱知见。至于镇伏解脱和彼分解脱,则已经包含在定蕴和慧蕴里面了。这五种法蕴,对有学的人来说是有学的,对无学的人来说是无学的。在这些法蕴当中,世间的法蕴和出离解脱,既不是有学的也不是无学的。虽然它们可以属于有学的人,但就说“这些是有学的人的”,所以称为有学的;属于无学的人,就说“这些是无学的人的”,所以称为无学的。至于“具足有学的解脱蕴”这句话,应当理解为以出离解脱为所缘的方式而具足。六通:就是六种更殊胜的智慧。是哪六种呢?神变智、天耳界智、宿住随念智、他心智、天眼智、漏尽智,就是这六种。巴利
Pañca dhammakkhandhāti sīlakkhandho, samādhikkhandho, paññākkhandho, vimuttikkhandho, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. Dhammakkhandhāti dhammavibhāgā dhammakoṭṭhāsā. Sīlakkhandhādīsupi eseva nayo. Lokiyalokuttarā sīlasamādhipaññā eva sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā . Samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttiyo eva vimuttikkhandho. Tividhā vimuttipaccavekkhaṇā eva vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandho. So lokiyo eva. Jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇameva dassanaṭṭhena dassananti ñāṇadassanaṃ, vimuttīnaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ vimuttiñāṇadassananti vuccati. Vikkhambhanatadaṅgavimuttiyo pana samādhipaññākkhandheheva saṅgahitā. Ime pañca dhammakkhandhā sekkhānaṃ sekkhā, asekkhānaṃ asekkhāti vuttā. Etesu hi lokiyā ca nissaraṇavimutti ca nevasekkhānāsekkhā. Sekkhā hontāpi sekkhānaṃ ime iti sekkhā, asekkhānaṃ ime iti asekkhāti vuccanti. ‘‘Sekkhena vimuttikkhandhena samannāgato hotī’’ti ettha pana nissaraṇavimuttiyā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena samannāgatoti veditabbo. Cha abhiññāti cha adhikāni ñāṇāni. Katamā cha? Iddhividhañāṇaṃ , dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ, cetopariyañāṇaṃ, dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti imā cha.
七种漏尽者的力量。诸漏已灭尽,所以叫漏尽者;漏尽者所具有的力量,就是漏尽者的力量。是哪七种呢?世尊已经说过——巴利
Satta khīṇāsavabalānīti khīṇā āsavā assāti khīṇāsavo, khīṇāsavassa balāni khīṇāsavabalāni. Katamāni satta? Vuttāni bhagavatā –
比丘们,在这里,一位漏已尽的比丘,以正慧如实善见一切行都是无常的。比丘们,一位漏已尽的比丘,以正慧如实善见一切行都是无常的,这本身就是漏已尽比丘的一种力。依靠这种力,漏已尽的比丘能宣称诸漏已尽:我的诸漏已尽。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aniccato sabbe saṅkhārā yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti, idampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānāti ‘khīṇā me āsavā’ti.
比丘们,再者,漏尽比丘以正慧如实地善见“诸欲如同火炭坑”。比丘们……(中略)……这也是漏尽比丘的一种力。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno aṅgārakāsūpamā kāmāti yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhā honti. Yampi, bhikkhave…pe… idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti…pe….
再者,比丘们,漏尽比丘的心倾向于远离,朝向远离,偏向远离,安住于远离,乐于出离,完全摆脱了一切能令烦恼生起之法。比丘们……(中略)……这也是漏尽比丘的一种力。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno vivekaninnaṃ cittaṃ hoti vivekapoṇaṃ vivekapabbhāraṃ vivekaṭṭhaṃ nekkhammābhirataṃ byantībhūtaṃ sabbaso āsavaṭṭhāniyehi dhammehi. Yampi, bhikkhave…pe… idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti…pe….
比丘们,再者,漏尽比丘已修习四念处,且善加修习;已修习五根,且善加修习;已修习七觉支,且善加修习;已修习圣八支道,且善加修习。比丘们,漏尽比丘已修习、善加修习圣八支道,这也是漏尽比丘的一种力。正是依靠这种力,漏尽比丘才能宣称:我的诸漏已尽。巴利
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Pañcindriyāni bhāvitāni honti subhāvitāni. Satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā honti subhāvitā. Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito. Yampi, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvito hoti subhāvito, idampi khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno balaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma khīṇāsavo bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayaṃ paṭijānāti ‘khīṇā me āsavā’’’ti (a. ni. 10.90; dī. ni. 3.357; paṭi. ma. 2.44).
在这里,通过第一种力,说明了苦圣谛的通达;通过第二种力,说明了集圣谛的通达;通过第三种力,说明了灭圣谛的通达;通过四种力,说明了道圣谛的通达。巴利
Tattha paṭhamena balena dukkhasaccapaṭivedho, dutiyena samudayasaccapaṭivedho, tatiyena nirodhasaccapaṭivedho, catūhi maggasaccapaṭivedho pakāsito hoti.
八解脱:因为能对所缘生起胜解,又能彻底从敌对法中解脱出来,所以叫解脱。哪八种呢?有色身的人看见各种色,这是第一种解脱。内无色想者看见外色,这是第二种解脱。一心胜解于清净,这是第三种解脱。完全超越色想,灭除对抗想,不再作意种种差别想,进入“虚空无边”的空无边处并安住其中,这是第四种解脱。完全超越空无边处,进入“识无边”的识无边处并安住其中,这是第五种解脱。完全超越识无边处,进入“无所有”的无所有处并安住其中,这是第六种解脱。完全超越无所有处,进入非想非非想处并安住其中,这是第七种解脱。完全超越非想非非想处,进入想受灭定并安住其中,这是第八种解脱。巴利
Aṭṭha vimokkhāti ārammaṇe adhimuccanaṭṭhena paccanīkadhammehi ca suṭṭhu muccanaṭṭhena vimokkhā. ‘‘Katame aṭṭha? Rūpī rūpāni passati, ayaṃ paṭhamo vimokkho. Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī bahiddhā rūpāni passati, ayaṃ dutiyo vimokkho. ‘Subha’nteva adhimutto hoti, ayaṃ tatiyo vimokkho. Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamā nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā ‘ananto ākāso’ti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ catuttho vimokkho. Sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’nti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ pañcamo vimokkho. Sabbaso viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samatikkamma ‘natthi kiñcī’ti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ chaṭṭho vimokkho. Sabbaso ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ sattamo vimokkho. Sabbaso nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samatikkamma saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayaṃ aṭṭhamo vimokkho’’ti (dī. ni. 2.174; 3.358; a. ni. 8.66).
九种次第灭,就是九种按顺序渐次灭尽。哪九种呢?入初禅时,欲想已灭;入第二禅时,寻与伺已灭;入第三禅时,喜已灭;入第四禅时,入出息已灭;入空无边处时,色想已灭;入识无边处时,空无边处想已灭;入无所有处时,识无边处想已灭;入非想非非想处时,无所有处想已灭;入想受灭定时,想与受都已灭。巴利
Nava anupubbanirodhāti nava anupaṭipāṭiyā nirodhā. ‘‘Katame nava? Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa kāmasaññā niruddhā hoti, dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa vitakkavicārā niruddhā honti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa pīti niruddhā hoti, catutthaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassa assāsapassāsā niruddhā honti, ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa rūpasaññā niruddhā hoti, viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ākāsānañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpannassa ākiñcaññāyatanasaññā niruddhā hoti, saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassa saññā ca vedanā ca niruddhā hontī’’ti (a. ni. 9.31; dī. ni. 3.344, 359).
十无学法:因为再没有需要修学的地方,所以不再修学,因此叫无学。或者说,在三学中还在修学的人叫有学,已经达到修学圆满的有学就叫无学,也就是阿拉汉。这些法属于无学者,所以叫无学法。“哪十种呢?无学正见、无学正思惟、无学正语、无学正业、无学正命、无学正精进、无学正念、无学正定、无学正智、无学正解脱。”无学正智是指除了阿拉汉果智以外,其余的一切世间智慧。正解脱是指阿拉汉果的解脱。不过义注里这样说:巴利
Dasa asekkhā dhammāti upari sikkhitabbābhāvato na sikkhantīti asekkhā. Atha vā tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhantīti sekkhā, vuddhippattā sekkhāti asekkhā, arahanto. Asekkhānaṃ ime iti asekkhā. ‘‘Katame dasa? Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇaṃ, asekkhā sammāvimuttī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360). Asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇanti arahattaphalapaññaṃ ṭhapetvā sesalokiyapaññā. Sammāvimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348) pana vuttaṃ –
无学正见等所有这些法,都是与果相应的法。在这里,正见和正智这两处说的都是慧。而“正解脱”这个词,则涵盖了其余所说的、属于果定的那些法。巴利
‘‘Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhītiādayo sabbepi phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhi sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā. Sammāvimuttīti iminā pana padena vuttāvasesā phalasamāpattidhammā saṅgahitā’’ti.
比丘们,在“一切法都应被亲证”这类说法里,应当理解为“以所缘来亲证”。在“正在见色者,就是在亲证”这类说法里,是指:以可被见的方式去见色等世间法时,他就是在以所缘亲证的方式亲证那些色等法;或者,以可被见的方式去见色等法时,他通过这个因由,亲证了应当被亲证的涅槃。因为研究字义的人认为,“见者”这个词也可以表示“因”的意思。至于“未知当知根”等出世间法,则是在以省察的方式见它们时,就是在以所缘亲证的方式亲证它们。“以究竟义亲证不死之深处的涅槃”,这一句是直截了当的,因为涅槃属于应遍知、应断、应亲证、应修这四类法中的应亲证一类。“凡是已被亲证的法,就是已被触达的法”,这是说:以所缘亲证而亲证的法,是被所缘之触所触达;以获得亲证而亲证的法,是被获得之触所触达。巴利
Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, sacchikātabbantiādīsu ārammaṇasacchikiriyā veditabbā. Rūpaṃ passanto sacchikarotītiādīsu rūpādīni lokiyāni passitabbākārena passanto tāneva rūpādīni ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikaroti, rūpādīni vā passitabbākārena passanto tena hetunā sacchikātabbaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. Passantoti hi padaṃ hetuatthepi akkharacintakā icchanti. Anaññātaññassāmītindriyādīni pana lokuttarāni paccavekkhaṇavasena passanto tāneva ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikaroti. ‘‘Amatogadhaṃ nibbānaṃ pariyosānaṭṭhena sacchikarotī’’ti idaṃ pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbesu sacchikātabbattā ujukameva. Ye ye dhammā sacchikatā honti, te te dhammā phassitā hontīti ārammaṇasacchikiriyāya sacchikatā ārammaṇaphassena phuṭṭhā honti, paṭilābhasacchikiriyāya sacchikatā paṭilābhaphassena phuṭṭhā hontīti.
退分四法的注释巴利
Hānabhāgiyacatukkaniddesavaṇṇanā
30 30. 现在,因为退分性等只是每一种定依状态差别而有,所以退分四法作为一类来解说。其中,初禅的获得者就是初禅的证得者。这里是在“拥有”的意义上使用这个词。有得到、即证悟的人,就称为获得者。在与欲俱行中,这里的俱行一词是指所缘的意义,也就是以事欲和烦恼欲为所缘。想与作意指速行想和那时的转向作意,理解为与想相应的作意也可以。现行的意思是转起。法指初禅法。从禅那退失的人,由三种原因退失:烦恼现行、不适当的行为、或不勤加行。由烦恼现行而退失的人,退失得快;由乐著于工作、乐著于谈话、乐著于睡眠、乐著于聚会等不适当的行为而退失的人,退失得慢;由于疾病等资具不具足等障碍,不能经常证入,由不勤加行而退失的人,也退失得慢。但这里为了显示强力的原因,只说了烦恼现行。然而,从二禅等退失的人,也会由于生起对更低禅那的欣求现行而退失。怎样才算已退失?当不能证入时,就算已退失。彼随法性:随顺的法就是随法,这是对以禅那为增上而生起的欣求法的异名。随法本身就是随法性,对彼禅那的随法性,就是彼随法性。念指欣求。安住指确立。意思是:随顺彼初禅的欣求在转起。与无寻俱行指以二禅为所缘。因为那里没有寻,所以称为无寻。与厌离俱行指以观为所缘。因为它对诸行厌患,所以称为厌离。经中说:厌患者离贪。与离贪相连指与圣道相连接的观。因为观达到顶点时,会导向道的出起。因此,以观为所缘的想与作意,称为与离贪相连。经中说:由离贪而解脱。巴利
30. Idāni yasmā hānabhāgiyāditā ekekasseva samādhissa avatthābhedena hoti, tasmā hānabhāgiyacatukkaṃ ekatoyeva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhinti paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhino . Sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Lābho sacchikiriyā assa atthīti lābhīti vuccati. Kāmasahagatāti ettha sahagatasaddassa ārammaṇattho adhippeto, vatthukāmakilesakāmārammaṇāti attho. Saññāmanasikārāti javanasaññā ca tadāvajjanamanasikāro ca, saññāsampayuttamanasikāropi vaṭṭati. Samudācarantīti pavattanti. Dhammoti paṭhamajjhānadhammo. Jhānā parihāyanto tīhi kāraṇehi parihāyati kilesasamudācārena vā asappāyakiriyāya vā ananuyogena vā. Kilesasamudācārena parihāyanto sīghaṃ parihāyati, kammārāmatābhassārāmatāniddārāmatāsaṅgaṇikārāmatānuyogavasena asappāyakiriyāya parihāyanto dandhaṃ parihāyati, gelaññapaccayavekallādinā palibodhena abhikkhaṇaṃ asamāpajjanto ananuyogena parihāyantopi dandhaṃ parihāyati. Idha pana balavakāraṇameva dassento kilesasamudācāramevāha. Dutiyajjhānādīhi pana parihāyanto heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānanikantisamudācārenapi parihāyati. Kittāvatā parihīno hotīti? Yadā na sakkoti samāpajjituṃ, ettāvatā parihīno hotīti. Tadanudhammatāti anupavatto dhammo anudhammo, jhānaṃ adhikaṃ katvā pavattassa nikantidhammassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Anudhammo eva anudhammatā, tassa jhānassa anudhammatā tadanudhammatā. Satīti nikanti. Santiṭṭhatīti patiṭṭhāti . Taṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ anuvattamānā nikanti pavattatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avitakkasahagatāti dutiyajjhānārammaṇā. Tañhi natthettha vitakkoti avitakkanti vuccati. Nibbidāsahagatāti vipassanārammaṇā. Sā hi saṅkhāresu nibbindanato nibbidāti vuccati. ‘‘Nibbindaṃ virajjatī’’ti (mahāva. 23; saṃ. ni. 3.61) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgūpasaṃhitāti ariyamaggapaṭisaññuttā vipassanā. Vipassanā hi sikhāppattā maggavuṭṭhānaṃ pāpeti. Tasmā vipassanārammaṇā saññāmanasikārā ‘‘virāgūpasaṃhitā’’ti vuccanti, ‘‘virāgā vimuccatī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
与寻俱行:以寻为依,以初禅为所缘。与舍乐俱行:以中舍性和乐受为依,以第三禅为所缘。与喜乐俱行:以喜和乐受为依,以第二禅为所缘。与不苦不乐俱行:以舍受为依,以第四禅为所缘。那个受既不是苦也不是乐,所以称为不苦不乐。这里的“m”字母是按连声规则说出来的。与色俱行:以色界禅那为所缘。对于住在非想非非想处的人,虽然存在退分、住分、抉择分,但因为不存在胜分,所以没有解说非想非非想处。而且,这一切世间定,对于放逸而住、根器迟钝的人,是退分;对于不放逸而住、根器迟钝的人,是住分;对于渴爱行者、根器锐利的人,是胜分;对于见行者、根器锐利的人,是抉择分。巴利
Vitakkasahagatāti vitakkavasena paṭhamajjhānārammaṇā. Upekkhāsukhasahagatāti tatramajjhattupekkhāya ca sukhavedanāya ca vasena tatiyajjhānārammaṇā. Pītisukhasahagatāti pītiyā ca sukhavedanāya ca vasena dutiyajjhānārammaṇā. Adukkhamasukhasahagatāti upekkhāvedanāvasena catutthajjhānārammaṇā. Sā hi vedanā na dukkhā na sukhāti adukkhamasukhāti vuccati , ma-kāro panettha padasandhivasena vutto. Rūpasahagatāti rūpajjhānārammaṇā. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatane ṭhitassa hānabhāgiyaṭhitibhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyattesu vijjamānesupi visesabhāgiyattābhāvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ na niddiṭṭhaṃ. Sabbopi cesa lokiyo samādhi pamādavihārissa mudindriyassa hānabhāgiyo hoti, appamādavihārissa mudindriyassa ṭhitibhāgiyo hoti, taṇhācaritassa tikkhindriyassa visesabhāgiyo hoti, diṭṭhicaritassa tikkhindriyassa nibbedhabhāgiyo hotīti vuccati.
相三法解说注释巴利
Lakkhaṇattikaniddesavaṇṇanā
31 31. 现在,因为每一个世间法都被三法印所贯穿,所以把相论(三法印的分类)合在一起统一解说。其中,无常,是以灭尽之义来说明的:就是在各处,由于有坏灭的性质,所以是无常。有些人说:“因为具有灭尽的性质、衰败的性质、离贪的性质、止息的性质,所以是无常。”苦,是以怖畏之义来说明的:由于有令人恐惧的性质,所以是苦。凡是无常的,就会带来怖畏,就像《师子譬喻经》(相应部尼柯耶3.78)中对诸天神所说的那样。有些人说:“以生、老、病、死的怖畏之义为苦。”无我,是以无坚实之义来说明的:对于被设想为“我是住者、作者、受者、自在者”的那种自我之坚实,因为不存在,所以是无我。凡是无常、苦的,连自身的无常性或生灭逼迫都维持不了,哪里还能有作者等身份呢?经中也这样说:“诸比丘!如果这色是我,这色就不该导致疾病”等等。有些人说:“因为缺乏我之坚实与常之坚实,所以是无我。”巴利
31. Idāni yasmā ekekopi lokiyadhammo tilakkhaṇabbhāhato, tasmā lakkhaṇattikaṃ ekato niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenāti tattha tattheva khīyanabhāvena aniccaṃ. ‘‘Khayadhammattā, vayadhammattā, virāgadhammattā, nirodhadhammattā anicca’’nti eke. Dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhenāti sappaṭibhayatāya dukkhaṃ. Yañhi aniccaṃ, taṃ bhayāvahaṃ hoti sīhopamasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.78) devānaṃ viya. ‘‘Jātijarābyādhimaraṇabhayaṭṭhena dukkha’’nti eke. Anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti ‘‘attā nivāsī kārako vedako sayaṃvasī’’ti evaṃ parikappitassa attasārassa abhāvena anattā. Yañhi aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ attanopi aniccataṃ vā udayabbayapīḷanaṃ vā dhāretuṃ na sakkoti, kuto tassa kārakādibhāvo. Vuttañca ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa, nayidaṃ rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvatteyyā’’tiādi (mahāva. 20). ‘‘Attasāraniccasāravirahitattā anattā’’ti eke.
苦圣谛解说的注释巴利
Dukkhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
四圣谛也是因为诸谛在真实义上相互关联,所以被合在一起解说。其中的“彼彼”,是指在四圣谛之中。“什么”是想要解说而提出的问题。“苦圣谛”是指出所问的法。在“生也是苦”等句子中,“生”这个词先被说明了有多种含义。正如所说:巴利
Ariyasaccacatukkampi tathaṭṭhena saccānaṃ ekasambandhattā ekato eva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Tattha tatthāti tesu catūsu ariyasaccesu. Katamanti kathetukamyatāpucchā . Dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti pucchitadhammanidassanaṃ. Tattha jātipi dukkhātiādīsu jātisaddassa tāva aneke atthā paveditā. Yathāha –
“ 有、族、类,及戒、施设、相;
分娩与结生,此等皆说为生之义。”巴利
‘‘Bhavo kulaṃ nikāyo ca, sīlaṃ paññatti lakkhaṇaṃ; Pasūti sandhi cevāti, jātiatthā paveditā’’.
同样地,在“一生、二生”等说法中,这里的“生”是指“有”。在“不因出身而被呵责、被讥嫌”中,是指家族。在“毗舍佉,有称为尼干陀的一类沙门”中,是指部类。在“姊妹,我从圣生以来,不曾了知”中,是指圣戒。在“有一种叫横生草的种类,从脐生出,触到天空而停住”中,是指施设。在“生由二蕴所摄”中,是指有为相。在“阿难,菩萨刚刚诞生”中,是指出生。在“缘有而有生”以及“生也是苦”中,这里是间接指结生蕴。而直接来说,则是指在各处正在出生的众生,他们各自诸蕴的初次显现。巴利
Tathā hissa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 12) bhavo attho. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakkuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.331) ettha kulaṃ. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāyo. ‘‘Yatohaṃ, bhagini, ariyāya jātiyā jāto nābhijānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.351) ettha ariyasīlaṃ. ‘‘Tiriyā nāma tiṇajāti nābhiyā uggantvā nabhaṃ āhacca ṭhitā ahosī’’ti (a. ni. 5.196) ettha paññatti. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūti. ‘‘Bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti (vibha. 354) ca ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.33; vibha. 190) ca ettha pariyāyato paṭisandhikhandhā. Nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhāvo.
那么,为什么“生”是苦呢?因为它是一切众多苦的依托之处。苦有很多种,比如:苦苦、变易苦、行苦、隐蔽苦、非隐蔽苦、间接苦、直接苦。其中,身体的苦受和心的苦受,无论从自性上看还是从名称上看都是苦,所以叫苦苦。乐受因为会变坏而成为产生苦的原因,所以叫变易苦。舍受以及其余三界的一切有为法,因为被生灭逼迫,所以叫行苦。像耳痛、牙痛、因贪而生的热恼、因嗔而生的热恼等身心疾病,需要询问才能知道,而且病因不明显,所以叫隐蔽苦。由三十二种刑罚等所引起的疾病,不用询问就能知道,而且病因明显,所以叫非隐蔽苦。除了苦苦之外,其余在《苦谛分别》中所说的“生”等一切,因为都是各种苦的依托之处,所以叫间接苦。而苦苦,则叫直接苦。巴利
Kasmā panesā jāti dukkhāti ce? Anekesaṃ dukkhānaṃ vatthubhāvato. Anekāni hi dukkhāni. Seyyathidaṃ – dukkhadukkhaṃ, vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ, saṅkhāradukkhaṃ, paṭicchannadukkhaṃ, appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ , pariyāyadukkhaṃ, nippariyāyadukkhanti. Ettha kāyikacetasikā dukkhā vedanāsabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā dukkhadukkhanti vuccati. Sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmena dukkhuppattihetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhāvedanā ceva avasesā ca tebhūmakasaṅkhārā udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ. Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosajapariḷāhādi kāyikacetasiko ābādho pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvato paṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvato appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesaṃ dukkhasaccavibhaṅge (vibha. 190 ādayo) āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvato pariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pana nippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati.
这里说的“生”,就是世尊在《愚人智者经》等经里用譬喻说明的恶趣之苦,以及即使在善趣的人间,以入胎等为根本而生起的苦;因为它是这些苦的所依处,所以是苦。这里,以入胎等为根本的苦是这样的:这个有情在母胎中受生时,并不是受生在青莲、红莲、白莲等地方,而是在胃的下方、熟脏的上方、腹膜、脊椎与脊椎棘之间,一个极其狭窄、极其黑暗的地方;那里弥漫着各种腐尸般的臭气,极其恶臭的气流在其中流动;在这极其可厌的子宫部位,他就像生在腐鱼、腐粥、粪坑等处的蛆虫一样。他在那里受生之后,整整十个月,被母胎所生的热力像烤陶器一样烤着,像面团一样被蒸着,不能弯曲,不能伸展,极度地感受着苦。这就是以入胎为根本的苦。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā. Tatridaṃ gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ – ayañhi satto mātukucchimhi nibbattamāno na uppalapadumapuṇḍarīkādīsu nibbattati, atha kho heṭṭhā āmāsayassa upari pakkāsayassa udarapaṭalapiṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ vemajjhe paramasambādhe tibbandhakāre nānākuṇapagandhaparibhāvitaparamaduggandhapavanavicarite adhimattajegucche kucchippadese pūtimacchapūtikummāsacandanikādīsu kimi viya nibbattati. So tattha nibbatto dasa māse mātukucchisambhavena usmanā puṭapākaṃ viya paccamāno piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya sediyamāno samiñjanapasāraṇādivirahito adhimattaṃ dukkhaṃ paccanubhotīti. Idaṃ tāva gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲突然踉跄、行走、坐下、起身、翻身等时,他就像落在醉汉手里的山羊,又像落在捕蛇人手里的幼蛇,被拽拉、拖扯、摇晃、抖动等种种动作弄得极度受苦。母亲喝冷水时,他就像堕入了寒地狱;母亲吞下热粥、饭食等时,他就像被炭火雨撒满全身;母亲咽下咸、酸等食物时,他就像遭受碱水、刀割等刑罚一样,极度受苦。这就是以护胎为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana so mātu sahasā upakkhalanagamananisīdanauṭṭhānaparivattanādīsu surādhuttahatthagato eḷako viya ahituṇḍikahatthagato sappapotako viya ca ākaḍḍhanaparikaḍḍhanaodhunananiddhunanādinā upakkamena adhimattaṃ dukkhamanubhoti, yañca mātu sītudakapānakāle sītanarakūpapanno viya uṇhayāgubhattādiajjhoharaṇakāle aṅgāravuṭṭhisamparikiṇṇo viya loṇambilādiajjhoharaṇakāle khārāpatacchikādikammakāraṇappatto viya adhimattaṃ dukkhamanubhoti. Idaṃ gabbhapariharaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
当母亲胎位不正时,在连亲友、熟人等都不该看到的痛苦部位,胎儿被切割、剖开等操作弄得感受着苦。这就是以胎位不正为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ panassa mūḷhagabbhāya mātuyā mittāmaccasuhajjādīhipi adassanārahe dukkhuppattiṭṭhāne chedanaphālanādīhi dukkhamanubhavati. Idaṃ gabbhavipattimūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
母亲正在分娩时,胎儿被业力所生的风翻转,被送进像地狱悬崖一样极其恐怖的产道,受到极度狭窄的产门挤压,就像被从钥匙孔里硬拽出来一样,又像大龙象或地狱众生被众合山碾碎一样,这时生起的苦。这就是以分娩为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ vijāyamānāya mātuyā kammajehi vātehi parivattetvā narakappapātaṃ viya atibhayānakaṃ yonimaggaṃ paṭipādiyamānassa paramasambādhena ca yonimukhena tāḷacchiggaḷena viya nikaḍḍhiyamānassa mahānāgassa narakasattassa viya ca saṅghātapabbatehi vicuṇṇiyamānassa dukkhamuppajjati. Idaṃ vijāyanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
然而,对于刚出生的婴儿,身体像新鲜创口一样娇嫩,在被人抱持、沐浴、冲洗、用布擦拭等时候,会生起像针尖和刀锋刺穿、劈裂一样的痛苦。这就是以离开母胎为根本的苦。巴利
Yaṃ pana jātassa taruṇavaṇasadisassa sukumārasarīrassa hatthagahaṇanhāpanadhovanacoḷaparimajjanādikāle sūcimukhakhuradhārāvijjhanaphālanasadisaṃ dukkhamuppajjati. Idaṃ mātukucchito bahi nikkhamanamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
此后,在生命延续的过程中,自己折磨自己:以裸形外道等戒行,投入自我炙烤与自我折磨的修行;或因愤怒而绝食,或上吊自缢。这时生起的苦,就是以自己为根源的苦。巴利
Yaṃ tato paraṃ pavattiyaṃ attanāva attānaṃ vadhentassa acelakavatādivasena ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogamanuyuttassa kodhavasena abhuñjantassa ubbandhantassa ca dukkhaṃ hoti. Idaṃ attupakkamamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ.
而当一个人被他人杀害、捆绑等时生起的苦,这就是以他人加害为根源的苦。这样一来,这一切苦的依处,正是这个“生”。因此这样说:巴利
Yaṃ pana parato vadhabandhanādīni anubhavantassa uppajjati. Idaṃ parūpakkamamūlakaṃdukkhanti. Iti imassa sabbassāpi dukkhassa ayaṃ jāti vatthumeva hoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
如果众生不投生到地狱里,那里那些烈火焚烧等等无法忍受的苦就不会发生;
苦能在哪里得到立足处呢?牟尼在此就生而说:这是苦。
畜生道中苦种种,
鞭笞杖击刺棒等所生。
那生如何会在那里存在呢?
除了那里,从那里受生也是苦。
在饿鬼道里,则有饥渴之苦。
风、热、火等所生的种种。
于未生处既无苦,
是故牟尼说生苦。
浓黑暗处、难忍严寒之中,
凡诸世间间隙、阿修罗众所受之苦——
彼处无有,亦无有生;
此生既起,由彼亦苦。
犹如在粪尿地狱中,众生久住母胎,
久居之后,方出于外。
即使达至极可怖之苦,若无生,此亦无;
生本身即是苦。
“ 说那么多有什么用?难道在任何地方不都是
这里确实有某种苦,有时会出现;
无生则无(苦),是故大仙
最初说此:生是苦。”巴利
‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto, tatthaggidāhādikamappasayhaṃ; Labhetha dukkhaṃ nu kuhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ, iccāha dukkhāti munīdha jātiṃ. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatoda- Daṇḍābhighātādibhavaṃ anekaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ kathaṃ tattha bhaveyya jātiṃ, Vinā tahiṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsā- Vātātapādippabhavaṃ vicittaṃ; Yasmā ajātassa na tattha atthi, Tasmāpi dukkhaṃ muni jātimāha. ‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayhasīte, Lokantare yaṃ asuresu dukkhaṃ; Na taṃ bhave tattha na cassa jāti, Yato ayaṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātugabbhe, Satto vasaṃ ciramato bahi nikkhamañca; Pappoti dukkhamatighoramidampi natthi, Jātiṃ vinā itipi jāti ayañhi dukkhā. ‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci, Atthīdha kiñcidapi dukkhamidaṃ kadāci; Nevatthi jātivirahe yadato mahesī, Dukkhāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ imamāha jāti’’nti.
老也是苦。这里的老有两种:一种是有为相,另一种是在相续中、属于同一个有的诸蕴变旧的状态,也就是通常说的牙齿脱落等。这里指的就是后者。这种老之所以是苦,既因为它是行苦,也因为它是苦的所依。正如肢节松弛、诸根变异丑陋、青春毁坏、力量损毁、念慧离去、遭他人轻蔑等多种因缘所生的身心之苦生起时,老是其依处。因此这样说道:巴利
Jarāpi dukkhāti ettha duvidhā jarā saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhapurāṇabhāvo ca. Sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā dukkhā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca. Yaṃ hidaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasithilībhāvaindriyavikāravirūpatā yobbanavināsabalūpaghātasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekappaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
因为肢体变得松弛,感官功能也发生衰变;
青春消逝,体力衰败。
远离自己的儿女妻等亲人;
既因令人难生净信,更因转增愚痴。
“ 凡人会遭遇身苦和心苦,两者都是如此。
这一切都以老为因,所以老就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilībhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato; Yobbanassa vināsena, balassa upaghātato. ‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano; Appasādanīyato ceva, bhiyyo bālattapattiyā. ‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā; Sabbametaṃ jarāhetu, yasmā tasmā jarā dukhā’’ti.
在讲完老苦之后,接着本该讲病苦,但因为在讲身苦的时候就已经把病苦包含进去了,所以这里没有再单独说,这一点应该知道。巴利
Jarādukkhānantaraṃ byādhidukkhe vattabbepi kāyikadukkhagahaṇeneva byādhidukkhaṃ gahitaṃ hotīti na vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“死也是苦”这句话里,死有两种:一种是有为相,经里说的“老死由两种蕴所含摄”(《界论》71)就是指这个。另一种是在一期生命之内所摄的生命根相续的断灭,经里说的“因为恒常有死的威胁,所以有怖畏”(《经集》581)就是指这个。这里要说的正是后一种。依生缘而有的死、横死、自性死、寿尽死、福尽死,这些也都是它的名字。另外,这里还应当知道有另一种分类:刹那死、概念死、断灭死。在生命流转过程中,色法和名法的坏灭,就叫刹那死。“帝须死了”“普萨死了”这种说法,因为从究竟义上讲并没有真实的有情存在,所以叫概念死;“庄稼死了”“树死了”这种说法,因为其中没有命根,也叫概念死。诸漏尽者不再结生的寿尽,叫断灭死。除了纯粹外在的概念死之外,其余的概念死和断灭死,都已经被前面所说的相续断灭所含摄了。又因为死是苦生起的所依,所以它本身就是苦。因此这样说:巴利
Maraṇampi dukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ – saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581). Taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Puna khaṇikamaraṇaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ samucchedamaraṇanti ayampettha bhedo veditabbo. Pavatte rūpārūpadhammānaṃ bhedo khaṇikamaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti idaṃ paramatthato sattassa abhāvā, ‘‘sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho mato’’ti idaṃ jīvitindriyassa abhāvā sammutimaraṇaṃ nāma. Khīṇāsavassa appaṭisandhikā kālakiriyā samucchedamaraṇaṃ nāma. Bāhirakaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā itaraṃ sammutimaraṇañca samucchedamaraṇañca yathāvuttapabandhavicchedeneva saṅgahitaṃ. Dukkhassa pana vatthubhāvato dukkhaṃ. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
恶人见到恶业等相,
善人堪忍所爱别离。
临终者所受之苦,心无分别;
一切众生亦复如是,乃至关节筋腱断截等苦。
要害被刺,身苦即生;
“ 此苦难忍,无方可救,其性本然。
死亡这件事本身就是苦,所以才会说死就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādinimittamanupassato; Bhaddassāpasahantassa, viyogaṃ piyavatthukaṃ; Mīyamānassa yaṃ dukkhaṃ, mānasaṃ avisesato. ‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhibandhanacchedanādikaṃ; Vitujjamānamammānaṃ , hoti dukkhaṃ sarīrajaṃ. ‘‘Asayhamappaṭikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato; Maraṇaṃ vatthu tenetaṃ, dukkhamicceva bhāsita’’nti.
在愁等诸苦当中,“愁”是指被亲友遭难等事触动后,内心以向内郁结忧思为特征的心热恼。而“苦”则是从苦苦的角度,以及从作为苦之依据的角度来说的。因此这样说:巴利
Sokādīsu soko nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa antonijjhānalakkhaṇo cittasantāpo. Dukkho pana dukkhadukkhato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
众生的心被忧愁刺穿,就像被毒箭射中一样。
就像被火烧着的箭,又像糠秕一样燃烧。
“ 它带来疾病,还有衰老、死亡与毁灭;
因为苦也是种种的,所以就叫它苦。”巴利
‘‘Sattānaṃ hadayaṃ soko, visasallaṃva tujjati; Aggitattova nārāco, bhusaṃva dahate puna. ‘‘Samāvahati byādhiñca, jarāmaraṇabhedanaṃ; Dukkhampi vividhaṃ yasmā, tasmā dukkhoti vuccatī’’ti.
所谓悲泣,就是当人遭遇亲属死亡等不幸时,嘴里发出的哀叹哭诉。而苦,则因为它是行苦的性质,又是苦的所依之处。因此这样说:巴利
Paridevo nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa vacīpalāpo. Dukkho pana saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato dukkhavatthuto ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 被忧箭射中的人一边哭泣哀号,喉咙、嘴唇、上颚和舌头干得受不了;
他只会得到越来越多的苦,所以世尊说悲叹就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Yaṃ sokasallavihato paridevamāno, kaṇṭhoṭṭhatālutalasosajamappasayhaṃ; Bhiyyodhimattamadhigacchatiyeva dukkhaṃ, dukkhoti tena bhagavā paridevamāhā’’ti.
所谓苦,就是以逼迫身体为特相的身苦。而苦又从苦苦以及能带来心苦的角度来说。因此这样说:巴利
Dukkhaṃ nāma kāyapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ kāyikadukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhadukkhato mānasadukkhāvahanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 此身的苦逼迫此身,且更生起心苦;
由此之故,特说名为苦。”巴利
‘‘Pīḷeti kāyikamidaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhañca mānasaṃ bhiyyo; Janayati yasmā tasmā, dukkhanti visesato vutta’’nti.
所谓“忧”,就是以逼迫心为特征的心苦。而“苦”则是从苦苦的意义上说的,也是因为它能带来身体上的苦。被心苦所逼的人,确实会散开头发哭泣,捶打胸口,翻来滚去,辗转反侧,倒立扑地,拿刀,服毒,用绳子上吊,跳进火里,感受种种不同的痛苦。因此说:巴利
Domanassaṃ nāma cittapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ mānasaṃ dukkhaṃ. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhadukkhato kāyikadukkhāvahanato ca. Cetodukkhasamappitā hi kese pakiriya kandanti, urāni paṭipisanti, āvaṭṭanti, vivaṭṭanti, uddhaṃpādaṃ papatanti, satthaṃ āharanti, visaṃ khādanti, rajjuyā ubbandhanti, aggiṃ pavisantīti nānappakārakaṃ dukkhamanubhavanti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 因为它逼迫心,同时给身体带来压迫;
忧就是苦,因此离忧者们说它为苦。”巴利
‘‘Pīḷeti yato cittaṃ, kāyassa ca pīḷanaṃ samāvahati; Dukkhanti domanassaṃ, vidomanassā tato āhū’’ti.
所谓恼,就是当人遭遇亲属离散等不幸时,由极重的内心痛苦所生起的嗔。有些人说,它是属于行蕴的一个法。而苦,则是从行苦的状态、内心的灼烧以及身体的萎靡来说的。因此这样说——巴利
Upāyāso nāma ñātibyasanādīhi phuṭṭhassa adhimattacetodukkhappabhāvito dosoyeva. ‘‘Saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpanno eko dhammo’’ti eke. Dukkho pana saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato cittaparidahanato kāyavisādanato ca. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 心的极度燃烧,以及身体的极度消瘦;
因为恼能生起苦,所以它被称为苦。”巴利
‘‘Cittassa ca paridahanā, kāyassa visādanā ca adhimattaṃ; Yaṃ dukkhamupāyāso, janeti dukkho tato vutto’’ti.
在这里,愁就像用小火在容器里煮东西;悲就像用猛火煮时,东西从容器里溢出来;恼则像溢出来之后剩下的部分,再也溢不出去,只能在容器里一直煮到耗尽。应当这样理解。巴利
Ettha ca mandagginā antobhājane pāko viya soko, tikkhagginā paccamānassa bhājanato bahinikkhamanaṃ viya paridevo, bahinikkhantāvasesassa nikkhamitumpi appahontassa antobhājaneyeva yāva parikkhayā pāko viya upāyāso daṭṭhabbo.
怨憎会,就是与不可爱的众生和诸行聚在一起。而它是苦,则是因为它是苦的所依。因此这样说:巴利
Appiyasampayogo nāma appiyehi sattasaṅkhārehi samodhānaṃ. Dukkho pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
一看到不喜欢的事物,心里立刻就生出苦;
然后,由那努力所生的,就在这里,从这个身体。
“ 由彼,二苦之依处故,大仙说非爱会为苦,
应如是知。”巴利
‘‘Disvāva appiye dukkhaṃ, paṭhamaṃ hoti cetasi; Tadupakkamasambhūtamatha kāye yato idha. ‘‘Tato dukkhadvayassāpi, vatthuto so mahesinā; Dukkho vuttoti viññeyyo, appiyehi samāgamo’’ti.
所谓爱别离,就是与所爱的众生诸行分离。从苦的立足点来说,它确实是苦。因此这样说:巴利
Piyavippayogo nāma piyehi sattasaṅkhārehi vinābhāvo. Dukkho pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 和亲人、财富等分开时,他们被忧愁之箭射中,痛苦不堪;
愚人们因此把与所爱者分离视为苦。”巴利
‘‘Ñātidhanādiviyogā , sokasarasamappitā vitujjanti; Bālā yato tatoyaṃ, dukkhoti mato piyaviyogo’’ti.
在未得所求之时,对得不到的东西生起欲求,所谓“求而不得,那也是苦”,说的就是这个。意思是:一个人怀着欲求去追求某个得不到的东西,结果得不到,那么这种对得不到的东西的欲求本身就是苦。而苦,是就它作为苦的所在来说的。因此这样说:巴利
Icchitālābhe alabbhaneyyavatthūsu icchāva yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkhanti vuttā. Yenapi dhammena alabbhaneyyaṃ vatthuṃ icchanto na labhati, tampi alabbhaneyyavatthumhi icchanaṃ dukkhanti attho. Dukkhaṃ pana dukkhavatthuto. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
对于那些渴求各种事物的人来说,因为得不到这个那个;
众生在这里生起的,是由忧恼所成的苦。
“ 对得不到的东西的渴求,就是那苦的成因。
因此,胜者说:求不得就是苦。”巴利
‘‘Taṃ taṃ patthayamānānaṃ, tassa tassa alābhato; Yaṃ vighātamayaṃ dukkhaṃ, sattānaṃ idha jāyati. ‘‘Alabbhaneyyavatthūnaṃ, patthanā tassa kāraṇaṃ; Yasmā tasmā jino dukkhaṃ, icchitālābhamabravī’’ti.
在“简而言之,五取蕴”这句话里,“简而言之”是就开示而说的。因为苦没办法被概括成“就这么几百种苦”或者“就这么几千种苦”,但开示却可以概括。所以,为了把开示收摄起来,他这样说:“所谓的苦,不是别的什么,简而言之,五取蕴就是苦。”“五”是数量上的限定。“取蕴”就是取的活动范围——诸蕴。巴利
Saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhāti ettha pana saṅkhittenāti desanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dukkhañhi ettakāni dukkhasatānīti vā ettakāni dukkhasahassānīti vā saṅkhipituṃ na sakkā, desanā pana sakkā. Tasmā ‘‘dukkhaṃ nāma na aññaṃ kiñci, saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti desanaṃ saṅkhipanto evamāha. Pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo. Upādānakkhandhāti upādānagocarā khandhā.
从生为首诸苦,如来于此已说;
凡未说者,离此则无。
因为如此,简略来说,这些就是取蕴。
这些取蕴被宣说苦之尽头的大仙称为“苦”。巴利
Jātippabhutikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ vuttamidha tādinā; Avuttaṃ yañca taṃ sabbaṃ, vinā etena vijjati. Yasmā tasmā upādānakkhandhā saṅkhepato ime; Dukkhāti vuttā dukkhanta-desakena mahesinā.
就像火依靠柴薪,靶子招来箭矢,牛身招来牛虻蚊蚋之类,田地招来收割的人,村庄招来劫村的人一样,生等种种苦也正是以各种方式逼迫这五取蕴;它们就像大地上的草藤之类,像树上的花、果、嫩叶一样,只在这五取蕴当中生起。五取蕴最初的苦是生,中间的苦是老,最终的苦是死;被临死的苦逼迫而产生的灼烧般的苦,是愁;因为承受不住而哭喊的苦,是悲;由于被称为界扰动的不可意触境和合,身体所受的病痛之苦,是苦;被这种病痛折磨的凡夫对此生起抗拒,内心受到逼恼之苦,是忧;因为愁等不断增长而心生悲伤、哀叹之苦,是恼;愿望受到阻碍、所求得不到满足之苦,是求不得。这样从种种方面来考察,五取蕴本身就是苦。如果要一个一个地详细说明,即使经过许多劫也说不完;世尊为了把这一切苦总摄在五取蕴中显示出来,就像一滴水含藏整个大海水的味道一样,所以长老说:略说五取蕴是苦。巴利
Tathā hi indhanamiva pāvako, lakkhamiva paharaṇāni, gorūpaṃ viya ḍaṃsamakasādayo, khettamiva lāyakā, gāmaṃ viya gāmaghātakā, upādānakkhandhapañcakameva jātiādayo nānappakārehi vibādhentā tiṇalatādīni viya bhūmiyaṃ, pupphaphalapallavāni viya rukkhesu upādānakkhandhesuyeva nibbattanti. Upādānakkhandhānañca ādidukkhaṃ jāti, majjhedukkhaṃ jarā, pariyosānadukkhaṃ maraṇaṃ, māraṇantikadukkhābhighātena pariḍayhanadukkhaṃ soko , tadasahanato lālappanadukkhaṃ paridevo, tato dhātukkhobhasaṅkhātaaniṭṭhaphoṭṭhabbasamāyogato kāyassa ābādhanadukkhaṃ dukkhaṃ, tena ābādhiyamānānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ tattha paṭighuppattito cetobādhanadukkhaṃ domanassaṃ, sokādivuddhiyā janitavisādānaṃ anutthunanadukkhaṃ upāyāso, manorathavighātappattānaṃ icchāvighātadukkhaṃ icchitālābhoti evaṃ nānappakārato upaparikkhiyamānā upādānakkhandhāva dukkhāti yadetaṃ ekamekaṃ dassetvā vuccamānaṃ anekehipi kappehi na sakkā anavasesato vattuṃ, taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ekajalabindumhi sakalasamuddajalarasaṃ viya yesu kesuci pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti bhagavatā vuttameva thero avocāti.
在这里,“生”等词的详细解释中,“在那里”是指在苦谛解说中所说的“生”等。“那些众生的”是从总体上对众多众生的概括说明。如果只说“提婆达多的生、索玛达达的生”,这样即使整天讲说,也不能穷尽一切众生,也不能成就其余含义的完整说明;但用这两句话,就没有任何一个众生被遗漏,没有任何一种含义不能成就。“在彼彼”是依趣处和生类,对众多众生群体的概括说明。“有情众”是指有情的群体、有情的聚合、有情的集合。“生”是就出生而言,这是显示其自性的词。“生起”是就完全出生而言,这个词因加上前缀而扩展了。“入胎”是就进入而言。或者,以出生的含义称为“生”,这是就诸处尚未圆满而说的;以完全出生的含义称为“生起”,这是就诸处已经圆满而说的;以进入的含义称为“入胎”,这是就卵生和胎生而说的。因为它们进入卵壳和胎膜,进入时就像执取结生一样。以再生的含义称为“再生”,这是就湿生和化生而说的,因为它们显现而出生。以上是世俗的说法。巴利
Tattha katamā jātītiādīsu padabhājanīyesu tatthāti dukkhasaccaniddese vuttesu jātiādīsu. Yā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānanti saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Yā devadattassa jāti, yā somadattassa jātīti evañhi divasampi kathiyamāne neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti, na sabbaṃ aparatthadīpanaṃ sijjhati, imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti, na kiñci aparatthadīpanaṃ na sijjhati. Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ sattanikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sattānaṃ nikāye, sattaghaṭāyaṃ sattasamūheti attho. Jātīti jāyanavasena. Idamettha sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Sañjātīti sañjāyanavasena. Upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Okkantīti okkamanavasena. Jāyanaṭṭhena vā jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena vuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena vuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena vuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca okkamanti, okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena vuttā. Te hi pākaṭā eva hutvā nibbattanti, ayaṃ tāva sammutikathā.
现在要讲的是诸蕴的显现和诸处的获得,这是胜义层面的解说。因为在胜义上,只有诸蕴在显现,而不是有情在显现。这里说的“诸蕴”,要理解为:在一蕴有中取一个蕴,在四蕴有中取四个蕴,在五蕴有中取五个蕴。“显现”就是生起。“诸处”要理解为按照各处生起的方式来做归类。“获得”就是在相续中的显现本身。因为那些正在显现的,才叫作获得。这就叫作“生”——这个就被称为生。巴利
Idāni khandhānaṃ pātubhāvo, āyatanānaṃ paṭilābhoti paramatthakathā hoti. Khandhā eva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na sattā. Ettha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa, catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ, pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccati jātīti ayaṃ jāti nāma kathīyati.
在解释“老”时,“老”是指它的自性;“衰老性”是指它的表现方式。“齿落”等三种,是从时间推移的角度说明它的作用;最后两种,是从本来状态的角度说明。这里,“老”这个词是从自性上显示的,所以这是它的自性特征。“衰老性”是从表现方式上显示的,所以这是它的表现方式说明。“齿落”等,是通过时间推移导致牙齿、指甲损坏的作用来说明。“发白”是通过使头发、体毛变白的作用来说明。“皮皱”是通过使肌肉萎缩、皮肤起皱的作用来说明。所以这三种是从时间推移说明作用。通过这些变化显露出来,就显示出明显的老。就像水、风、火或者草木等,因为冲毁、破坏或者烧毁,使旧路显露出来,但那条旧路并不是那些水等本身。同样,老通过牙齿等的齿落等方式显示出它的踪迹,即使睁开眼睛也能看到,但齿落等并不是老本身。因为老不是眼识所能认知的。巴利
Jarāniddese jarāti sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā, pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassā idaṃ sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato, tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tace valibhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ sambhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati, na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
“寿的衰减”和“诸根的成熟”这两句所说的,是这样一种本性:它只有在时间推移之后才显现出来,名为寿尽,以及眼等诸根的成熟。因此应当知道,这是对两种本性的解说。其中,人到衰老阶段,寿命便会衰减,所以以果代因,把老称为“寿的衰减”。又因为年轻时眼等诸根极为清净,连细微的所缘也能轻松地把握,而一到衰老阶段,诸根则变得成熟、混乱、不清明,连粗大的所缘也无法把握,所以同样以果代因,把老称为“诸根的成熟”。巴利
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattāya āyukkhayacakkhādiindriyaparipākasaṅkhātāya pakatiyā dīpitā, tenassime dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā. Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’ti phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
这种老,按照上面所说的那样,也分为两种:显露的老和隐藏的老。其中,在牙齿等色法上能看出缺损、脱落等状态,所以色法中的老叫“显露老”。而在无色法上,因为看不到那种变异,所以叫“隐藏老”。不过,那种能看到的缺损、脱落状态,其实只是那些牙齿等的颜色罢了。用眼睛看到之后,再通过意门去思惟:“这些牙齿已经被老击坏了”,这样才了知老。就像看着绑在水里的牛角等物,从而知道下面有水的存在一样。再者,这种老还可以分为有间老和无间老两种。其中,在摩尼宝珠、黄金、白银、珊瑚、月亮、太阳等上面,以及在只有十岁等短寿的有情身上,还有在花、果、嫩叶等非有情物上,因为中间那些颜色变化等很难辨认,所以这种老叫“无间老”,意思是不间断的老。而在那些之外的其他上述情况中,因为中间那些颜色变化等很容易辨认,所以这种老叫“有间老”。巴利
Sā panesā evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti. Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍādibhāvadassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma. Arūpadhammesu pana jarā tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tatra yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ vaṇṇoyeva. Taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti, udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosiṅgādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvajānanaṃ viya. Puna ayaṃ jarā savīci avīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇikanakarajatapavāḷacandasūriyādīnaṃ mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya, pupphaphalapallavādīsu apāṇīnaṃ viya ca antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ dubbiññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāma.
在这里,“有间老”应当从执取与非执取两方面来理解:幼童最先长出的是乳齿,它们并不坚固。乳齿脱落后,又会再长出牙齿。这些新牙最初是白色的,等到被老之风击中时,就变成黑色。头发最初是红褐色的,之后变黑,再后来变白。皮肤则带血色。随着不断生长,白色的事物显现为白色,黑色的事物显现为黑色。但被老之风击中时,就会生出皱纹。一切谷物在播种时都是白色的,之后变绿,被老之风击中时则变黄。用芒果嫩芽也可以说明这一点。巴利
Tattha savīcijarā upādiṇṇakaanupādiṇṇakavasena evaṃ veditabbā – daharakumārakānañhi paṭhamameva khīradantā nāma uṭṭhahanti, na te thirā. Tesu pana patitesu puna dantā uṭṭhahanti. Te paṭhamameva setā honti, jarāvātena pahaṭakāle kāḷakā honti. Kesā paṭhamameva tambā honti, tato kāḷakā, tato setā. Chavi pana salohitikā hoti. Vaḍḍhantānaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ odātānaṃ odātabhāvo, kāḷakānaṃ kāḷakabhāvo paññāyati. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle valiṃ gaṇhāti. Sabbampi sassaṃ vapitakāle setaṃ hoti, pacchā nīlaṃ. Jarāvātena pana pahaṭakāle paṇḍukaṃ hoti. Ambaṅkurenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
在解释“死”时,说“死没”是就命终离去的层面来说的。这是对一蕴、四蕴、五蕴的统称。“死没性”是用状态词来显示它的特征。“坏灭”是说明将死诸蕴的崩坏。“消失”是说明将死诸蕴就像破了的瓶子一样,无论如何都不再存在。“死神之死”是指被称为死神的死,不是刹那生灭的死。“时”就是终结者,它的作用叫“寿尽”。到这里,已经说明了世俗意义上的死。巴利
Maraṇaniddese cutīti cavanavasena vuttaṃ. Ekacatupañcakkhandhānaṃ sāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ. Bhedoti cutikhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭassa viya bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyāti kālakiriyā. Ettāvatā ca sammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpitaṃ.
现在,为了从胜义的角度来说明,所以接着说了“诸蕴的坏灭”等话。因为从胜义来看,坏灭的只是诸蕴,并没有任何一个叫“有情”的东西在死去。不过,当诸蕴正在坏灭时,就说“有情死了”;诸蕴已经坏灭时,就说“已死”,这只是世俗的说法。在这里,应当理解为:依四蕴有和五蕴有来说,是“诸蕴的坏灭”;依一蕴有来说,是“弃舍尸体”;或者依四蕴有来说,是“诸蕴的坏灭”,依其余两种有来说,是“弃舍尸体”。为什么呢?因为在这两种有中,也有被称为色身的尸体存在。又因为即使在四大王天等天界,诸蕴同样在坏灭,却不会弃舍任何东西,所以依那些天界众生来说,是“诸蕴的坏灭”;而在人类等地方,则是弃舍尸体。在这里,由于有弃舍尸体这件事,所以死被称为“弃舍尸体”。巴利
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti. Ettha ca catuvokārapañcavokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo, catuvokāravasena vā khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sambhavato. Yasmā vā cātumahārājikādīsupi khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipati, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakaraṇato maraṇaṃ ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“命根的断绝”这句话是在说明:只有与根相连属的,才叫做死;不与根相连属的,就没有所谓的死。至于“谷物死了”“树死了”这种说法,只是世俗的惯用语而已;从实际意义来说,这类话只是在显示谷物等的耗尽与衰灭。巴利
Jīvitindriyassupacchedoti iminā indriyabaddhasseva maraṇaṃ nāma hoti, anindriyabaddhassa maraṇaṃ nāma natthīti dasseti. ‘‘Sassaṃ mataṃ, rukkho mato’’ti idaṃ pana vohāramattameva, atthato pana evarūpāni vacanāni sassādīnaṃ khayavayabhāvameva dīpenti.
再说,这些生、老、死,对众生来说,就像伺机下手的杀手和仇敌一样,到处寻找可乘之机。打个比方,有一个人有三个仇敌,都在找机会下手。第一个说:“我去夸赞某处森林有多好,把他带到那里,这对我来说一点也不难。”第二个说:“等你把他带到那里,我把他打一顿,让他虚弱不堪,这对我来说一点也不难。”第三个说:“等你把他打得虚弱了,我用利剑砍下他的头,这就是我的活儿。”他们这样商量好之后,就真的照做了。其中,第一个仇敌夸赞森林、把人带到那里,就好比把人从亲友圈子里拽出来,让他投生到某个地方——这就是“生”的作用;第二个仇敌把人打至虚弱,就好比落在已经生起的诸蕴上,让他变得依赖他人、只能卧床——这就是“老”的作用;第三个仇敌用利剑砍头,就好比让寿命终结——这就是“死”的作用。应当这样理解。巴利
Apica imāni jātijarāmaraṇāni nāma imesaṃ sattānaṃ vadhakapaccāmittā viya otāraṃ gavesantāni vicaranti. Yathā hi purisassa tīsu paccāmittesu otārāpekkhesu vicarantesu eko vadeyya ‘‘ahaṃ asukaaraññassa nāma vaṇṇaṃ kathetvā etaṃ ādāya tattha gamissāmi, ettha mayhaṃ dukkaraṃ natthī’’ti. Dutiyo vadeyya ‘‘ahaṃ tava etaṃ gahetvā gatakāle pothetvā dubbalaṃ karissāmi, ettha mayhaṃ dukkaraṃ natthī’’ti. Tatiyo vadeyya ‘‘tayā etasmiṃ pothetvā dubbale kate tiṇhena asinā sīsacchedanaṃ nāma mayhaṃ bhāro hotū’’ti te evaṃ vatvā tathā kareyyuṃ. Tattha paṭhamapaccāmittassa araññavaṇṇaṃ kathetvā taṃ ādāya tattha gatakālo viya suhajjañātimaṇḍalato nikkaḍḍhitvā yattha katthaci nibbattāpanaṃ nāma jātiyā kiccaṃ, dutiyassa pothetvā dubbalakaraṇaṃ viya nibbattakkhandhesu nipatitvā parādhīnamañcaparāyaṇabhāvakaraṇaṃ jarāya kiccaṃ, tatiyassa tiṇhena asinā sīsacchedanaṃ viya jīvitakkhayapāpanaṃ maraṇassa kiccanti veditabbaṃ.
另外,在这里应当把生苦看作进入充满危险的大旷野;把老苦看作在那旷野中没有饮食而虚弱无力;把死苦看作那虚弱者在行走活动时气力尽失,被猛兽等加害而陷入灾祸。巴利
Apicettha jātidukkhaṃ sādīnavamahākantārappaveso viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, jarādukkhaṃ tattha annapānarahitassa dubbalaṃ viya, maraṇadukkhaṃ dubbalassa iriyāpathapavattane vihataparakkamassa vāḷādīhi anayabyasanāpādanaṃ viya daṭṭhabbanti.
在解释“忧”时,“viyasati”就是毁坏的意思;“毁坏”指舍弃、摧毁利益和安乐。亲族的毁坏就是“亲族灾祸”,意思是亲族因为盗贼、疾病、恐惧等而耗尽、消亡。被这种亲族灾祸所触,就是被覆盖、被压倒、被具有。其余几项也按同样的方式理解。但这里有一个不同之处:财富的毁坏就是“财富灾祸”,意思是财富因为国王、盗贼等而耗尽、丧失。疾病本身就是灾祸,所以叫“病灾祸”,因为疾病毁坏、破坏健康,所以是灾祸。戒的毁坏就是“戒灾祸”,这是对无道德状态的称呼。正在破坏正见而生起的见本身就是灾祸,叫“见灾祸”。在这里,前两种灾祸是未完成的,后三种是已完成的,并且被三相所逼恼。前三种既不是善也不是不善,而戒灾祸和见灾祸这两种则是不善。巴利
Sokaniddese viyasatīti byasanaṃ, hitasukhaṃ khipati viddhaṃsetīti attho. Ñātīnaṃ byasanaṃ ñātibyasanaṃ, corarogabhayādīhi ñātikkhayo ñātivināsoti attho. Tena ñātibyasanena. Phuṭṭhassāti ajjhotthaṭassa abhibhūtassa, samannāgatassāti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ bhogabyasanaṃ, rājacorādivasena bhogakkhayo bhogavināsoti attho. Rogoyeva byasanaṃ rogabyasanaṃ. Rogo hi ārogyaṃ viyasati vināsetīti byasanaṃ. Sīlassa byasanaṃ sīlabyasanaṃ. Dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhi eva byasanaṃ diṭṭhibyasanaṃ. Ettha ca purimāni dve anipphannāni, pacchimāni tīṇi nipphannāni tilakkhaṇabbhāhatāni. Purimāni ca tīṇi neva kusalāni na akusalāni, sīladiṭṭhibyasanadvayaṃ akusalaṃ.
“以某一种”是指:在已经发生的各种灾祸中,比如朋友、同伴等遭遇的灾祸,无论是哪一种;或者在尚未发生的灾祸中,无论以任何方式。所谓“具足”,是指被它跟随、缠住而无法脱身。“以某一种苦法”是指任何一种能引生忧的苦因。“忧”就是因忧愁而成为忧。这是由那些原因所生起的忧的自性本身。“忧愁”是忧愁的样子。“忧愁的状态”就是忧愁的存在状态。“内忧”就是内在的忧。第二个词因为加上前缀而语气加强。因为这种忧生起时,好像把内在烤干、彻底烤干一样,所以称为“内忧、内枯”。“心的焦灼”是心焦灼的样子。因为忧生起时,就像火一样烧心、灼心,让人说出“我的心被烧了,我什么都想不起来了”。“忧心”就是痛苦的心,它的状态就是忧。由于随入之义,忧本身就是箭,所以称为“忧箭”。巴利
Aññataraññatarenāti gahitesu vā yena kenaci aggahitesu vā mittāmaccabyasanādīsu yena kenaci. Samannāgatassāti samanubandhassa aparimuccamānassa. Aññataraññatarena dukkhadhammenāti yena kenaci sokadukkhassa uppattihetunā. Sokoti socanakavasena soko. Idaṃ tehi kāraṇehi uppajjanakasokassa sabhāvapaccattaṃ. Socanāti socanākāro. Socitattanti socitabhāvo. Antosokoti abbhantarasoko. Dutiyapadaṃ upasaggena vaḍḍhitaṃ. So hi abbhantaraṃ sukkhāpento viya parisukkhāpento viya uppajjatīti ‘‘antosoko antoparisoko’’ti vuccati. Cetaso parijjhāyanāti cittassa parijjhāyanākāro. Soko hi uppajjamāno aggi viya cittaṃ jhāpeti dahati, ‘‘cittaṃ me jhāmaṃ, na me kiñci paṭibhātī’’ti vadāpeti. Dukkhito mano dummano, tassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena sokova sallanti sokasallaṃ.
在解释“悲叹”时,人们这样反复喊“我的女儿,我的儿子”,一边喊一边哭,所以叫“哀号”。反复称赞、描述这个那个的样子,一边说一边哭,所以叫“悲叹”。接下来两组两个词,都是按照前面两组那样,从行相和状态的角度来说明的。“语”就是言语。“空话”就是空洞、没有意义的话。因为话说一半、说错等等而变成不正的话,就是“乱说”。“喃喃”就是一再地说。“喃喃的方式”就是喃喃性。“已喃喃的状态”就是喃喃状态。巴利
Paridevaniddese ‘‘mayhaṃ dhītā, mayhaṃ putto’’ti evaṃ ādissa ādissa devanti rodanti etenāti ādevo. Taṃ taṃ vaṇṇaṃ parikittetvā parikittetvā devanti etenāti paridevo. Tato parāni dve dve padāni purimadvayasseva ākārabhāvaniddesavasena vuttāni. Vācāti vacanaṃ. Palāpoti tucchaṃ niratthakavacanaṃ. Upaḍḍhabhaṇitaaññabhaṇitādivasena virūpo palāpoti vippalāpo. Lālappoti punappunaṃ lapanaṃ. Lālappanākāro lālappanā. Lālappitassa bhāvo lālappitattaṃ.
在解释“苦”的时候,因为它是依止于身体的,所以是“身苦”。以非甜为含义,所以是“不可意”。“身”这个词排除了心理上的不可意,“不可意”这个词排除了身体上的可意。那本身就在逼迫、折磨,所以叫“苦”,意思是:它让生起它的那个人陷入苦。或者,仅仅因为它本身就是苦,所以叫“苦”。“身触所生”,就是从身触生起的。不可意、苦的感受,就是不可意的感受而不是可意的,是苦的感受而不是乐的感受。后面这三个词是按阴性词性来说的。不可意的受不是可意的受,苦的受不是乐的受——这里的意思就是这样。那身体的、不可意的、苦的感受,那从身触生起的不可意、苦的受——这就叫作“苦”。应当这样连接来理解。巴利
Dukkhaniddese kāyanissitattā kāyikaṃ. Amadhuraṭṭhena asātaṃ. Kāyikapadena cetasikaasātaṃ paṭikkhipati, asātapadena kāyikasātaṃ. Tadeva dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ dukkhitaṃ karotīti attho. Dukkhamattā vā dukkhaṃ. Kāyasamphassajanti kāyasamphasse jātaṃ. Asātaṃ dukkhaṃ vedayitanti asātaṃ vedayitaṃ na sātaṃ, dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ na sukhaṃ. Parato tīṇi padāni itthiliṅgavasena vuttāni. Asātā vedanā na sātā, dukkhā vedanā na sukhāti ayameva panettha attho. Yaṃ kāyikaṃ asātaṃ dukkhaṃ vedayitaṃ, yā kāyasamphassajā asātā dukkhā vedanā, idaṃ vuccati dukkhanti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
在解说“忧”时,“意恶”就是心被败坏,或者说,因为感受低劣,心是卑劣的,所以叫“意恶”。“意恶”的状态就是“忧”。因为它依止于心,所以是“心所”。 “心触所生”,就是从心触而生起的。巴利
Domanassaniddese duṭṭhu manoti dummano, hīnavedanattā vā kucchitaṃ manoti dummano, dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Cittanissitattā cetasikaṃ. Cetosamphassajanti cittasamphasse jātaṃ.
在解释“恼”时,以疲惫为含义,所以叫“恼”。这是指心陷入消沉、沮丧状态时所产生的疲惫,这就是它的名称。强烈的疲惫,就是“大恼”。被疲惫所困的状态,就是“恼性”。被大恼所困的状态,就是“大恼性”。巴利
Upāyāsaniddese āyāsanaṭṭhena āyāso. Saṃsīdanavisīdanākārappavattassa cittakilamathassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Balavaāyāso upāyāso. Āyāsitabhāvo āyāsitattaṃ. Upāyāsitabhāvo upāyāsitattaṃ.
在解释“怨憎会”时,“此处”指的就是这个世界。“他所有的”就是“他拥有的那些”。“不可爱”是指不是自己主动寻求的。不管是不是主动寻求,这都只是对不讨人喜欢的所缘的一种叫法。它们在心中不讨喜、进不去心,所以叫“不可喜”。它们在心里不被喜欢,或者说不让心增长,所以叫“不可意”。“色”等等,是在说明它们的本性。想要无利的人,就是“想无利的人”。想要无益的人,就是“想无益的人”。想要不安乐、想要苦住的人,就是“想不安乐的人”。他们不希望众生得到由四种轭带来的安稳、无畏、脱离轮回,反而希望众生处在有怖畏的轮回里,所以叫“想非离轭安稳的人”。另外,因为不希望信等增长这种利益,反而希望信等退减这种无利,所以叫“想无利的人”。因为不希望得到作为信等之方法的利益,反而希望得到作为信等退减之方法的无益,所以叫“想无益的人”。因为不希望得到安乐住,反而希望得到不安乐住,所以叫“想不安乐的人”。因为不希望任何人得到无畏,反而希望得到怖畏,所以叫“想非离轭安稳的人”。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Appiyasampayoganiddese idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Yassāti ye assa. Aniṭṭhāti apariyesitā. Pariyesitā vā hontu apariyesitā vā, nāmamevetaṃ amanāpārammaṇānaṃ. Manasmiṃ na kamanti na pavisantīti akantā. Manasmiṃ na appiyanti, na vā manaṃ vaḍḍhentīti amanāpā. Rūpātiādi tesaṃ sabhāvanidassanaṃ. Anatthaṃ kāmenti icchantīti anatthakāmā. Ahitaṃ kāmenti icchantīti ahitakāmā. Aphāsuṃ dukkhavihāraṃ kāmenti icchantīti aphāsukāmā. Catūhi yogehi khemaṃ nibbhayaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ na kāmenti, sabhayaṃ vaṭṭameva nesaṃ kāmenti icchantīti ayogakkhemakāmā. Apica saddhādīnaṃ vuddhisaṅkhātassa atthassa akāmanato, tesaṃyeva hānisaṅkhātassa anatthassa ca kāmanato anatthakāmā. Saddhādīnaṃyeva upāyabhūtassa hitassa akāmanato, saddhāhāniādīnaṃ upāyabhūtassa ahitassa ca kāmanato ahitakāmā. Phāsuvihārassa akāmanato, aphāsuvihārassa ca kāmanato aphāsukāmā. Yassa kassaci nibbhayassa akāmanato, bhayassa ca kāmanato ayogakkhemakāmāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“会合”是指去了之后结合在一起。“来会”是指和来的人结合在一起。“共处”是指在站立、坐下等情况下共同在一起。“和合”是指一切事务一起做。这是按有情来说的。如果按诸行来说,那么凡能得到的,就应当采用它。然而,那个“怨憎会”从实质上说并不是单独存在的一个法,只是因为它是与怨憎会合者的两种苦的所依处,才被称为苦。巴利
Saṅgatīti gantvā saṃyogo. Samāgamoti āgatehi saṃyogo. Samodhānanti ṭhānanisajjādīsu sahabhāvo. Missībhāvoti sabbakiccānaṃ sahakaraṇaṃ. Ayaṃ sattavasena yojanā. Saṅkhāravasena pana yaṃ labbhati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ. So pana appiyasampayogo atthato eko dhammo nāma natthi, kevalaṃ appiyasampayuttānaṃ duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhoti vutto.
爱别离的解释,应当依照前面所说的相反方式来理解。这里说的“母或”等等,是为了具体说明那些属于想利益自己的人。其中,因为珍爱,所以是母亲;因为喜爱,所以是父亲。因为亲近,所以是兄弟;姊妹也是这样。因为慈爱,所以是朋友;或者因为能推心置腹,把一切秘密都放在心里,所以是朋友。在应做的事务上共同参与,所以是同僚。因为知道“这是我们的内亲”,或者因为被知晓,所以是亲戚。因为有血缘关系,所以是血亲。父方的亲戚是亲戚,母方的亲戚是血亲。或者,父母双方的亲戚是亲戚,岳父母和公婆方的亲戚是血亲。这个爱别离,从究竟意义上说也不是单独一个法,只是因为它是与所爱别离者的两种苦的所依处,所以被称为苦。以上是所有注释的说法。不过,因为诸谛具有如实相,所以用相应和分离的说法,正好特别说明了不可爱与可爱的事物,这样说也是合理的。巴利
Piyavippayoganiddeso vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo. Mātā vātiādi panettha atthakāme sarūpena dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha mamāyatīti mātā, piyāyatīti pitā. Bhajatīti bhātā, tathā bhaginī. Mettāyantīti mittā, minanti vā sabbaguyhesu anto pakkhipantīti mittā. Kiccakaraṇīyesu sahabhāvaṭṭhena amā hontīti amaccā. ‘‘Ayaṃ amhākaṃ ajjhattiko’’ti evaṃ jānanti, ñāyantīti vā ñātī. Lohitena sambandhāti sālohitā. Pitupakkhikā ñātī, mātupakkhikā sālohitā. Mātāpitupakkhikā vā ñātī, sassusasurapakkhikā sālohitā. Ayampi piyavippayogo atthato eko dhammo nāma natthi, kevalaṃ piyavippayuttānaṃ duvidhassāpi dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhoti vutto. Idamettha sabbaaṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. Saccānaṃ pana tathalakkhaṇattā sampayogavippayogavacanehi appiyapiyavatthūniyeva visesitānīti vattuṃ yujjatīti.
在解释“求不得”时,“有生法者”指具有生的性质、以生为本性的众生。“欲求生起”就是渴爱生起。“啊,但愿”是希求。“我们成为”意思是“我们将会成为”。然而,这种事并不是单靠欲求就能达到的——也就是这种心愿:“啊,但愿我们不成为有生法者,但愿生不再降临到我们身上。”这种无生的状态,存在于已断除集因的贤善者身上,也存在于已般涅槃者身上——生不再来。而这种所愿,对于有欲求的人来说,不修习道就无法达到;对于没有欲求的人来说,通过修习道也能达到。所以,它并不是单靠欲求就能得到的。“此亦”中的“亦”,是连同上面其余诸苦一起说的。巴利
Icchitālābhaniddese jātidhammānanti jātisabhāvānaṃ jātipakatikānaṃ. Icchā uppajjatīti taṇhā uppajjati. Aho vatāti patthanā. Assāmāti bhaveyyāma. Na kho panetaṃ icchāya pattabbanti yaṃ etaṃ ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāma, na ca vata no jāti āgaccheyyā’’ti evaṃ pahīnasamudayesu sādhūsu vijjamānaṃ ajātidhammattaṃ parinibbutesu ca vijjamānaṃ jātiyā anāgamanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ icchantassāpi maggabhāvanāya vinā appattabbato, anicchantassāpi ca bhāvanāya pattabbato na icchāya pattabbaṃ nāma hoti. Idampīti etampi. Upari sesāni upādāya apisaddo.
在解释取蕴时,“seyyathidaṃ”是个不变词,它的意思是“那些是哪些呢?”色本身就是取蕴,所以叫色取蕴。其余几个蕴也按同样的方式理解。巴利
Upādānakkhandhaniddese seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa te katame iti ceti attho. Rūpameva upādānakkhandhoti rūpupādānakkhandho. Eseva nayo sesesupi.
集谛的注释巴利
Samudayasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
34 在解释集谛时,“那种渴爱”指的就是这种渴爱。“后有性”是指:能造成后有,就是后有;因为具有后有的习性,所以叫后有性。另外,它能带来后有,能导向后有,能一次又一次地在生存中产生结生,所以叫后有性。不过,这种渴爱有时是后有的给予者,有时不是;有时能导向后有,有时不能;有时只是因为已经给予了结生,而在生命所依方面仅仅是异熟。即使有这三种情况,它仍然得到“后有性”这个名称。也可以读作ponabbhavikā,意思相同。“喜贪俱行”是指:与被称为欢喜的贪爱一起存在,所以叫喜贪俱行。意思是说,它在意义上与贪爱完全合为一体。“处处欢喜”是指:无论在哪里结生,就在那里欢喜。或者说,在色等所缘中处处欢喜,也就是喜欢色、喜欢声、喜欢香、喜欢味、喜欢触、喜欢法。也有读作tatra tatrābhinandī,意思是处处欢喜。Seyyathidaṃ是虚词,意思是“那是什么呢”。“欲渴爱”是指对诸欲的渴爱,这是对五种欲乐之贪的称呼。“有渴爱”是指对有(生存)的渴爱。这是指以希求生存而生起的、与常见相应的贪,以及对色界、无色界生存的贪,和对禅那的贪爱。“无有渴爱”是指对无有的渴爱。这是指与断见相应的贪。巴利
34. Samudayasaccaniddese yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā. Ponobhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punobhavo, punobhavo sīlamassāti ponobhavikā. Apica punabbhavaṃ deti, punabbhavāya saṃvattati, punappunaṃ bhave nibbattetīti ponobhavikā. Sā panesā punabbhavassa dāyikāpi atthi adāyikāpi, punabbhavāya saṃvattanikāpi atthi asaṃvattanikāpi, dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattāpi. Sā tippakārāpi ponobhavikāti nāmaṃ labhati. Ponabbhavikātipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Abhinandanasaṅkhātena nandirāgena saha gatāti nandirāgasahagatā. Nandirāgena saddhiṃ atthato ekattameva gatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatra tatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo nibbattati, tatra tatra abhinandinī. Rūpādīsu vā ārammaṇesu tatra tatrābhinandinī, rūpābhinandinī saddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammābhinandinīti attho. Tatra tatrābhinandītipi pāṭho, tatra tatra abhinandayatīti attho. Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa sā katamā iti ceti attho. Kāmataṇhāti kāme taṇhā, pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhavataṇhāti bhave taṇhā. Bhavapatthanāvasena uppannassa sassatadiṭṭhisahagatassa rāgassa rūpārūpabhavarāgassa ca jhānanikantiyā ca etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vibhavataṇhāti vibhave taṇhā. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
现在,为了详细说明那渴爱的所依处,说出了“而那个确实……”等话。其中,“生起”就是产生。“安住”是指以反复运转的方式确立下来。它生起时在哪里生起?安住时又在哪里安住?这就是它们之间的关联。“世间中可爱、可喜的色”——是指在世间中具有可爱性质和甜美性质的东西。在“眼在世间”等说法中,众生因为把眼等执为“我的”而深深执着,安住在自己的成就中,他们随着在镜子等物中取相的方式,把清净的眼净色想象成黄金天宫里敞开的宝石狮窗一样;把耳想象成银制导管或装饰的腰带绳一样;把被称为“高鼻”的鼻想象成旋转放置的雌黄圆棒一样;把舌想象成红色毛毯片,柔软、光滑、具足甘甜滋味;把身想象成沙罗树干或黄金拱门一样;把意想象成与他人之心不同、极为广大;把色想象成金色翅子树花等的颜色;把声想象成陶醉的杜鹃、夜莺柔和吹奏的宝石笛声一样;对自己所获得的、由四大生起的香等所缘,他们想:“别人谁有这样的东西?”当他们这样想时,那些眼等对他们就成了可爱、可喜的。于是,对他们来说,在那上面,未生起的渴爱生起了,已生起的则以反复运转的方式安住下来。因此,长老说:“眼在世间是可爱、可喜的,这渴爱生起时就在这里生起”等。其中,“生起时”的意思是:当它生起时,就在这里生起。巴利
Idāni tassā taṇhāya vatthuṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha uppajjatīti jāyati. Nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhāti. Uppajjamānā kattha uppajjati, nivisamānā kattha nivisatīti sambandho. Yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti yaṃ lokasmiṃ piyasabhāvañceva madhurasabhāvañca. Cakkhu loketiādīsu lokasmiñhi cakkhuādīsu mamattena abhiniviṭṭhā sattā sampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhitā attano cakkhuṃ ādāsādīsu nimittaggahaṇānusārena vippasannaṃ pañcapasādaṃ suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjaraṃ viya maññanti, sotaṃ rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya pāmaṅgasuttakaṃ viya ca maññanti, tuṅganāsāti laddhavohāraṃ ghānaṃ vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaharitālavaṭṭiṃ viya maññanti, jivhaṃ rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya mudusiniddhamadhurarasadaṃ maññanti, kāyaṃ sālalaṭṭhiṃ viya suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya ca maññanti, manaṃ aññesaṃ manena asadisaṃ uḷāraṃ maññanti, rūpaṃ suvaṇṇakaṇikārapupphādivaṇṇaṃ viya, saddaṃ mattakaravīkakokilamandadhamitamaṇivaṃsanigghosaṃ viya, attanā paṭiladdhāni catusamuṭṭhānikagandhārammaṇādīni ‘‘kassaññassa evarūpāni atthī’’ti maññanti, tesaṃ evaṃ maññamānānaṃ tāni cakkhādīni piyarūpāni ceva sātarūpāni ca honti. Atha nesaṃ tattha anuppannā ceva taṇhā uppajjati , uppannā ca punappunaṃ pavattivasena nivisati. Tasmā thero ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppajjamānāti yadā uppajjati, tadā ettha uppajjatīti attho.
灭谛的解释的注释巴利
Nirodhasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
在解释灭谛的时候,对于“那正是这渴爱”这句话,本来应该说成“那正是这苦”,但因为苦只有靠灭除集才能灭,没有别的办法。正如所说的:巴利
Nirodhasaccaniddese yo tassāyeva taṇhāyāti ettha ‘‘yo tasseva dukkhassā’’ti vattabbe yasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, no aññathā. Yathāha –
“ 就像树根没受损、还很结实,即使树被砍了,也还是会再长出来;
就是这样,当渴爱的随眠还没有被断除时,这苦就会一次又一次地生起。”巴利
‘‘Yathāpi mūle anupaddave daḷhe, chinnopi rukkho punareva rūhati; Evampi taṇhānusaye anūhate, nibbattatī dukkhamidaṃ punappuna’’nti. (dha. pa. 338);
所以,为了说明苦的灭,而要通过说明集的灭来说明它,才这样讲。如来的行为方式像狮子,他们在灭苦和显示苦灭时,都是从因上下手,而不是从果上下手。外道的行为方式则像狗,他们在灭苦和显示苦灭时,通过自我折磨的苦行以及宣说该苦行,从果上下手,而不是从因上下手。导师因为具有狮子般的行为方式,所以从因上下手,说了“yo tassāyeva”等这段话。法将舍利弗也同样按照导师所说的次第来讲。巴利
Tasmā taṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ dassento samudayanirodhena dassetuṃ evamāha. Sīhasamānavuttino hi tathāgatā, te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca dassentā hetumhi paṭipajjanti, na phale. Suvānavuttino pana aññatitthiyā , te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca dassentā attakilamathānuyogena ceva tasseva ca desanāya phale paṭipajjanti, na hetumhīti. Sīhasamānavuttitāya satthā hetumhi paṭipajjanto ‘‘yo tassāyevā’’tiādimāha. Dhammasenāpatipi satthārā vuttakkamenevāha.
在这里,“就是那渴爱”指的是:前面已经说它“能导致再生”,又按欲渴爱等分类加以区分,并按生起和安住的方式阐明过的那一种渴爱,就是那渴爱本身。“无余离贪灭尽”中,“离贪”指的是圣道,因为经上说“由离贪而解脱”。由离贪而有的灭,就是离贪灭;由于彻底拔除了随眠烦恼,所以是无余的离贪灭,即“无余离贪灭尽”。或者也可以说,“离贪”就是断除,因此无余的离贪就是无余的灭,这里应当这样理解其搭配。不过从义理上说,这些“无余离贪灭尽”等等,全都是涅槃的同义词。因为从究竟意义上说,苦灭圣谛就叫涅槃。又因为依靠涅槃,渴爱才无余地离贪、止息,所以说它是“就是那渴爱的无余离贪灭尽”。而依靠涅槃,渴爱被舍弃、被彻底放下、被解脱,不再执著;在种种欲乐的执著处中,连一丝一毫的执著也不存在,因此涅槃被称为舍弃、彻底放下、解脱、无执著。涅槃只有一个,但它的名称,相对于一切有为法的名称而言,却有许多个,比如:无余离贪、无余灭尽、舍弃、彻底放下、解脱、无执著、灭尽贪、灭尽瞋、灭尽痴、灭尽渴爱、不生起、不转起、无相、无愿、不驱使、不再结生、不再受生、不去趣、不生、不老、不病、不死、无忧、无悲泣、无苦恼、无染污等等。巴利
Tattha tassāyeva taṇhāyāti yā sā taṇhā ‘‘ponobhavikā’’ti vatvā kāmataṇhādivasena vibhattā uppattinivesanavasena ca heṭṭhā pakāsitā, tassāyeva taṇhāya. Asesavirāganirodhoti virāgo vuccati maggo, ‘‘virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.245; saṃ. ni. 3.12; mahāva. 23) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgena nirodho virāganirodho, anusayasamugghātato aseso virāganirodho asesavirāganirodho. Atha vā virāgoti hi pahānaṃ vuccati, tasmā aseso virāgo aseso nirodhoti evampettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā. Atthato pana sabbāneva panetāni asesavirāganirodhotiādīni nibbānasseva vevacanāni. Paramatthato hi dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccanti nibbānaṃ vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma taṇhā asesā virajjati nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ ‘‘tassāyeva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho’’ti vuccati. Nibbānañca āgamma taṇhā cajīyati paṭinissajjīyati muccati na allīyati, kāmaguṇālayesu cettha ekopi ālayo natthi, tasmā nibbānaṃ cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayoti vuccati. Ekameva hi nibbānaṃ, nāmāni panassa sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ nāmapaṭipakkhavasena anekāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ – asesavirāgo asesanirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo taṇhākkhayo anuppādo appavattaṃ animittaṃ appaṇihitaṃ anāyūhanaṃ appaṭisandhi anupapatti agati ajātaṃ ajaraṃ abyādhi amataṃ asokaṃ aparidevaṃ anupāyāsaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhantiādīni.
现在,为了说明那已被圣道断除、又依涅槃而不再生起的渴爱,在先前指出它生起的那些所依处中确实不存在,经文便说“sā kho panesā”(而那个……)等语。其中,譬如有人看见田里长出一株苦瓜藤,就从顶端开始追根寻底,把它砍断。那藤蔓渐渐枯萎,最终完全辨认不出。这时就可以说,那块田里的苦瓜已经灭尽、已经断除。同样,田里的苦瓜好比存在于眼等处的渴爱。这渴爱被圣道连根砍断后,依涅槃而不再生起;一旦到了这个地步,它在那些所依处中就像田里的苦瓜一样,不再显现。又譬如从林中抓来一群盗贼,在城南门处将他们处死,人们便可以说“林中的盗贼已经死了、已经被杀了”。同样,林中的盗贼好比存在于眼等处的渴爱;这些渴爱达到涅槃,正如盗贼在南门被处决,因为已在涅槃中灭尽,所以说在涅槃中灭尽。这样灭尽之后,它在那些所依处中就像林中的盗贼一样,不再显现。因此,为了表明它正是在这些处所灭去的,经文便说:“眼在世间是可爱之色、可意之色,就在这里,那渴爱被断除时便被断除”等等。或者也可以说:由于已经遍知渴爱生起的所依处,在那已被遍知的所依处中不再生起,所以从“不再生起而灭”的角度说,渴爱正是在它生起的所依处中灭去。这里,“被断除”是从与生起相对立的角度说的,“灭去”是从与执著相对立的角度说的。巴利
Idāni maggena chinnāya nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattippattāyapi ca taṇhāya yesu vatthūsu tassā uppatti dassitā, tattheva abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ sā kho panesātiādimāha. Tattha yathā puriso khette jātaṃ tittakālābuvalliṃ disvā aggato paṭṭhāya mūlaṃ pariyesitvā chindeyya, sā anupubbena milāyitvā appaññattiṃ gaccheyya, tato tasmiṃ khette tittakālābu niruddhā pahīnāti vucceyya, evameva khette tittakālābu viya cakkhādīsu taṇhā. Sā ariyamaggena mūlacchinnā nibbānaṃ āgamma appavattiṃ gacchati. Evaṃ gatā pana tesu vatthūsu khette tittakālābu viya na paññāyati. Yathā ca aṭavito core ānetvā nagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre ghāteyyuṃ, tato aṭaviyaṃ corā matāti vā māritāti vā vucceyyuṃ, evameva aṭaviyaṃ corā viya yā cakkhādīsu taṇhā, sā dakkhiṇadvāre corā viya nibbānaṃ āgamma niruddhattā nibbāne niruddhā. Evaṃ niruddhā pana tesu vatthūsu aṭaviyaṃ corā viya na paññāyati. Tenassā tattheva nirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘cakkhu loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyatī’’tiādimāha. Atha vā taṇhuppādavatthussa pariññātattā pariññātavatthusmiṃ puna na uppajjanato anuppādanirodhavasena taṇhuppādavatthusmiṃyeva nirujjhatīti vuccati. Ettha ca uppajjanapaṭipakkhavasena pahīyatīti vuttaṃ, nivisanapaṭipakkhavasena nirujjhatīti.
第4章 道谛的解说注释巴利
Maggasaccaniddesavaṇṇanā
在解释道谛时,说“就是这个”,是为了否定其他道而作出的限定(《分别论注》205)。称为“圣”,是因为它远离了各自圣道所要断除的烦恼,能成就圣者的状态,也能使证得圣果。“具有八支”,所以叫“八支的”。这八支圣道,就像四支的军队或五支的乐器一样,只是诸支分的组合而已;离开诸支分,就没有所谓的“道”。巴利
Maggasaccaniddese ayamevāti aññamaggapaṭikkhepanatthaṃ niyamanaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 205). Ariyoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā, ariyabhāvakarattā, ariyaphalapaṭilābhakarattā ca ariyo. Aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko. Svāyaṃ caturaṅgikā viya senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ viya tūriyaṃ aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthi.
现在,为了说明“道只是诸支分而已,离开诸支分就没有道”,便说出“正见……正定”等。其中,正见以正确观见为特征;正思惟以正确安立为特征;正语以正确摄持为特征;正业以正确策起为特征;正命以正确净化为特征;正精进以正确策励为特征;正念以正确安住为特征;正定以正确专注为特征。在这八支中,每一支各有三种作用。比如:正见首先断除邪见以及与自己相违的其他烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,并且如实观见相应法而没有迷惑——这是通过消除覆盖这些相应法的愚痴而实现的。正思惟等其余各支也同样断除邪思惟等,并以涅槃为所缘。不过在这里特别指出:正思惟把俱生法正确安立,正语正确摄持,正业正确策起,正命正确净化,正精进正确策励,正念正确安住,正定正确专注。巴利
Idāni aṅgamattameva maggo aṅgavinimutto natthīti dassento sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhītiādimāha. Tattha sammā dassanalakkhaṇā sammādiṭṭhi. Sammā abhiniropanalakkhaṇo sammāsaṅkappo. Sammā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Sammā samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇo sammākammanto. Sammā vodāpanalakkhaṇo sammāājīvo. Sammā paggahalakkhaṇo sammāvāyāmo. Sammā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇā sammāsati. Sammā samādhānalakkhaṇo sammāsamādhi. Tesu ekekassa tīṇi tīṇi kiccāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi tāva aññehipi attano paccanīkakilesehi saddhiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, nirodhañca ārammaṇaṃ karoti, sampayuttadhamme ca passati tappaṭicchādakamohavidhamanavasena asammohato. Sammāsaṅkappādayopi tatheva micchāsaṅkappādīni ca pajahanti, nibbānañca ārammaṇaṃ karonti. Visesato panettha sammāsaṅkappo sahajātadhamme sammā abhiniropeti, sammāvācā sammā pariggaṇhāti, sammākammanto sammā samuṭṭhāpeti, sammāājīvo sammā vodāpeti, sammāvāyāmo sammā paggaṇhāti, sammāsati sammā upaṭṭhāpeti, sammāsamādhi sammā samādahati.
此正是正见,在道前阶段是不同刹那、不同所缘的,到了道刹那则是同一刹那、同一所缘。从作用上说,它获得“苦智”等四种名称。正思惟等在道前阶段也是不同刹那、不同所缘,到了道刹那则是同一刹那、同一所缘。其中,正思惟从作用上获得“出离思惟”等三种名称。正语等三支在道前阶段既是远离也是思,但在道刹那则只是远离。正精进和正念这两者,从作用上依据四正勤和四念处而获得四种名称。至于正定,无论在道前阶段还是在道刹那,都只是正定。巴利
Apicesā sammādiṭṭhi nāma pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇā nānārammaṇā hoti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Kiccato pana ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati . Sammāsaṅkappādayopi pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇā nānārammaṇā honti, maggakāle ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Tesu sammāsaṅkappo kiccato nekkhammasaṅkappotiādīni tīṇi nāmāni labhati. Sammāvācādayo tayo pubbabhāge viratiyopi honti cetanāyopi, maggakkhaṇe pana viratiyoyeva. Sammāvāyāmo sammāsatīti idampi dvayaṃ kiccato sammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi sammāsamādhiyeva.
在这八法中,世尊之所以首先宣说正见,是因为对于为证得涅槃而修行的瑜伽行者来说,正见的帮助最大。正如《法集论》中所说,这正见被称为“慧灯、慧剑”。因此,在道前分位,以这称为观智的正见,破除无明黑暗,摧毁烦恼贼,瑜伽行者便能安稳地到达涅槃。所以,首先宣说正见。巴利
Iti imesu aṭṭhasu dhammesu bhagavatā nibbānādhigamāya paṭipannassa yogino bahūpakārattā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā. Ayañhi ‘‘paññāpajjoto paññāsattha’’nti (dha. sa. 16, 20, 29) ca vuttā. Tasmā etāya pubbabhāge vipassanāñāṇasaṅkhātāya sammādiṭṭhiyā avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā kilesacore ghātento khemena yogāvacaro nibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā.
正思惟对正见有很大的帮助,所以紧接着正见之后宣说。就像金匠用手把钱币反复翻来翻去,再用眼睛观察,就能知道“这枚是假的,这枚是真的”;同样,瑜伽行者在道前阶段,用寻思反复思量之后,再以观慧来观察,就能知道“这些法是欲界的,这些法是色界等的”。又像有人抓住树的一端,把大树反复翻转后交给木匠,木匠用斧头砍削后拿去使用;同样,瑜伽行者对经过寻思反复思量后交付的诸法,以智慧简别——“这些法是欲界的,这些法是色界等的”——然后拿去用于修行。因此,正思惟在正见之后宣说。巴利
Sammāsaṅkappo pana tassā bahūpakāro. Tasmā tadanantaraṃ vutto. Yathā hi heraññiko hatthena parivattetvā parivattetvā cakkhunā kahāpaṇaṃ olokento ‘‘ayaṃ kūṭo ayaṃ cheko’’ti jānāti, evaṃ yogāvacaropi pubbabhāge vitakkena vitakketvā vitakketvā vipassanāpaññāya olokayamāno ‘‘ime dhammā kāmāvacarā, ime rūpāvacarādayo’’ti jānāti. Yathā vā pana purisena koṭiyaṃ gahetvā parivattetvā parivattetvā dinnaṃ mahārukkhaṃ tacchako vāsiyā tacchetvā kamme upaneti, evaṃ vitakkena vitakketvā vitakketvā dinnadhamme yogāvacaro paññāya ‘‘ime dhammā kāmāvacarā, ime rūpāvacarā’’tiādinā nayena paricchinditvā kamme upaneti. Tasmā sammāsaṅkappo sammādiṭṭhānantaraṃ vutto.
这个正思惟,就像对正见有帮助一样,对正语也同样有帮助。正如经中所说:“居士,先经过寻与伺的思量,然后才开口说话。”所以,紧接着它之后,就宣说了正语。巴利
Svāyaṃ yathā sammādiṭṭhiyā, evaṃ sammāvācāyapi upakārako. Yathāha – ‘‘pubbe kho, gahapati, vitakketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṃ bhindatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463). Tasmā tadanantaraṃ sammāvācā vuttā.
因为世间人总是先在心里盘算“我要做这个、做那个”,然后用言语商量好,才动手去从事各种行业做事,所以语对身业有辅助作用。因此,在正语之后紧接着宣说正业。巴利
Yasmā pana ‘‘idañcidañca karissāmā’’ti paṭhamaṃ vācāya saṃvidahitvā loke kammante payojenti, tasmā vācā kāyakammassa upakārikāti sammāvācāya anantaraṃ sammākammanto vutto.
不过,只有断除了四种语恶行和三种身恶行、并圆满这两种善行的人,才能具足活命第八戒;不是这样的人就不能具足。因此,在正语和正业之后,接着宣说了正命。巴利
Catubbidhaṃ pana vacīduccaritaṃ, tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ pahāya ubhayaṃ sucaritaṃ pūrentasseva yasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ pūrati, na itarassa , tasmā tadubhayānantaraṃ sammāājīvo vutto.
活命已经这样清净的人,不该只以“我的活命清净了”这一点就感到满足,然后放逸懈怠地过日子;而应当在一切行住坐卧的行为举止中发起精进。为了说明这一点,紧接着就说了正精进。巴利
Evaṃ visuddhājīvena pana ‘‘parisuddho me ājīvo’’ti ettāvatā paritosaṃ katvā suttappamattena viharituṃ na yuttaṃ, atha kho sabbairiyāpathesu idaṃ vīriyamārabhitabbanti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāvāyāmo vutto.
为了说明:即使已经发起精进,也应当在身体等四种所依处上把念好好地建立起来,所以紧接着正精进之后,就说了正念。巴利
Tato āraddhavīriyenāpi kāyādīsu catūsu vatthūsu sati sūpaṭṭhitā kātabbāti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāsati vuttā.
因为,当念这样善巧地安立之后,他能先探寻有助与无助於定诸法的行相,然后使心专注于单一所缘,所以应当知道:正念之后紧接着就说了正定。巴利
Yasmā pana evaṃ sūpaṭṭhitāya satiyā samādhissa upakārānupakārānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesitvā pahoti ekattārammaṇe cittaṃ samādhātuṃ, tasmā sammāsatianantaraṃ sammāsamādhi vuttoti veditabboti.
在正见的解说里,通过“于苦有智”等说法,开示了以四圣谛为所缘的业处。其中,前二谛属于轮回流转,后二谛属于还灭。对这两组谛,比丘对流转的部分会产生投入业处的倾向,对还灭的部分则没有这种倾向。因为前二谛,也就是“五蕴是苦,渴爱是集”,无论是以简要的方式,还是以“哪些是五蕴?色蕴……”这样详细的方式,瑜伽行者从师长那里学来之后,反复用言语念诵,以此修行业处。而对于后二谛,也就是“灭谛是可爱、可喜、可意的,道谛是可爱、可喜、可意的”,他只是通过听闻来修行业处。他这样修行业处时,以一次通达而通达四谛,以一次现观而现观四谛。他以遍知通达而通达苦,以断舍通达而通达集,以作证通达而通达灭,以修习通达而通达道。他以遍知现观而现观苦……以修习现观而现观道。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiniddese ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādinā catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ. Tattha purimāni dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, pacchimāni dve vivaṭṭaṃ. Tesu bhikkhuno vaṭṭe kammaṭṭhānābhiniveso hoti, vivaṭṭe natthi abhiniveso. Purimāni hi dve saccāni ‘‘pañcakkhandhā dukkhaṃ, taṇhā samudayo’’ti evaṃ saṅkhepena ca, ‘‘katame pañcakkhandhā? Rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā nayena vitthārena ca ācariyasantike uggaṇhitvā vācāya punappunaṃ parivattento yogāvacaro kammaṃ karoti. Itaresu pana dvīsu saccesu ‘‘nirodhasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpaṃ, maggasaccaṃ iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpa’’nti evaṃ savaneneva kammaṃ karoti. So evaṃ kammaṃ karonto cattāri saccāni ekapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, ekābhisamayena abhisameti. Dukkhaṃ pariññāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, samudayaṃ pahānapaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati, maggaṃ bhāvanāpaṭivedhena paṭivijjhati. Dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena…pe… maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisameti.
这样,他在前行阶段,对前二谛是通过学习、反复询问、听闻、忆持、遍察而通达的;对后二谛则仅仅是通过听闻而通达。在后一阶段,对三谛是依作用而通达,对灭谛则是依所缘而通达。其中,一切通达智都是出世间的,而听闻、忆持、遍察之智则是世间的、属于欲界的。不过,省察只发生在已经证得真理的人身上,而这个人还是初学者,所以这里没有提到它。而且,这位比丘在摄取之前,并没有“我遍知苦,我断集,我证灭,我修道”这样的加行、等引、作意和省察;从摄取阶段开始才有。在后一阶段,苦确实已被遍知……道确实已被修习。巴利
Evamassa pubbabhāge dvīsu saccesu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇasammasanapaṭivedho hoti, dvīsu savanapaṭivedhoyeva. Aparabhāge tīsu kiccato paṭivedho hoti nirodhe ārammaṇapaṭivedho. Tattha sabbampi paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, savanadhāraṇasammasanañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ. Paccavekkhaṇā pana pattasaccassa hoti, ayañca ādikammiko. Tasmā sā idha na vuttā. Imassa ca bhikkhuno pubbe pariggahato ‘‘dukkhaṃ parijānāmi, samudayaṃ pajahāmi, nirodhaṃ sacchikaromi, maggaṃ bhāvemī’’ti ābhogasamannāhāramanasikārapaccavekkhaṇā natthi, pariggahato paṭṭhāya hoti. Aparabhāge pana dukkhaṃ pariññātameva hoti…pe… maggo bhāvitova hoti.
在这里,有两谛因为难以见到而甚深,另有两谛因为甚深而难以见到。苦谛从生起方面来说是很明显的,比如被树桩、荆棘刺伤时,也会说出“啊,真苦”这样的话。集谛从想吃喝等生起方面来说也是明显的。然而,从证悟特相来看,两者都是甚深的。所以,这两谛是因为难以见到而甚深。而要见到另外两谛,所付出的努力就像为了抓住有顶天而伸手、为了触到无间地狱而伸脚,又像把一根分成百份的毛发的尖端与另一根毛发的尖端对接一样。所以,这两谛是因为甚深而难以见到。如此,对于这四谛——前两谛因难以见到而甚深,后两谛因甚深而难以见到——针对通过学习等方式生起前行智这一点,这里说了“苦智”等。但在证悟的刹那,那只有一种智。巴利
Tattha dve saccāni duddasattā gambhīrāni, dve gambhīrattā duddasāni. Dukkhasaccañhi uppattito pākaṭaṃ, khāṇukaṇṭakappahārādīsu ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vattabbatampi āpajjati. Samudayasaccaṃ khāditukāmatābhuñjitukāmatādivasena uppattito pākaṭaṃ. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhato pana ubhayampi gambhīraṃ. Iti tāni duddasattā gambhīrāni. Itaresaṃ pana dvinnaṃ dassanatthāya payogo bhavaggaggahaṇatthaṃ hatthapasāraṇaṃ viya, avīciphusanatthaṃ pādapasāraṇaṃ viya, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭipaṭipādanaṃ viya ca hoti. Iti tāni gambhīrattā duddasāni. Evaṃ duddasattā gambhīresu gambhīrattā ca duddasesu catūsu saccesu uggahādivasena pubbabhāgañāṇuppattiṃ sandhāya idaṃ ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭivedhakkhaṇe pana ekameva taṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti.
另有一些人说:四谛有四种智——闻所成智、确定智、遍察智、现观智。其中,什么是闻所成智?就是或简略或详细地听闻四谛之后,知道“这是苦,这是集,这是灭,这是道”。这就是闻所成智。什么是确定智?他审查所听闻的意义,从法和相两方面来确定:“这些法属于这个谛,这个谛有这个相。”这就是确定智。什么是遍察智?他这样按顺序确定四谛之后,再只取苦,一直到种姓智之前,以无常、苦、无我来遍察。这就是遍察智。什么是现观智?在出世间道的刹那,以一种智同时无前无后地现观四谛,即“以遍知现观来现观苦,以断现观来现观集,以作证现观来现观灭,以修习现观来现观道”。这就是现观智。巴利
Apare panāhu – catubbidhaṃ saccesu ñāṇaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ abhisamayañāṇanti. Tattha katamaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ? Saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā cattāri saccāni sutvā jānāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayaṃ samudayo, ayaṃ nirodho, ayaṃ maggo’’ti. Idaṃ sutamayañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ? So sutānaṃ atthaṃ upaparikkhati dhammato ca lakkhaṇato ca, ‘‘ime dhammā imasmiṃ sacce pariyāpannā, imassa saccassa idaṃ lakkhaṇa’’nti sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vavatthānañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ? So evaṃ yathānupubbaṃ cattāri saccāni vavatthapetvā atha dukkhameva gahetvā yāva gotrabhuñāṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato sammasati. Idaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ. Katamaṃ abhisamayañāṇaṃ? Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe ekena ñāṇena cattāri saccāni apubbaṃ acarimaṃ abhisameti ‘‘dukkhaṃ pariññābhisamayena, samudayaṃ pahānābhisamayena, nirodhaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayena maggaṃ bhāvanābhisamayena abhisametī’’ti. Idaṃ abhisamayañāṇanti.
在正思惟的解说中,从欲乐出离,就是出离思惟;从嗔恨出离,就是无嗔思惟;从伤害出离,就是无害思惟。在这里,出离寻生起时,会摧毁、截断欲寻;无嗔寻生起时,会摧毁、截断嗔恚寻;无害寻生起时,会摧毁、截断害寻。同样地,出离寻、无嗔寻、无害寻生起时,是作为欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻的对立面而生的。巴利
Sammāsaṅkappaniddese kāmato nissaṭoti nekkhammasaṅkappo. Byāpādato nissaṭoti abyāpādasaṅkappo. Vihiṃsāya nissaṭoti avihiṃsāsaṅkappo. Tattha nekkhammavitakko kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati, abyāpādavitakko byāpādavitakkassa, avihiṃsāvitakko vihiṃsāvitakkassa. Tathā nekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsāvitakkā kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ paccanīkā hutvā uppajjanti.
在这里,瑜伽行者为了断除欲寻,就随观欲寻,或者随观其他某种行。当他的观智刹那生起时,与观相应的思惟就以“彼分断”的方式,断除、截断欲寻而生起;它策励观,并导向圣道。然后在他的圣道刹那,与道相应的思惟就以“正断”的方式,断除、截断欲寻而生起。为了断除嗔恚寻,他也随观嗔恚寻或其他某种行;为了断除害寻,他随观害寻或其他某种行。至于“当他的观智刹那”等,一切都应按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Tattha yogāvacaro kāmavitakkassa padaghātanatthaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ vā sammasati aññaṃ vā pana kiñci saṅkhāraṃ. Athassa vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāsampayutto saṅkappo tadaṅgavasena kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggaṃ pāpeti. Athassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayutto saṅkappo samucchedavasena kāmavitakkassa padaghātaṃ padacchedaṃ karonto uppajjati. Byāpādavitakkassapi padaghātanatthaṃ byāpādavitakkaṃ vā aññaṃ vā saṅkhāraṃ, vihiṃsāvitakkassa padaghātanatthaṃ vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā aññaṃ vā saṅkhāraṃ sammasati. Athassa vipassanākkhaṇeti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
不过,对于欲寻等这三种寻,在经中已经分别说明的三十八种所缘里,实际上没有任何一种业处不是它们的对治。但从确定的角度来说:对欲寻而言,在不净所缘中,只有初禅才是它的直接对治;对嗔恚寻而言,以慈心修习时,第三禅或第四禅是它的对治;对害寻而言,以悲心修习时,第三禅或第四禅是它的对治。因此,一个人修不净业处并证入禅那后,在安止定的那一刹那,与禅那相应的寻,以镇伏的方式成为欲寻的对立面而生起;以禅那为基础再修观的人,在观的刹那,与观相应的思惟,以彼分断的方式成为欲寻的对立面而生起;进一步推动观、最终到达道的人,在道的刹那,与道相应的思惟,以正断的方式成为欲寻的对立面而生起。应当知道,这样生起的,就叫作出离思惟。巴利
Kāmavitakkādīnaṃ pana tiṇṇampi pāḷiyaṃ vibhattesu aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu ekakammaṭṭhānampi apaccanīkaṃ nāma natthi. Ekantato pana kāmavitakkassa tāva asubhesu paṭhamajjhānameva paccanīkaṃ, byāpādavitakkassa mettāya tikacatukkajjhānāni, vihiṃsaāvitakkassa karuṇāya tikacatukkajjhānāni. Tasmā asubhaparikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ samāpannassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānasampayutto vitakko vikkhambhanavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentassa vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāsampayutto saṅkappo tadaṅgavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā maggaṃ pāpentassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayutto saṅkappo samucchedavasena kāmavitakkassa paccanīko hutvā uppajjati. Evaṃ uppanno nekkhammasaṅkappoti vuccatīti veditabbo.
修完慈心业处之后进入禅那,以及修完悲心业处之后进入禅那的情况,都应按照前面所说的方式类推。应当知道,这样生起的心,就称为“无嗔思惟”,也称为“无害思惟”。如此,这些出离思惟等,因为依观和禅那而生起的方式不同,所以在预备阶段各自不同;但在道刹那,对于这三种情况中所生起的不善思惟,圣道以断除、令不再生起的方式圆满道支,那时只有一种善思惟生起,这就称为“正思惟”。巴利
Mettāya pana parikammaṃ katvā, karuṇāya parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ samāpannassāti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ uppanno abyāpādasaṅkappoti vuccati, avihiṃsāsaṅkappoti vuccatīti veditabbo. Evamete nekkhammasaṅkappādayo vipassanājhānavasena uppattīnaṃ nānattā pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana imesu tīsu ṭhānesu uppannassa akusalasaṅkappassa padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamāno ekova kusalasaṅkappo uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāsaṅkappo nāma.
在解说“正语”时,由于是以一种心远离妄语,而以另一种心远离离间语等,所以这四种远离在预备阶段各不相同;但在道刹那,对于那被称为“邪语”的四种不善坏戒之思,依截断、令其不再生起的方式圆满道支而现起的,只有一种被称为“正语”的善远离。这就叫做“正语”。巴利
Sammāvācāniddesepi yasmā aññeneva cittena musāvādā viramati, aññena aññena pisuṇāvācādīhi, tasmā catassopetā veramaṇiyo pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana micchāvācāsaṅkhātāya catubbidhāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammāvācāsaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāvācā nāma.
在解说正业时,因为是以一种心远离杀生,以另一种心远离不与取,再以另一种心远离邪淫,所以这三种远离在预备阶段是各不相同的;但在道刹那,那唯一的善远离——也就是所谓的正业——以截断、令其不再生起的方式,圆满被称为邪业的三种不善坏戒之思,并圆满道支,那时它生起。这就叫做正业。巴利
Sammākammantaniddesepi yasmā aññeneva cittena pāṇātipātā viramati, aññena adinnādānā, aññena micchācārā, tasmā tissopetā veramaṇiyo pubbabhāge nānā, maggakkhaṇe pana micchākammantasaṅkhātāya tividhāya akusaladussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammākammantasaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammākammanto nāma.
在解释正命时,“此处”指的是这个教法之中。“圣弟子”指的是圣者佛陀的弟子。“断除邪命”指的是舍弃了邪恶的谋生方式。“以正命”指的是以佛陀所赞叹的善的谋生方式。“维持生活”指的是让生命延续下去。在这里,因为是以一种心远离通过身门所犯的过失,以另一种心远离通过语门所犯的过失,所以在预备阶段,它们是在不同时刻生起的。但在道刹那,面对通过两门中的七种业道而生起的邪命坏戒之思,那一种善的远离是在截断它、令它不再生起这一点上圆满道支的,此时生起的只有一种所谓的正命。这就叫做正命。巴利
Sammāājīvaniddese idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Ariyasāvakoti ariyassa buddhassa sāvako. Micchāājīvaṃ pahāyāti pāpakaṃ ājīvaṃ pajahitvā. Sammāājīvenāti buddhappasatthena kusalaājīvena. Jīvikaṃ kappetīti jīvitappavattiṃ pavatteti. Idhāpi yasmā aññeneva cittena kāyadvāravītikkamā viramati, aññeneva vacīdvāravītikkamā, tasmā pubbabhāge nānākkhaṇesu uppajjati, maggakkhaṇe pana dvīsu dvāresu sattannaṃ kammapathānaṃ vasena uppannāya micchāājīvadussīlyacetanāya padacchedato anuppattisādhanavasena maggaṅgaṃ pūrayamānā ekāva sammāājīvasaṅkhātā kusalaveramaṇi uppajjati. Ayaṃ sammāājīvo nāma.
在解释“正精进”时,“于此,比丘”是指在这教法中修行的比丘。“未生”是指还没有生起的。“诸恶”是指低劣的。“不善法”是指从不善巧生起的法。“为了令不生起”是指为了不让它们生起。“生起欲”是指生起并引发想做这件事的善法欲,也就是善的意欲。“策励”是指发起精勤,作出努力。“发勤精进”是指发动身体和心的精进。“策心”是指用那同时生起的精进把心提振起来。“精勤”是指作出勇猛的精进。按顺序,这四句应当结合反复修习、修持、多修、持续不断地精进来理解。巴利
Sammāvāyāmaniddese idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane paṭipannako bhikkhu. Anuppannānanti anibbattānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ kusalacchandaṃ janeti uppādeti. Vāyamatīti payogaṃ janeti parakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikaṃ cetasikaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānavīriyaṃ karoti. Paṭipāṭiyā panetāni cattāripi padāni āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni.
“已生”是指那些已经达到“不能说未生”状态的法。“为了断除”是指为了舍弃它们。“未生诸善法”是指尚未生起、由善巧所产生的诸法。“为了令生起”是指为了令它们生起。“已生”是指已经生起的。“为了令住立”是指为了稳固安住。“为了令不忘失”是指为了不遗失。“为了令倍复增长”是指为了一再地增长。“为了令广大”是指为了达到广大。“为了令修习”是指为了增长。“为了令圆满”是指为了达到完全圆满。巴利
Uppannānanti anuppannānanti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anibbattānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthāya. Asammosāyāti anassanatthaṃ. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya.
这四种被称为正精进的四正勤,在预备阶段属于世间,在道刹那则属于出世间。而在道刹那,只有一种精进,因为它能完成四种作用,所以得到四个名称。其中,世间的四正勤应当依照《迦叶相应》中所说的方式来了知。因为在那里已经说过:巴利
Ete pana sammāvāyāmasaṅkhātā cattāro sammappadhānā pubbabhāge lokiyā, maggakkhaṇe lokuttarā. Maggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ catukiccasādhanavasena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tattha lokiyā kassapasaṃyutte vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Vuttañhi tattha –
贤友,有四种正勤。哪四种呢?贤友,在这里,比丘为了让自己还没生起的恶不善法不生起,如果它们生起就会带来不利,因此努力精勤;为了断除自己已经生起的恶不善法,如果不断除就会带来不利,因此努力精勤;为了让自己还没生起的善法能够生起,如果没生起就会带来不利,因此努力精勤;为了让自己已经生起的善法不退失,如果退失就会带来不利,因此努力精勤。巴利
‘‘Cattārome , āvuso, sammappadhānā; Katame cattāro? Idhāvuso, bhikkhu ‘anuppannā me pāpakā akusalā dhammā uppajjamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘uppannā me pāpakā akusalā dhammā appahīyamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘anuppannā me kusalā dhammā anuppajjamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karoti, ‘uppannā me kusalā dhammā nirujjhamānā anatthāya saṃvatteyyu’nti ātappaṃ karotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.145);
在这里,“未生起”是指还没有以现行活动的方式出现,或者还没有作为所缘被经验到。否则,在无始轮回中,根本不存在从未生起过的恶不善法。不过,所谓“未生起”,是说当它们生起时,生起的正是这些法;当它们被断除时,被断除的也正是这些法。巴利
Tattha ca anuppannāti asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā anuppannā. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā pāpakā akusalā dhammā nāma natthi, anuppannā pana uppajjamānāpi eteyeva uppajjanti, pahīyamānāpi eteyeva pahīyanti.
在这里,有些人因为履行义务、修头陀支、修定、修观或做新事务等其中某一种原因,烦恼不会现起。怎么讲呢?有些人具足行仪,当他履行八十项犍度行仪、十四项大行仪,以及打扫塔院、菩提树院、饮水台、伍波萨他堂,还有迎送客比丘等种种行仪时,烦恼根本找不到机会生起。可是后来,他舍弃了这些行仪,像不守护律仪的人那样生活,因为不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。这样,从“尚未现行”的意义上来说,就叫做“未生起的生起”。巴利
Tattha ekaccassa vattaganthadhutaṅgasamādhivipassanānavakammabhavānaṃ aññataravasena kilesā na samudācaranti. Kathaṃ? Ekacco hi vattasampanno hoti, asīti khandhakavattāni cuddasa mahāvattāni cetiyaṅgaṇabodhiyaṅgaṇapānīyamāḷakauposathāgāraāgantukagamikavattāni ca karontasseva kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa vattāni vissajjetvā bhinnavattassa carato ayonisomanasikāraṃ sativossaggañca āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人执着于经典学习,受持一部尼柯耶,或者两部、三部、四部、五部。当他按照义理、按照巴利文句、按照前后关联、按照上下文次第,去受持、背诵、思惟、朗读、讲说、开示这三藏佛语时,烦恼找不到机会生起。但后来,他放弃经典学习,像懈怠的人那样过日子,因为不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就生起来了。这样,从尚未现行的角度来说,就叫做“未生起的生起”。巴利
Ekacco ganthayutto hoti, ekampi nikāyaṃ gaṇhāti dvepi tayopi cattāropi pañcapi. Tassa tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ atthavasena pāḷivasena anusandhivasena pubbāparavasena gaṇhantassa sajjhāyantassa cintentassa vācentassa desentassa pakāsentassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa ganthakammaṃ pahāya kusītassa carato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人则是头陀支的受持者,受持并实践十三种头陀功德。当他护持这些头陀功德时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,他舍弃了头陀支,转而回到生活丰足的状态中,因为不如理作意和忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。像这样,从“尚未现行”的角度来说,就叫做“未生起的烦恼生起”。巴利
Ekacco pana dhutaṅgadharo hoti, terasa dhutaṅgaguṇe samādāya vattati, tassa dhutaṅgaguṇe pariharantassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa dhutaṅgāni vissajjetvā bāhullāya āvattassa carato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人能在八种禅定中熟练自如,当他依靠初禅等的转向自在等能力安住时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,当他退失了禅定或舍弃了禅定,沉溺于闲聊等事情中生活时,由于不如理作意和忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。这样,也是从尚未实际现行的角度,说未生起的烦恼“生起”。巴利
Ekacco aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ciṇṇavasī hoti, tassa paṭhamajjhānādīsu āvajjanavasīādīnaṃ vasena viharantassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa parihīnajjhānassa vā vissaṭṭhajjhānassa vā bhassādīsu anuyuttassa viharato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
还有一类人是修观的,他持续进行七种随观或十八种大观的修行。当他这样安住时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,他舍弃了观业,转而多从事身体方面的活动而住,由于不如理作意和失念,烦恼就生起了。这样,也是从尚未现行的角度,说未生起的烦恼“生起”。巴利
Ekacco pana vipassako hoti, sattasu vā anupassanāsu (paṭi. ma. 3.35) aṭṭhārasasu vā mahāvipassanāsu (paṭi. ma. 1.22) kammaṃ karonto viharati, tassa evaṃ viharato kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa vipassanākammaṃ pahāya kāyadaḷhībahulassa viharato ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
有些人负责修建工作,建造伍波萨他堂、食堂等。当他心里盘算这些工程所需的材料时,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,当修建工作完成或放下之后,由于不如理作意和忘失正念,烦恼就生起了。这样,也是从还没有实际现起的角度,说未生起的烦恼“生起”。巴利
Ekacco navakammiko hoti, uposathāgārabhojanasālādīni karoti , tassa tesaṃ upakaraṇāni cintentassa kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa navakamme niṭṭhite vā vissaṭṭhe vā ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma.
还有一类人,是从梵天世界来的清净众生,由于没有习近,烦恼找不到可乘之机。但后来,当烦恼有了习近的机会,依靠不如理作意和失念,它们就生起了。这样,也是从还没有实际现行的角度,说未生起的烦恼生起了。以上,首先应当知道:从还没有实际现行的角度,就是“未生起”的意思。巴利
Ekacco pana brahmalokato āgato suddhasatto hoti, tassa anāsevanāya kilesā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Aparabhāge panassa laddhāsevanassa ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma uppajjanti. Evampi asamudācāravasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma. Evaṃ tāva asamudācāravasena anuppannatā veditabbā.
如何是依未曾体验过的所缘来说?这里,有人得到过去从未体验过的、属于可意等种类的所缘,由于对那所缘不如理作意、失去正念,贪等烦恼就生起。这样,就是依未曾体验过的所缘,说未生起的烦恼生起。如此,就未生起的不善法之生起而言,他见到这对自身有害,为了令它们不生起,就致力于修习念处,修习第一正勤;而当那些不善法已经生起后,他见到由于不断除它们,这对自身有害,为了断除它们,同样地修习第二正勤。巴利
Kathaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena? Idhekacco ananubhūtapubbaṃ manāpikādibhedaṃ ārammaṇaṃ labhati, tassa tattha ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma rāgādayo kilesā uppajjanti. Evaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena anuppannā uppajjanti nāma. Evaṃ anuppannānaṃ akusalānaṃ uppāde sati attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ anuppādāya satipaṭṭhānabhāvanānuyogena paṭhamaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti, uppannesu pana tesu tesaṃ appahānato attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ pahānāya dutiyaṃ tatheva sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti.
“未生起的善法”,指的是止观以及道。看到它们还没有生起,对自己来说是一种损失,为了让他们生起,同样地修习第三正勤。“已生起的善法”,指的只是止观。但道一旦生起后就灭去,并不会造成损失,因为它是先给出了果的缘之后才灭去的。看到那些止观灭去会对自己造成损失,为了让它们保持安住,同样地修习第四正勤。而在出世间道的那一刻,实际上只有一种精进。巴利
Anuppannā kusalā dhammāti samathavipassanā ceva maggo ca. Tesaṃ anuppāde attano anatthaṃ passitvā tesaṃ uppādanatthāya tatheva tatiyaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti. Uppannā kusalā dhammāti samathavipassanāva. Maggo pana sakiṃ uppajjitvā nirujjhamāno anatthāya saṃvattanako nāma natthi. So hi phalassa paccayaṃ datvāva nirujjhati. Tāsaṃ samathavipassanānaṃ nirodhato attano anatthaṃ passitvā tāsaṃ ṭhitiyā tatheva catutthaṃ sammappadhānaṃ bhāveti. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekameva vīriyaṃ.
那些未生起而可能生起的,通过让它们如此确实不生起,就完成了令未生起的不生起这一作用,以及令已生起的断除这一作用。这里所说的“已生起”,有四种已生起:现在已生起、已过去已生起、得机会已生起、得地已生起。其中,一切具有生、老、灭的有为法,称为现在已生起。善与不善的心,在体验了所缘的作用之后灭去,称为已体验而过去;其余有为法没有经历生、老、灭三者便灭去,称为已灭而过去,这两种合称为已过去已生起。像“凡是他以前所作的诸业”等经文所说的业,虽然已经过去,但它排斥其他果报、为自己的果报制造机会而住立,因此连同如此制造了机会而虽未生起却必定会在所制造的机会中生起的果报,称为得机会已生起。在各种地中,那些未被拔除的不善法,称为得地已生起。巴利
Ye evaṃ anuppannā uppajjeyyuṃ, te yathā neva uppajjanti, evaṃ tesaṃ anuppannānaṃ anuppādakiccaṃ, uppannānañca pahānakiccaṃ sādheti. Uppannāti cettha catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ vattamānuppannaṃ bhūtāpagatuppannaṃ okāsakatuppannaṃ bhūmiladdhuppannanti. Tattha sabbampi uppādajarābhaṅgasamaṅgisaṅkhātaṃ vattamānuppannaṃ nāma. Ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavitvā niruddhaṃ anubhūtāpagatasaṅkhātaṃ kusalākusalaṃ uppādādittayamanuppatvā niruddhaṃ bhutvāpagatasaṅkhātaṃ sesasaṅkhatañca bhūtāpagatuppannaṃ nāma. ‘‘Yānissa tāni pubbe katāni kammānī’’ti evamādinā (ma. ni. 3.248) nayena vuttaṃ kammaṃ atītampi samānaṃ aññaṃ vipākaṃ paṭibāhitvā attano vipākassa okāsaṃ katvā ṭhitattā tathā katokāsañca vipākaṃ anuppannampi samānaṃ evaṃ kate okāse ekantena uppajjanato okāsakatuppannaṃ nāma. Tāsu tāsu bhūmīsu asamūhataṃ akusalaṃ bhūmiladdhuppannaṃ nāma.
在这里,要了解“地”和“得地”的差别。“地”是指作为观智所缘的三界五蕴。“得地”是指在那些蕴中能够生起的烦恼类。正因为那些烦恼,才说它“得地”,所以称为“得地”。但这不是从所缘的角度说的。如果从所缘的角度说,那么缘着过去、未来以及已被遍知的漏尽者的蕴,烦恼也会生起。如果那种情况也算“得地”,那因为它没有被断除,就没有人能断除轮回的根本了。应当从依处的角度来理解“得地”。因为无论在哪里,只要那些尚未被观智遍知的蕴生起,从它们生起的那一刻起,属于轮回根本的烦恼类就随眠在其中。由于未被断除,应知这就是“得地”。巴利
Ettha ca bhūmiyā bhūmiladdhassa ca nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ – bhūmīti hi vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā. Bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma tesu khandhesu uppattirahaṃ kilesajātaṃ. Tena hi sā bhūmiladdhā nāma hotīti tasmā bhūmiladdhanti vuccati. Sā ca kho na ārammaṇavasena. Ārammaṇavasena hi sabbepi atītānāgate pariññātepi ca khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhe ārabbha kilesā uppajjanti. Yadi ca taṃ bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma siyā, tassa appaheyyato na koci bhavamūlaṃ pajaheyya. Vatthuvasena pana bhūmiladdhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yattha yattha hi vipassanāya apariññātā khandhā uppajjanti, tattha tattha uppādato pabhuti tesu vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ anuseti. Taṃ appahīnaṭṭhena bhūmiladdhanti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,对于某个人来说,烦恼以未被断除的状态随眠在哪些蕴里,那些蕴就是那些烦恼的依处,而不是属于其他人的蕴。对于烦恼以未被断除的状态随眠在过去蕴中的人,过去蕴才是那些烦恼的依处,而不是其他蕴。这个道理也适用于未来蕴等。同样地,对于烦恼以未被断除的状态随眠在欲界蕴中的人,欲界蕴才是那些烦恼的依处,而不是其他界的蕴。这个道理也适用于色界和无色界。然而,对于入流者等圣者,某位圣者的蕴中,某种轮回根本的烦恼类已被某条道断除,那么那些蕴对于已被断除的那些轮回根本烦恼来说,就不再能被称为依处或“地”。对于凡夫,因为一切轮回根本烦恼都未被断除,无论他造作什么善业或不善业,正是以业和烦恼为缘,轮回才得以延续。对这位凡夫,不能说“那轮回根本只在色蕴中,不在受等蕴中”,也不能说“只在识蕴中,不在色蕴等中”。为什么呢?因为它无差别地随眠在全部五蕴中。是怎样的呢?就像地味等之于树一样。譬如一棵大树,依止地表,依靠地味和水味,以此为缘,以根、干、枝、小枝、嫩芽、叶、花、果而生长,充满虚空,直到劫末,以种子相续使树系绵延不绝;这时不能说“那地味等只在根中,不在干等中”,也不能说“只在果中,不在根等中”。为什么呢?因为它无差别地遍及一切根等部位。又譬如有人对那棵树的花果等感到厌离,便在四方钉入名为“蛙刺”的毒刺;那棵树被这种毒触所触后,因地味和水味被耗尽,便进入不再萌发的状态,无法再产生相续。同样地,厌离蕴之相续流转的善男子,就像那人在树的四方施毒一样,在自身相续中开始修习四种圣道。于是他的蕴相续被四道之毒触所触,一切轮回根本烦恼悉皆耗尽,身业等一切业类都变成唯作的性质,进入未来不再投生后有之法性,无法再产生来世的相续,唯有最后识灭尽,如无薪之火,无所执取而般涅槃。应当这样了知地与已得地之间的差别。巴利
Tattha ca yassa yesu khandhesu appahīnaṭṭhena anusayitā kilesā, tassa te eva khandhā tesaṃ kilesānaṃ vatthu, na aññesaṃ santakā khandhā. Atītakkhandhesu ca appahīnānusayitānaṃ kilesānaṃ atītakkhandhāva vatthu, na itare. Esa nayo anāgatādīsu. Tathā kāmāvacarakkhandhesu appahīnānusayitānaṃ kilesānaṃ kāmāvacarakkhandhā eva vatthu, na itare. Esa nayo rūpārūpāvacaresu. Sotāpannādīsu pana yassa yassa ariyapuggalassa khandhesu taṃ taṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ tena tena maggena pahīnaṃ, tassa tassa te te khandhā pahīnānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ vaṭṭamūlakānaṃ kilesānaṃ avatthuto bhūmīti saṅkhaṃ na labhanti. Puthujjanassa sabbaso vaṭṭamūlakilesānaṃ appahīnattā yaṃkiñci kariyamānaṃ kammaṃ kusalamakusalaṃ vā hoti, iccassa kammakilesapaccayāva vaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭati, tassa tasseva taṃ vaṭṭamūlaṃ rūpakkhandheyeva, na vedanādīsu. Viññāṇakkhandheyeva vā, na rūpakkhandhādīsūti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Avisesena pañcasupi khandhesu anusayitattā. Kathaṃ? Pathavīrasādi viya rukkhe. Yathā hi mahārukkhe pathavītalaṃ adhiṭṭhāya pathavīrasañca āporasañca nissāya tappaccayā mūlakhandhasākhāpasākhāpallavapalāsapupphaphalehi vaḍḍhitvā nabhaṃ pūretvā yāva kappāvasānā bījaparamparāya rukkhapaveṇiṃ santānayamāne ṭhite taṃ pathavīrasādimūleyeva, na khandhādīsu. Phaleyeva vā, na mūlādīsūti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Avisesena sabbesu mūlādīsu anugatattāti. Yathā pana tasseva rukkhassa pupphaphalādīsu nibbinno koci puriso catūsu disāsu maṇḍūkakaṇṭakaṃ nāma visakaṇṭakaṃ ākoṭeyya, atha so rukkho tena visasamphassena phuṭṭho pathavīrasaāporasānaṃ pariyādinnattā appasavadhammataṃ āgamma puna santānaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkuṇeyya, evameva khandhappavattiyaṃ nibbinno kulaputto tassa purisassa catūsu disāsu rukkhe visayojanaṃ viya attano santāne catumaggabhāvanaṃ ārabhati. Athassa so khandhasantāno tena catumaggavisasamphassena sabbaso vaṭṭamūlakilesānaṃ pariyādinnattā kiriyasabhāvamattaṃ upagatakāyakammādisabbakammappabhedo hutvā āyatiṃ punabbhavānabhinibbattanadhammataṃ āgamma bhavantarasantānaṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, kevalaṃ carimaviññāṇanirodhena nirindhano viya jātavedo anupādāno parinibbāyati. Evaṃ bhūmiyā bhūmiladdhassa ca nānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
另外还有四种“已生”:现行已生、执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生。其中,只有当下正在生起的,才是现行已生。当眼等诸门的所缘出现在面前时,有些烦恼虽然在之前还没有生起,但因为已经执取了那个所缘,后来就必定会生起,这就叫作执取所缘已生。有些烦恼,无论依止或观哪一种修行都没有被镇伏,即使还没有进入心的相续流,但因为缺少能阻止它生起的因,所以叫作未镇伏已生。还有些烦恼,虽然已经通过止或观被镇伏了,但还没有被圣道彻底断除,因此仍然没有超越它会生起的法性,这就叫作未正断已生。应当知道,这三种已生——执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生——都归入得地已生之中。巴利
Aparampi catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ samudācāruppannaṃ ārammaṇādhiggahituppannaṃ avikkhambhituppannaṃ asamūhatuppannanti. Tattha vattamānuppannameva samudācāruppannaṃ. Cakkhādīnaṃ pana āpāthagate ārammaṇe pubbabhāge anuppajjamānampi kilesajātaṃ ārammaṇassa adhiggahitattā eva aparabhāge ekantena uppattito ārammaṇādhiggahituppannanti vuccati. Samathavipassanānaṃ aññataravasena avikkhambhitaṃ kilesajātaṃ cittasantatimanārūḷhampi uppattinivārakassa hetuno abhāvā avikkhambhituppannaṃ nāma. Samathavipassanāvasena pana vikkhambhitampi ariyamaggena asamūhatattā uppattidhammataṃ anatītattā asamūhatuppannanti vuccati. Tividhampi cetaṃ ārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamūhatuppannaṃ bhūmiladdheneva saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti veditabbaṃ.
对于上述各种分类中已经生起的“已生”,其中被称为“当下现前已生、已过去已生、已作机会已生、现行已生”的那种,因为不属于道所断的范围,所以不需要靠任何一种道智来断除。然而,那些被称为“得地已生、执取所缘已生、未镇伏已生、未正断已生”的“已生”,由于种种世间与出世间的智慧生起时,会摧毁它们那种“已生”的状态,因此这一切都是应当断除的。如此,那句“已生(的恶法应当断除)……”等说法,是针对那些为圣道所断除的烦恼而说的。巴利
Iccetasmiṃ vuttappabhede uppanne yadetaṃ vattamānabhūtāpagatokāsakatasamudācārasaṅkhātaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃ amaggavajjhattā kenaci maggañāṇena pahātabbaṃ na hoti. Yaṃ panetaṃ bhūmiladdhārammaṇādhiggahitāvikkhambhitāsamūhatasaṅkhātaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa taṃ uppannabhāvaṃ nāsayamānaṃ yasmā taṃ taṃ lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ uppajjati, tasmā taṃ sabbampi pahātabbaṃ hotīti. Evaṃ ye maggo kilese pajahati, te sandhāya ‘‘uppannāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
那么,在出世间道的刹那,怎么算是“为了还没生起的善法能够生起而修习”,又怎么算是“为了已经生起的善法能够保持而修习”呢?其实正是通过道本身的运作来实现的。因为道在运作时,由于它以前从未生起过,所以被称为“未生”。就像有人会说:“我们到了以前从没到过的地方,体验了以前从没体验过的所缘。”而就在它运作的当下,这本身就是“保持”,所以说“为了保持而修习”也是可以的。这样一来,这位比丘在出世间道的刹那,同一个精进就获得了“为了还没生起的恶、不善法不生起”等四种名称。以上就是关于出世间道刹那正勤的说明。因此,这里所讲的就是世间与出世间混合在一起的正勤。巴利
Atha maggakkhaṇe kathaṃ anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādāya bhāvanā hoti, kathañca uppannānaṃ ṭhitiyāti? Maggappavattiyā eva. Maggo hi pavattamāno pubbe anuppannapubbattā anuppanno nāma vuccati. Anāgatapubbañhi ṭhānaṃ āgantvā ananubhūtapubbaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ anubhavitvā vattāro bhavanti ‘‘anāgataṭṭhānaṃ āgatamha, ananubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavāmā’’ti. Yāvassa pavatti, ayameva ṭhiti nāmāti ṭhitiyā bhāvetītipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Evametassa bhikkhuno idaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe ekameva vīriyaṃ ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāyā’’tiādīni cattāri nāmāni labhati. Ayaṃ lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe sammappadhānakathā. Evamettha lokiyalokuttaramissakā sammappadhānā niddiṭṭhāti.
在正念的解说中,“身”指的是色身。因为这里的色身,是以肢体、头发等法的聚集之义而被理解为“身”的,就像象身、车身等一样。正如以聚集为义,也以可厌之物的来处为义。因为那些极其可厌、极其令人厌恶之物的来处,也就是身。“来处”就是生起之处。这里的词义解释是:它们从那里而来,所以叫“来处”。什么从那里而来?可厌的头发等。因此,可厌之物的来处就是“身”。巴利
Sammāsatiniddese kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena hatthikāyarathakāyādayo viya kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“随观身”是指习惯于随观身,或者正在随观身。虽然已经说了“身”,后面在“随观身”中又第二次提到“身”,应当知道这是为了显示不混杂地界定、破除密集等。因此,他并不是在身之中随观受、随观心或随观法,而只是随观身;这就通过显示在名为身的所依上唯有随观身这一行相,显示了不混杂的界定。同样,他并不是在身之中随观脱离肢体各部分的单一法,也不是随观脱离头发、体毛等的女人或男人。即使在这里,对于由头发、体毛等四大及所造色聚集而成的这个身,他也不是随观脱离四大与所造色的单一法,而是像随观车乘部件的人那样随观肢体的聚集,像随观城市组成部分的人那样随观头发、体毛等的聚集,像剥开芭蕉树干的人、拆解空拳的人那样,纯粹只是随观四大与所造色的聚集。这样,通过从种种不同方面显示名为身的所依,就显示了破除密集。因为在这里,除了如上所说的聚集之外,根本看不到有所谓的身、女人、男人或任何其他法,众生只是对如上所说的诸法聚集,以种种方式生起邪执。因此古德们说:巴利
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno. Kāyeti ca vatvāpi puna kāyānupassīti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassīyevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthāpi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibhujjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno nānappakārato dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“ 他看到的东西,并不是被看见的;而被看见的东西,他却没有看到。
愚人不见真相,所以被束缚;一旦被束缚,就解脱不了。”巴利
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti.
“为了显示破除密集等”这句话已经说过了。这里“等”这个字还应当让人明白另一层意思:他在这身体上,只是身随观,而不是随观其他法。这话说的是什么呢?就像在没有水的阳焰中,有人却把它随观为水;与此不同,对这个实际上无常、苦、无我、不净的身体,他并不随观为常、乐、我、净,而是身随观。巴利
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhattasubhabhāvānupassī, atha kho kāyānupassī
应当这样说:他正是随观无常、苦、无我、不净这些行相的聚集。或者,在《大念处经》中这样描述身:“在此,诸比丘,比丘前往森林,或到树下……他具念地入息、出息。”依此方式,从入出息一直到碎成粉末的骨头,这整个身都被说到了;而在后面讲念处时又这样说:“在此,有人于地界随观无常,于水界、火界、风界、发界、毛界、皮肤界、真皮界、肉界、血界、筋界、骨界、骨髓界随观无常。”对于这全部的身,由于都是在这同一个身中随观,所以也可以这样理解其义:于身,他是身随观者。巴利
Aniccadukkhānattāsubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā rukkhamūlagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) nayena assāsapassāsādi cuṇṇakajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca parato satipaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, āpokāyaṃ, tejokāyaṃ, vāyokāyaṃ, kesakāyaṃ, lomakāyaṃ, chavikāyaṃ, cammakāyaṃ, maṃsakāyaṃ, ruhirakāyaṃ, nhārukāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāyaṃ, aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,由于不观见任何可以被执为“我”或“我所”的东西,而只随观头发、身毛等种种法的聚集,因此应理解为:于身,随观身——也就是在由头发等种种法聚集所成的身上随观。再者,依据下文“于此身中随观无常,不随观常”等次第,因为随观的是由无常相等种种行相聚集而成的身,所以也是“于身,随观身”的意思。而这正是四种念处共通的意义。巴利
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhātakāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā anukkamena parato āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo. Ayaṃ pana catusatipaṭṭhānasādhāraṇo attho.
在身体方面随观身体,是指对入出息身等以多种方式所说的身体,逐一随观每一种身体。住,是为了说明与四种威仪住中的某一种相结合,意思是:以另一种威仪切断一种威仪的障碍,不倒下地让自身保持运转。热诚,是为了说明与执持身体的精进相结合。因为那时,那种在三有中烧尽烦恼而被称为热诚的精进,为此人所具备,所以称为热诚。正知,是具备被称为执持身体的正知的智慧。具念,是具备执持身体的念。然而,这里先以念把握所缘,再以慧随观,因为离开念就不可能有随观。因此世尊说:诸比丘,我说念于一切处都有用。所以,仅凭于身随观身而住这一句,就已经开示了身随观念处的业处。或者,因为不热诚的人内心收缩,成为障碍;不正知的人在把握方法和舍弃非方法时迷惑;失念的人无能于不舍弃方法、不执取非方法,因此他的业处不能成就。所以,为了显示依其威力而使业处成就的诸法,才说热诚、正知、具念,应当这样理解。巴利
Kāye kāyānupassīti assāsapassāsakāyādike bahudhā vutte kāye ekekakāyānupassī. Viharatīti catūsu iriyāpathavihāresu aññataravihārasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ, ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā apatamānaṃ attānaṃ harati pavattetīti attho. Ātāpīti kāyapariggāhakavīriyasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ. So hi yasmā tasmiṃ samaye yaṃ taṃ vīriyaṃ tīsu bhavesu kilesānaṃ ātāpanato ātāpoti vuccati, tena samannāgato hoti , tasmā ‘‘ātāpī’’ti vuccati. Sampajānoti kāyapariggāhakena sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati . Na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi. Tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassati upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamattho hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati, tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这样,先说明了身随观念处的相应支,现在为了说明断除支,而说“除遣世间贪忧”。其中,“除遣”是指以彼分断或镇伏断来除遣。“世间”:就是先前所执取的这个身体,这里依坏散之义而称为世间。意思是在这个世间中舍弃贪与忧。然而,因为贪忧不只是在身上被断除,在受等上面也同样被断除,所以《分别论》中说:“五取蕴为世间。”应当知道,这是因为那些法本身就名为世间,所以依此义理引出这个说法。至于所说的“此中,什么是世间?就是这身体本身”,这就是这里的含义。“贪忧”是合起来说的,但在《相应部》和《增支部》的文本中则分开来诵读。那“贪”是指以它而希求、以它而贪求,或者它自己贪求,或者它只是贪求而已,这就是贪。然而,因为这里以“贪”一词摄取了欲贪,以“忧”一词摄取了嗔恚,所以应当知道,这是通过显示属于五盖的两种强盛之法来说明断除五盖。巴利
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañca dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi yvāyaṃ kāyo pubbe pariggahito, sveva idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko nāma. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhaṃ domanassañca pajahitvāti attho. Yasmā panassa na kāyamatteyeva abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīyati, vedanādīsupi pahīyatiyeva, tasmā ‘‘pañcapi upādānakkhandhā loko’’ti (vibha. 362) vibhaṅge vuttaṃ. Lokasaṅkhātattāyeva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthuddhāravasenetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ panāha – ‘‘tattha katamo loko (vibha. 538), sveva kāyo loko’’ti ayamevettha attho. Abhijjhādomanassanti ca samāsetvā vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttaṅguttarapāṭhantaresu pana visuṃ katvā paṭhanti. Sā pana abhijjhāyanti patthayanti etāya, sayaṃ vā abhijjhāyati, abhijjhāyanamattameva vā esāti abhijjhā. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando, domanassagahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
这里特别要说明的是:通过断除贪欲,就断除了以身体健全为根源的贪著;通过断除忧恼,就断除了以身体败坏为根源的抗拒;通过断除贪欲,就断除了对身体的喜乐执著;通过断除忧恼,就断除了对修身的不喜;通过断除贪欲,就断除了将身体上非真实的净、乐等状态投射上去;通过断除忧恼,就断除了将身体上真实的不净、苦等状态排斥掉。由此显示了瑜伽行者的瑜伽力和瑜伽堪能性。这确实是瑜伽力:即这位修行者脱离了贪著与抗拒,能忍受不喜与喜,远离了对非真实的投射和对真实的排斥。而脱离了贪著与抗拒,能忍受不喜与喜,不投射非真实,不排斥真实,就是具备瑜伽堪能性。巴利
Visesena panettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa, yadayaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto aratiratisaho abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
另一种理解方式:在“于身随观身”这句话里,说的是以随观作为业处。“住”这句话里,说的是以所说的“住”来护持业处修行者的身体。“热诚”等话里,是以热诚说正勤,以念和正知说遍一切处的业处,或者说是护持业处的方法。也可以这样理解:以念说通过身随观而获得的止,以正知说观,以除遣贪忧说修习的果。巴利
Aparo nayo – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā. Satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在“于受随观受”等说法中,受等词再次出现的作用,应当依照在身随观中已经说过的方式,按各自相应的情况套用后理解。这里的不共含义是:在乐受等许多种类的受中,对每一种受各自从无常等角度随观,就是“于受随观受”;在有贪等十六种心之中,对每一种心各自从无常等角度随观,就是“于心随观心”;在除去身、受、心之外的其余三地诸法中,对每一种法各自从无常等角度随观,就是“于法随观法”;或者依照《念处经》所说的方法,随观盖等法。这里还应知道,“身”用单数,是因为身体是单一的;“心”用单数,是因为心没有自性上的差别,是依种类来把握的。应当知道,像这样随观受等法的人,就是于受随观受、于心随观心、于法随观法。那么,受应当怎样随观呢?首先,乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭,不苦不乐受应观为无常。正如所说:巴利
Vedanāsu vedanānupassītiādīsu ca vedanādīnaṃ puna vacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva yathāyogaṃ yojetvā veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana asādhāraṇattho – sukhādīsu anekappabhedāsu vedanāsu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekavedanānupassīti, sarāgādike soḷasappabhede citte visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekacittānupassīti, kāyavedanācittāni ṭhapetvā sesatebhūmakadhammesu visuṃ visuṃ aniccādito ekekadhammānupassīti, satipaṭṭhānasuttante (dī. ni. 2.382; ma. ni. 1.115) vuttanayena nīvaraṇādidhammānupassīti vā. Ettha ca ‘‘kāye’’ti ekavacanaṃ sarīrassa ekattā, ‘‘citte’’ti ekavacanaṃ cittassa sabhāvabhedābhāvato jātiggahaṇena katanti veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca vedanādayo anupassitabbā, tathā anupassanto vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti veditabbo. Kathaṃ tāva vedanā anupassitabbā? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā vedanā sallato, adukkhamasukhā vedanā aniccato anupassitabbā. Yathāha –
“ 如果有人把乐看成苦,把苦看成箭;
他把不苦不乐、寂静的它,看成了无常;
那位真正以正见观察的比丘,他遍知诸受。”巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammaddaso bhikkhu, parijānāti vedanā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
所有这些受,都应该从苦的角度来观察。因为经中这样说:“无论什么感受,这一切我都说是苦。”(《相应部》4.259)也应该从乐和苦的角度来观察。正如经中所说:“乐受,安住时是乐,变坏时是苦;苦受,安住时是苦,变坏时是乐;不苦不乐受,有智慧时是乐,没有智慧时是苦。”(《中部》1.465)此外,还可以依照无常等七种随观来观察它们。巴利
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhatopi anupassitabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā. Yathāha – ‘‘sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā. Dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā. Adukkhamasukhā vedanā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Apica aniccādisattaanupassanāvasenāpi anupassitabbā.
在心法当中,先就“心”来说,应当从所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、果、唯作等种种差别来观察,也要从无常等七种随观来观察,还要从有贪等十六种分类来观察。就“法”来说,应当从自相、共相、空法,以及无常等七种随观,还有寂静、非寂静等角度来观察。不过在这里,对于已经在这个被称为“身”的世间断除了贪和忧的人,他在受等其他世间里的贪忧也同样是断除了的;但为了说明不同的人有差别,也为了说明不同刹那修习念处的情形,所以处处都这样宣说。或者说,在一个地方断除了,在其余地方也就断除了。因此,为了显示他在这件事上断除的情形,才这样宣说。应当这样理解。巴利
Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādisattaanupassanānaṃ sarāgādisoḷasabhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ, dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatādhammassa aniccādisattaanupassanānaṃ santāsantādīnañca vasena anupassitabbā. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva, nānāpuggalavasena pana nānākkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ, sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这四种念处,在修行前期阶段,是可以在不同心中生起的。因为人确实是用一个心去把握身,用另一个心去把握受,用另一个心去把握心,再用另一个心去把握法。但在出世间道的刹那,它们只在一个心中生起。最初把握身之后,与观相应的念,就叫身随观;具备这种念的人,就叫身随观者。努力修观而证得圣道的人,在道刹那,与道相应的念,就叫身随观;具备这种念的人,就叫身随观者。把握受、把握心、把握法之后,与观相应的念,就叫法随观;具备这种念的人,就叫法随观者。努力修观而证得圣道的人,在道刹那,与道相应的念,就叫法随观;具备这种念的人,就叫法随观者。这样,教说首先是依人而安立的。不过,就身来说,为了断除认为身是“净”的颠倒,把握身的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫身随观。就受来说,为了断除认为受是“乐”的颠倒,把握受的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫受随观。就心来说,为了断除认为心是“常”的颠倒,把握心的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫心随观。就法来说,为了断除认为法有“我”的颠倒,把握法的念通过道而圆满成就,所以叫法随观。因此,同一个与道相应的念,因为能完成四种作用,就得到四个名称。所以论中说:“但在出世间道的刹那,它们只在一个心中生起。”巴利
Iti ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhāti, aññena vedanaṃ, aññena cittaṃ, aññena dhamme pariggaṇhāti. Lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhanti. Ādito hi kāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vedanaṃ pariggaṇhitvā cittaṃ pariggaṇhitvā dhamme pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma, tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Evaṃ tāva desanā puggale tiṭṭhati. Kāye pana ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāsappahānā kāyapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti kāyānupassanā nāma. Vedanāya ‘‘sukhā’’ti vipallāsappahānā vedanāpariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti vedanānupassanā nāma. Citte ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāsappahānā cittapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti cittānupassanā nāma. Dhammesu ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsappahānā dhammapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti dhammānupassanā nāma. Iti ekāva maggasampayuttā sati catukiccasādhakattena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantī’’ti.
在解释正定时,“离诸欲”的意思是:远离诸欲、与诸欲分开、没有诸欲、从诸欲中退离。这里出现的“唯”字,应当理解为决定、限定的意思。正因为它是决定的意思,所以在成就初禅并安住的时候,即使诸欲并不存在,也能表明诸欲正是初禅的对立面,而初禅的证得必须靠彻底舍离诸欲。这是怎么表明的呢?当以“唯离诸欲”这样来作限定时,就可以看出:毫无疑问,诸欲是这禅那的对立面,只要有诸欲存在,这禅那就不会生起,就像黑暗中不会有灯光一样;要证得这禅那,就必须彻底舍离诸欲,就像要舍离此岸才能到达彼岸一样。所以才作这样的限定。巴利
Sammāsamādhiniddese vivicceva kāmehīti kāmehi viviccitvā vinā hutvā apakkamitvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vivicceva kāmehī’’ti evañhi niyame kayiramāne idaṃ paññāyati – nūnimassa jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā, yesu sati idaṃ na pavattati, andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viya, tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrassa viya. Tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.
这里可能会有人问:为什么这个“唯”字只出现在前一句,而不出现在后一句?难道即使不远离不善法也能成就禅那并安住吗?但不能这样理解。这个“唯”字用在前一句,是因为初禅就是从欲中出离。因为超越了欲界、又对治了欲贪,所以这禅那正是对欲的出离。正如经中所说:“欲的出离,就是离欲。”(《如是语》72)至于后一句,也应该像“诸比丘,只有在这里才有第一沙门,只有在这里才有第二沙门”(《中部》1.139;《增支部》4.241)那样,把“唯”字带进来理解并宣说。因为如果不远离其余那些称为“盖”的不善法,就不可能成就禅那并安住。所以,“唯离诸欲”和“唯离诸不善法”这两句,都应该这样理解。另外,这两句虽然都用“离”这个共同的说法,可以涵盖彼分离、镇伏离、断离、安息离、出离离,以及心离、身离、依离等,但在世间加行阶段,应该理解为身离、心离、镇伏离;在出世间道的刹那,则应该理解为身离、心离、断离、安息离、出离离。巴利
Tattha siyā, kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto, na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyāti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃnissaraṇato hi pubbapade esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Uttarapadepi pana yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusalehi dhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tasmā ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī’’ti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi viviccāti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā cittakāyaupadhivivekā ca saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tathāpi pubbabhāge kāyavivekacittavivekavikkhambhanavivekā daṭṭhabbā, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe kāyavivekacittavivekasamucchedavivekapaṭippassaddhivivekanissaraṇavivekā.
“诸欲”这个词,应当理解为:既包括《大义释》里以“哪些是事欲?可爱的色……”这种方式所说的事欲,也包括同一《大义释》和《分别论》里以“欲求是欲,贪是欲,欲贪是欲,思惟是欲,贪是欲,思惟贪是欲”这种方式所说的烦恼欲——这两类全都包含在内。只有这样,“唯离诸欲”理解为“从事欲中远离”,这个意思才说得通。这样一来,说的就是身远离。巴利
Kāmehīti iminā pana padena ye ca mahāniddese ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpikā rūpā’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca tattheva vibhaṅge ca ‘‘chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo, saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’ti (mahāni. 1; vibha. 564) evaṃ kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitā icceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati vivicceva kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati. Tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“远离不善法”这句话的意思是:从烦恼欲或一切不善法中远离,这样理解才讲得通。由此说的是“心远离”。在这里,前一句说的是从事欲中远离,正好表明了舍弃欲乐;后一句说的是从烦恼欲中远离,则表明了摄取离欲之乐。同样,正是通过说事欲远离和烦恼欲远离,前一句揭示了舍弃杂染的所依,后一句揭示了断除杂染本身。前一句揭示了舍弃贪求状态的因,后一句揭示了舍弃愚痴状态的因。前一句揭示了修行上的清净,后一句揭示了内心倾向的培育——应当这样了知。以上就是针对“诸欲”一词中取“事欲”这一方的理趣。巴利
Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati. Tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanato eva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti. Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa. Paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti viññātabbaṃ. Esa tāva nayo kāmehīti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe.
不过在“烦恼欲”这一边,“欲”所指的,是以“欲求”“贪”等种种不同分类来说的欲贪本身。它虽然属于不善法,但在《分别论》中,按照“其中什么是欲?欲求就是欲……”这样的方式,为了显示它是禅支的对立面而单独加以说明;或者因为它是烦恼欲,所以在前一句中提到,又因为它属于不善法,所以在后一句中提到。由于它有多种分类,所以没有单说“欲”,而是说“诸欲”。此外,虽然其他法也有不善的性质,但在《分别论》中,按照“其中什么是不善法?欲贪……”这样的方式,为了显示它们是与禅支相违的对立面,所以只说了诸盖。因为诸盖与禅支相违,而诸禅支正是它们的对治、摧毁者、消灭者,所以这样说。正如《藏论》中所说:“定对治欲贪,喜对治嗔恚,寻对治昏沉睡眠,乐对治掉举恶作,伺对治疑。”巴利
Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandova kāmoti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno ‘‘tattha katame kāmā, chando kāmo’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto, kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ. Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne ‘‘tattha katame akusalā dhammā, kāmacchando’’tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni, tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni viddhaṃsakāni vināsakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyā’’ti peṭake vuttaṃ.
在这里,“远离诸欲”这一句,说的是以镇伏的方式远离欲贪;“远离不善法”这一句,说的是以镇伏的方式远离五种盖。虽然没有直接点名,但第一句实际上指欲贪,第二句指其余诸盖。同样,第一句对应三种不善根中,以五种欲乐品类为所缘的贪;第二句对应以嗔恚事等品类为所缘的嗔和痴。或者在诸流等法中,第一句对应欲流、欲轭、欲漏、欲取、贪欲身系、欲贪结;第二句对应其余诸流、轭、漏、取、身系、结。第一句对应渴爱以及与它相应之法,第二句对应无明以及与它相应之法。此外应当知道:第一句说的是以镇伏的方式远离与贪相应的八种心,第二句说的是以镇伏的方式远离其余四种不善心。巴利
Evamettha ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti. ‘‘Vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ. Agahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmoghakāmayogakāmāsavakāmupādānaabhijjhākāyagantha kāmarāgasaññojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaoghayogāsavaupādānaganthasaṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Apica paṭhamena lobhasampayuttaaṭṭhacittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo.
到这里,已经说明了初禅的舍断支;现在为了说明相应支,所以说了“有寻有伺”等话。其中,寻的特相是把心投向所缘;伺的特相是持续审察所缘。虽然这两者于任何处皆不相离,但因为寻粗显、先起,所以就像撞钟时的第一击,是心最初投向所缘;因为伺微细、以审察为本性,所以就像钟声的回响,是随后相续不断。在这里,寻是动荡的,是心刚生起时的颤动,就像想要飞上天空的鸟拍动翅膀,又像被香气吸引的蜜蜂扑向莲花;伺则运作安静,心的动荡不多,就像已经飞上天空的鸟展开翅膀,又像已经扑近莲花、在莲花上方盘旋的蜜蜂。巴利
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ savitakkaṃ savicārantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo vitakko. Ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo vicāro. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge oḷārikaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena ca ghaṇḍābhighāto viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko, sukhumaṭṭhena anumajjanasabhāvena ca ghaṇḍānuravo viya anuppabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paṭhamuppattikāle paripphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya, padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhūto cittassa, ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya, paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge.
不过在《二集注》里这样说:就像一只大鸟在空中飞行,先用两只翅膀把风兜住,再把翅膀收拢起来往前飞——寻也是这样,它以把心牢牢安放在所缘上的方式生起;又像那只鸟为了兜住风而扇动翅膀往前飞——伺也是这样,它以不断细细察看的方式生起。这是从相续不断生起的角度来说的。而这两者的区别,在初禅和第二禅里才看得清楚。再说,就像一个人抓住一个沾了污垢的铜盆,一只手紧紧握着,另一只手拿粉、油和毛刷去擦——紧握的那只手好比寻,擦拭的那只手好比伺。又像陶匠用棍子敲打轮盘,让轮盘转起来做器皿——往下压的那只手好比寻,来回移动的那只手好比伺。又像画圆时,固定在中心不动的钉子好比牢牢安立的寻,在外围转圈的钉子好比细细察看的伺。就这样,这个禅那和这样的寻、这样的伺一起生起,就像树和花、果同时存在一样,所以这个禅那被称为有寻有伺。巴利
Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ anuppabandhena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. So pana tesaṃ viseso paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti. Apica malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelavālaṇḍupakena parimajjantassa daḷhaggahaṇahattho viya vitakko, parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko, ito cito ca saṃsaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā maṇḍalaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirujjhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko, bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjano vicāro. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati.
“离生”在这里,“离”就是远离,意思是诸盖的离去。或者,“离”是指已远离的状态,也就是已远离诸盖的、与禅那相应的一整团法。因此,从远离而生起,或者在那远离中生起的,就叫“离生”。“喜乐”在这里,能使人喜悦的就是喜,它的特征是喜爱。而这喜有五种:小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜、遍满喜。巴利
Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha pīṇayatīti pīti, sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā. Sā panesā khuddikā pīti, khaṇikā pīti, okkantikā pīti, ubbegā pīti, pharaṇā pītīti pañcavidhā hoti.
在这五种喜当中,小喜只能让身体毛发竖立起来。刹那喜则像闪电一样,一刹那、一刹那地生起。继起喜就像拍打海岸的海浪,一次又一次地冲击身体,然后破碎。踊跃喜力量很强,能把身体向上提起,甚至达到腾空跳跃的程度。遍满喜的力量极其强大,当它生起时,整个身体就像被吹胀的皮囊,又像大水灌入山洞一样,被完全充满。
这五种喜在逐渐成熟时,会圆满两种轻安:身轻安和心轻安。轻安逐渐成熟时,会圆满两种乐:身体的乐和心的乐。乐逐渐成熟时,会圆满三种定:刹那定、近行定和安止定。其中,遍满喜作为安止定的根基,不断增长,并与定相应,这就是这里所说的“喜”。巴利
Tattha khuddikā pīti sarīre lomahaṃsanamattameva kātuṃ sakkoti. Khaṇikā pīti khaṇe khaṇe vijjuppādasadisā hoti. Okkantikā pīti samuddatīraṃ vīci viya kāyaṃ okkamitvā okkamitvā bhijjati. Ubbegā pīti balavatī hoti kāyaṃ uddhaggaṃ katvā ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇappattā. Pharaṇā pīti atibalavatī hoti. Tāya hi uppannāya sakalasarīraṃ dhamitvā pūritavatthi viya mahatā udakoghena pakkhandapabbatakucchi viya ca anupariphuṭaṃ hoti. Sā panesā pañcavidhā pīti gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhaṃ passaddhiṃ paripūreti kāyapassaddhiñca cittapassaddhiñca. Passaddhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhampi sukhaṃ paripūreti kāyikañca cetasikañca. Sukhaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ paripūreti – khaṇikasamādhiṃ, upacārasamādhiṃ, appanāsamādhiñcāti. Tāsu ca yā appanāsamādhissa mūlaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhamānā samādhisampayogaṃ gatā pharaṇā pīti, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā pītīti.
另一种被称为“乐”,是因为它能让人快乐;意思是说,它使生起它的那个人变得快乐。或者,“乐”是“好好咀嚼”的意思,也就是彻底咬碎、摧毁身心的病痛,所以叫“乐”,这是悦受的名称。它以甜美为特征。虽然喜和乐有时并不分离,但获得可爱对象时的欢喜是喜,体验已获得之味的感受是乐。有喜的地方就有乐,有乐的地方却不一定有喜。喜属于行蕴,乐属于受蕴。就像在旷野中疲惫的人,看见或听见树林和水时的心情像喜,进入树荫、享用水时的心情像乐。应当知道,这是就各个阶段中最明显的状态来说的。因此,这个禅那有这种喜和这种乐,或者这个禅那中有这种喜和这种乐,所以这个禅那被称为“喜乐”。或者,就像“法与律”这样的复合词一样,喜和乐合在一起就是“喜乐”。这个禅那有离所生的喜乐,或者这个禅那中有离所生的喜乐,所以也叫“离生喜乐”。正如这禅那一样,这里的喜乐也是离所生的;而这个禅那具有它,所以不拆开,只用“离生喜乐”一个词来总称,也是合理的。巴利
Itaraṃ pana sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, yassuppajjati, taṃ sukhitaṃ karotīti attho. Sukhanaṃ vā sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati, khaṇati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, somanassavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti, paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhaṃ. Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti, vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantudakadassanasavanesu viya pīti, vanacchāyāpavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati. Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampettha vivekajameva hoti. Tañcassa atthīti tasmā alopasamāsaṃ katvā ekapadeneva ‘‘vivekajaṃpītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati.
“第一”是因为按数目顺序排在最前,或者因为最先生起,所以叫第一。禅那有两种:所缘禅那和相禅那。其中,八种等至因为专注于地遍等所缘,所以被称为所缘禅那。观、道、果则叫相禅那。其中,观因为观照无常等相,所以是相禅那;道因为由观已完成的作用而成就,所以是相禅那;果因为观照灭谛的真实相,所以是相禅那。在这两者中,这里指的是前行阶段的所缘禅那,以及出世间道刹那的相禅那。因此,应当从所缘禅那、相禅那以及烧毁敌对法而理解为禅那。“具足”是达到、证得的意思,或是使之成就的意思。“安住”是以相应的威仪而住,具足上述禅那而维持个体的生存。巴利
Paṭhamanti gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Jhānanti duvidhaṃ jhānaṃ ārammaṇūpanijjhānañca lakkhaṇūpanijjhānañca. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo pathavīkasiṇādiārammaṇaṃ upanijjhāyantīti ‘‘ārammaṇūpanijjhāna’’nti saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Vipassanāmaggaphalāni pana lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma. Tattha vipassanā aniccādilakkhaṇassa upanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, vipassanāya katakiccassa maggena ijjhanato maggo lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ pana nirodhasaccaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. Tesu idha pubbabhāge ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā ārammaṇūpanijjhānato lakkhaṇūpanijjhānato paccanīkajjhāpanato ca ‘‘jhāna’’nti veditabbaṃ. Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Viharatīti tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena iriyati, vuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa vuttiṃ abhinipphādeti.
“寻与伺的寂止”这句话里,说的是寻和伺这两者的寂止、超越,也就是在第二禅那的那一刻,它们不再出现。在这里,虽然第二禅那中初禅的一切法都不存在了——因为初禅里的触等法和第二禅那里的触等法是不同的——但为了说明由于粗重支分被超越,才能从初禅证得第二禅等,所以才说“寻与伺的寂止”。“内”在这里指的是自身之内,所以意思是:在自身中生起,在自己的相续中现起。巴利
Vitakkavicārānaṃvūpasamāti ettha vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi, aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idhāti. Oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ . Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ, attasantāne nibbattanti attho.
净信:信被称为净信。因为与净信相应,禅那本身也被称为净信,就像因为与蓝色相应,衣服就被称为蓝衣一样。或者,因为那种禅那具足净信,并且由于寻与伺的波动止息,使心变得清净、生起净信,所以也被称为净信。在后一种释义中,应当把“净信”与“心的”这个词连在一起理解;而在前一种释义中,“心的”这个词则应与“心一境性”连在一起。巴利
Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ca ceto sampasādayati, tasmāpi sampasādananti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo, purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.
这里对这句话的解释是:“单独生起”,所以叫“一境”;意思是,由于不被寻和伺所控制,它以最殊胜、最顶尖的状态生起。因为在世间,最殊胜的东西也被称为“一”。或者也可以说,远离寻和伺,成为独自一个、没有伴侣,这样来理解。又或者,它让相应的心所法生起,所以叫“起”,意思是使它们生起;以最殊胜的含义来说,既是“一”又是“起”,所以叫“一境”。这是定的同义词。这样,“修习、增长这个一境”——这就是第二禅的心一境性。而这个“一境”,因为是属于心的,不是属于众生的,也不是属于命我的,所以说它是“心的心一境性”。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ atthayojanā – eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahito vā eko asahāyo hutvā itipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhapetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi. Samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti idaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa na jīvassa. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttaṃ.
难道初禅里就没有这种信吗?初禅里也有称为“一境”的定啊。那为什么唯独第二禅才说它是“心的净信”和“心一境性”呢?回答是:初禅被寻和伺的搅动所扰乱,就像水面被波浪搅得动荡不安,不够清澈,所以那里虽然有信,却不叫“净信”。也正因为不够清澈,那里的定也不够明显,所以不叫“心一境性”。而在第二禅里,因为没有寻和伺的障碍,信获得了空间,变得强而有力;又因为得到了强有力之信作为助伴,定也变得明显。因此应当知道,唯独在这里才这样宣说。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi. Atha kasmā idameva ‘‘sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti ca vuttanti? Vuccate – aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya ‘‘sampasādana’’nti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo. Tasmā ‘‘ekodibhāva’’ntipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyapaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo, tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“无寻无伺”:因为通过修习已经断除了,所以在这个禅那里没有寻;或者说这个禅那本身没有寻,所以叫“无寻”。用同样的方式,也叫“无伺”。这里有人问:“‘寻与伺的寂止’这句话,不是已经把这个意思说明了吗?那为什么还要再说‘无寻无伺’呢?”回答说:确实如此,这个意思已经成立了,但那句话并不是直接用来显示这个意思的。我们不是已经说过了吗:“为了显示从初禅超越粗重的禅支、从而证得第二禅等其他禅那,所以才说‘寻与伺的寂止’。”巴利
Avitakkaṃavicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu ca ‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’ti imināpi ayamattho siddho. Atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ ‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’nti’’? Vuccate – evametaṃ, siddhovāyamattho, na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ, nanu avocumha ‘‘oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti evaṃ vutta’’nti.
另外,这里说的“寻与伺的寂止”是这种清净信心的原因,而不是由于烦恼污垢的寂止。寻与伺的寂止也是心一境性的原因,但不像近行定那样靠断除诸盖而得到,也不像初禅那样靠禅支显现而得到。所以这句话是在说明清净信心和心一境性的原因。同样,寻与伺的寂止是这种无寻无伺的原因,但不像第三禅和第四禅那样因为根本没有寻伺,也不像眼识等那样因为本身就不存在。所以这句话也是在说明无寻无伺的原因。然而,“无寻无伺”这句话并不是在说明寻与伺的不存在,它只是在说明寻与伺的不存在。因此,前面虽然已经说过了,这里还是应当再说一次。巴利
Apica vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālussiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ, na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, na paṭhamajjhānamiva ca aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca. Na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ, vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi puna vattabbamevāti.
“定生”:从初禅的定所生,或者从相应的定所生,这就是它的意思。在这里,虽然初禅也是从相应的定所生,但只有这第二禅的定,因为远离了寻和伺的波动,极其安稳、极其清净,才真正配得上称为“定”。所以,为了赞叹这第二禅的功德,才在这里只说它是“定生”。“喜乐”:和前面所说的一样。“第二”:按照数数的顺序,它是第二个,所以叫第二;或者说,这个第二是接着初禅生起的,所以也叫第二。巴利
Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito, sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva samādhi ‘‘samādhī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā suppasannattā ca. Tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva. Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā dutiyaṃ, idaṃ dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiyaṃ.
“由喜的离贪”:“离贪”是指对前面所说的那种喜的厌离或超越。而两者之间的“和”字是集合连接词,它集合的是“寂止”,或者“寻与伺的寂止”。在这里,当它只集合“寂止”时,应当这样理解句子的连接:“由喜的离贪,以及更进一步,由寂止。”在这个连接中,“离贪”是厌离的意思,因此应当这样理解其含义:“由对喜的厌离与超越。”然而,当它集合“寻与伺的寂止”时,应当这样理解句子的连接:“由喜的离贪,以及更进一步,由寻与伺的寂止。”在这个连接中,“离贪”是超越的意思,因此应当这样理解其含义:“由喜的超越,以及由寻与伺的寂止。”巴利
Pītiyā ca virāgāti virāgo nāma vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā, ubhinnaṃ pana antarā casaddo sampiṇḍanattho, so vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā virāgā ca, kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo jigucchanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā jigucchanā ca samatikkamā cāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti, tasmā pītiyā ca samatikkamā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.
寻与伺虽然在第二禅时就已经止息了,但这里之所以这样说,是为了显示进入此第三禅的道路,同时也是为了赞叹。因为当说到“寻与伺的止息”时,就会让人明白:“这寻与伺的止息,正是进入此禅那的道路。”就像在第三圣道时,对那些其实还没有被断除的有身见等烦恼,却说“断除五下分结”,这样宣说断除是为了赞叹,也是为了激励那些为此精勤努力的人生起更大的干劲;同样地,在这里,寻与伺其实尚未止息,却说“止息”,也是为了赞叹。因此,这个意思就被表述为:“由喜的超越,以及由寻与伺的止息。”巴利
Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā, imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati ‘‘nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassā’’ti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.373; ma. ni. 2.133; saṃ. ni. 5.184; a. ni. 3.88) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tadadhigamāya ussukkānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ, evameva idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti. Tenāyamattho vutto ‘‘pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti.
“他以舍而住”:在这里,“舍”(upekkhā)来自“从旁观察”(upapattito ikkhati),意思是平等地看待,也就是不偏袒任何一方地看。因为具备那种清净、广大、稳固的舍,成就第三禅那的人就被称为“以舍而住”。巴利
Upekkhako ca viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā , samaṃ passati apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati.
舍有十种:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、精进舍、行舍、受舍、观舍、中舍、禅那舍、遍净舍。巴利
Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārupekkhā bojjhaṅgupekkhā vīriyupekkhā saṅkhārupekkhā vedanupekkhā vipassanupekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhā jhānupekkhā pārisuddhupekkhāti.
在这里,所谓“六支舍”,就是经里说的:“比丘们,在此教法中,漏已尽的比丘用眼看色之后,既不欢喜也不忧愁,住于舍,具念、正知。”(《增支部》6.1)也就是说,漏已尽的人在六个根门面对可爱和不可爱的六种所缘境时,那种不放弃本来清净状态的舍,就叫六支舍。巴利
Tattha yā ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (a. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,还有一种舍,是像经文里说的那样:“以与舍俱行的心,遍满一个方向而安住。”这是面对众生时保持中立平等的舍,名叫梵住舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.556; ma. ni. 1.77) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
不过,像这样出现在经文里的“依远离修习舍觉支”,那是与俱生诸法相应的、以中立不偏为本质的舍,这就叫觉支舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.247) evamāgatā sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,如果是像经里说的“时时作意舍相”那样提到的舍,也就是不过于紧绷、也不过于松缓的精进,这种舍就叫精进舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikarotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
不过,还有一种舍,是像《无碍解道》里说的那样来的:“有多少种行舍是依止的力量生起的?有多少种行舍是依观的力量生起的?八种行舍依止的力量生起,十种行舍依观的力量生起。”在对诸盖等进行简择、舍离、安住、执取时,处于中立状态的舍,这就叫行舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanāgahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
还有一种被称为不苦不乐舍的舍,也就是《法集论》里说的“当欲界善心生起、与舍同行时”所说的那种舍,这叫作受舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaññitā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
依经文所说“凡是存在的、已生的,他都舍断,并证得舍”,在简择中处于中立状态的舍,就叫观舍。巴利
Yā ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
不过,在欲等随附诸法中提到的那种成为俱生诸法之平等运载的舍,这就叫作“此中立舍”。巴利
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samavāhitabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
另外,像“具舍而住”这样出现在经文中的舍,即使面对最上等的乐也不会产生偏袒,这叫做禅那舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti (dha. sa. 163; dī. ni. 1.230) evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
不过,所谓“舍念清净的第四禅”这样出现在经典中的舍,它已清净于一切对立面,即使在对立面已经平息时也不起作用,这就叫作遍净舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dha. sa. 165; dī. ni. 1.232) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
在这里,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍、禅那舍和遍净舍,从含义上来说其实是一回事,就是中舍本身。只是根据各种不同的阶段状态,才有了这些区分。就像同一个人,依照男孩、青年、长老、将军、国王等不同身份而有不同的称呼。所以要这样理解:在这些舍当中,有六支舍的地方,就没有觉支舍等;反过来,有觉支舍的地方,就没有六支舍等。巴利
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassāyaṃ bhedo. Ekassāpi sato sattassa kumārayuvattherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya, tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā.
就像这些舍在义理上是一体的,行舍和观舍也是如此。那其实就是慧本身,只是按作用分成两种。譬如一个人在黄昏时进了家,听说有蛇,就拿起山羊脚棍去找。他看见蛇盘在谷堆里,仔细打量:“这到底是蛇,还是不是?”等看清了那三圈纹路,心里不再犹豫,在分辨“是蛇,不是蛇”的时候,生起了中立的心态。同样,已经开始修观的人,以观智照见三相之后,在分辨诸行是无常等的过程中生起的中立心态,就是观舍。又譬如那个人用山羊脚棍紧紧压住蛇,心里盘算:“我怎样才能既不伤害这条蛇,又不让它咬到自己,把它放走呢?”在他寻找放走办法的时候,对抓取这件事保持中立。同样,因为已经照见三相,修行者看三界就像看到大火燃烧一样,对抓取诸行保持中立,这就是行舍。这样,观舍成就了,行舍也就成就了。而这舍,正是按“分辨时的中立”和“抓取时的中立”这两种作用,才分成两种。至于精进舍和受舍,这两者彼此之间,以及与其他诸舍在义理上,则是完全不同的。这里说:巴利
Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi sā, kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā. Yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho, no’’ti avalokentassa sovatthikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo, na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadadaṇḍena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāragahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanagahaṇesu majjhattasaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnāti. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnā evāti. Āha cettha –
“ 中舍、梵住、觉支、六支、禅那、清净,
观、行舍、受舍、精进——如是十舍。
广说舍十种,依中舍等六;
慧二复加二,此四乃得成。”巴利
‘‘Majjhattabrahmabojjhaṅgachaḷaṅgajhānasuddhiyo; Vipassanā ca saṅkhāravedanā vīriyaṃ iti. Vitthārato dasopekkhā, cha majjhattādito tato; Duve paññā tato dvīhi, catassova bhavantimā’’ti.
因此,在这些舍当中,这里指的是禅那舍。它的特相是中舍。对此有人问:从含义上说,这不就是中舍吗?而中舍在初禅和第二禅里也存在,所以在那两个禅那里也应该说“具舍而住”,为什么那里没有这样说呢?因为作用不明显。在那些禅那里,它的作用之所以不明显,是因为被寻等所压倒;但在这里,这个舍不被寻、伺、喜所压倒,就像抬起头一样,作用变得明显,所以在这里说了。巴利
Iti imāsu upekkhāsu jhānupekkhā idha adhippetā. Sā majjhattalakkhaṇā. Etthāha – ‘‘nanu cāyaṃ atthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi, tasmā tatrapi ‘upekkhako ca viharatī’ti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttā’’ti? Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassa tattha kiccaṃ vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā, idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.
现在讲“具念与正知”这里:“念”就是能忆念,“正知”就是能清楚觉知。这是就人来说念和正知。其中,念的特相是忆念,正知的特相是不迷惑。虽然这念与正知在之前的禅那里也有——因为失念、没有正知的人,连近行定都达不到,更不用说安止定了——但那些禅那比较粗,就像在平地上人的心的运行容易,所以那时念与正知的作用还不明显。而第三禅因为舍掉了粗重的禅支,变得微细,就像走在刀刃上,心必须靠念与正知的作用来摄持才能安住,所以只在这里强调念与正知。还有,就像小牛被从母牛身边拉开,没人看管就又跑回母牛那里;同样,这第三禅的乐虽然已经离开了喜,如果不靠念与正知守护,就可能又回到喜,变成和喜相应。而且众生对乐容易起贪染,这第三禅的乐极其甜美,因为再往上就没有乐了。但正是靠念与正知的力量,才能对这乐不贪染,没有别的办法。要知道,为了显示这个特殊的要点,才只在这里说。巴利
Idāni sato ca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Iti puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati. Asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi, muṭṭhassatissa hi asampajānassa upacāramattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā. Oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitā eva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo – yathā dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati, evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītampi satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya, pītisampayuttameva siyā. Sukhe vāpi sattā sārajjanti, idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhaṃ tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā. Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idaṃ idheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在解释“以身体感受乐”这一句:证得第三禅的人,固然没有感受乐的作意,但即便如此,他仍有与名身相应的乐;这种与名身相应的乐,生起极其殊胜的色法,触及了他的色身。正因色身被触及,他纵使从禅那中出来,也还能感受乐。为了显示这个意思,所以说“以身体感受乐”。巴利
Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭṭho, yassa phuṭṭhattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedehī’’ti āha.
现在,在此,由于何种禅那之因、何种禅那之缘,圣者们——佛陀等——如此称赞、宣说、施设、建立、开显、分别、阐明、显示、赞叹具有第三禅的那个人,这就是其意趣。如何呢?舍具、念具、乐住。他进入第三禅而住。应当这样理解此处的句式连结。巴利
Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgipuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti. Taṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.
为什么圣者们会这样赞叹它呢?因为它值得赞叹。在第三禅里,乐已经到了极致、极其甘美,可他仍然保持舍,不会被对乐的贪著牵着走。正如喜不再生起那样,他以此正念现前,所以是具念。还因为他用名身感受那种没有杂染、圣者所爱、只有圣者才亲近的乐,所以值得赞叹。因此,圣者们为了显示这些成为值得赞叹之因的功德,就这样赞叹说具舍、具念、乐住。应当这样理解。第三,按数目顺序是第三,也因为它是第三个生起的,所以叫第三。巴利
Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhīyati. Yathā ca pīti na uppajjati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho hoti. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsārahahetubhūte guṇe pakāsentā ‘‘upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā tatiyaṃ, tatiyaṃ uppannantipi tatiyaṃ.
“由舍断乐,由舍断苦”,就是舍断身体的乐和身体的苦。“先已”,是说这舍断确实是在之前就已经完成,不是在第四禅的那个刹那。“由喜与忧的息灭”,是说心的乐和心的忧这两种也是先已息灭,也就是舍断。那么,它们是在什么时候被舍断的呢?是在四种禅各自的近行刹那。喜只在第四禅的近行刹那被舍断,苦、忧、乐则在初禅、二禅、三禅的近行刹那被舍断。因此,虽然这里没有按照舍断的先后次第来说,但依照《根分别》(vibha. 219等)中诸根的列举顺序,应当知道这里所说的乐、苦、喜、忧的舍断也是同样的道理。巴利
Sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā, pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hoti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati, dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānaṃ indriyavibhaṅge (vibha. 219 ādayo) pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如果这些受只是在各个禅那的近行阶段被断除,那为什么经中这样说:“所生的苦根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在这里,比丘远离诸欲……成就初禅而住。所生的苦根就在这里无余灭尽。所生的忧根、乐根、喜根在哪里无余灭尽?比丘们,在这里,比丘由断乐……成就第四禅而住。所生的喜根就在这里无余灭尽。”——这样岂不是把灭尽说在诸禅那本身之中吗?这是因为殊胜的灭尽。在初禅等之中,对这些受来说是殊胜的灭尽,而不只是灭尽而已。仅仅灭尽是在近行阶段,而不是殊胜的灭尽。因为当转向不同所缘时,苦根虽然在初禅近行中已经灭尽,但仍可能因蚊虻叮咬之类的触感,或因坐姿不适带来的逼迫而生起,但在安止定内则绝不会生起。或者说,在近行中灭尽的这个,并没有真正彻底灭尽,因为还没有被对立面所摧毁。而在安止定内,由于喜遍满全身,全身被乐浸润;对于被乐浸润的身体,苦根就被彻底灭尽,因为已被对立面摧毁。同样,当转向不同所缘时,忧根虽然在第二禅近行中已被断除,但因为忧根是以寻和伺为条件,在身体疲劳和心有损恼时就会生起,而在没有寻和伺时则绝不生起。它生起的地方,就有寻和伺存在。而在第二禅近行中,寻和伺尚未被断除,所以忧根在那里还可能生起,但在第二禅中则不会,因为它的生起条件已被断除。同样,在第三禅近行中,乐根虽然已被断除,但对于被喜所生起的殊胜色法所触及的身体,乐根还可能生起,而在第三禅中则不会。因为在第三禅中,作为乐之条件的喜已经彻底灭尽。同样,在第四禅近行中,喜根虽然已被断除,但由于接近第四禅,又因为已达安止之舍尚不存在,所以还未完全超越,因此喜根还可能生起,而在第四禅中则不会。也正因为如此,经中在各处都采用“在这里所生的苦根无余灭尽”这样的“无余”说法。巴利
Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti , atha kasmā ‘‘kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ, sukhindriyaṃ, somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi tesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva. Nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe, nātisayanirodho. Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānūpacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanūpatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti, sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjaneyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi domanassindriyassa, yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittūpaghāte ca sati uppajjati, vitakkavicārābhāve neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāve. Appahīnāyeva ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti, natveva dutiyajjhāne pahīnapaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhakāyassa siyā uppatti, natveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhā hoti. Tathā catutthajjhānūpacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā, appanāppattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, natveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca ‘‘etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.
这里有人问:既然这些受在各自禅那的近行阶段就已经被断除了,为什么在这里还要把它们都提出来呢?是为了把握乐受。因为这里所说的“不苦不乐”这种受,极其微细,难以辨认,没办法用乐受的方式去把握它。就好比一个牧牛人想抓住一头凶恶的牛,那头牛不管你怎么靠近都抓不住,于是牧牛人为了抓住它,就把所有的牛都赶进同一个牛栏里,然后一头一头往外赶,当那头牛按顺序出来的时候,他就说:“就是这头,抓住它!”这样就能把它抓住了。同样地,为了把握乐受,就把所有这些受都集中到一起。这样集中之后,一一指出来,就能让人认识到:“那个既不是乐、也不是苦、既不是喜、也不是忧的,就是不苦不乐受。”巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassūpacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāharī’’ti ? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ . Yā hi ayaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukha’’nti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā dubbiññeyyā na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ, tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa gahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbā gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ ‘‘ayaṃ so gaṇhatha na’’nti tampi gāhāpeti, evamevaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbāpi etā samāhari. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā ‘‘yaṃ neva sukhaṃ, na dukkhaṃ, na somanassaṃ, na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhāvedanā’’ti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.
另外也要知道,这里说这些受,是为了显示不苦不乐心解脱的缘。因为舍断乐、舍断苦等,就是它的缘。就像经里说的:“贤友,有四种缘能成就进入不苦不乐心解脱。贤友,在这里,比丘因为舍断乐……成就并安住于第四禅。贤友,这四种缘就是成就进入不苦不乐心解脱的缘。”又像在其他地方,虽然身见等烦恼早已断除,但为了称赞第三道的功德,仍然说它们是在那里断除的;同样,这里说这些受,也应当知道是为了称赞这第四禅的功德。或者也应当知道,这里说这些受,是为了以摧毁缘的方式,来显示贪和嗔离得极远。因为在这些受当中,乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。当乐等被摧毁时,以它们为缘的贪和嗔也就被摧毁了,因此就变得极远。巴利
Apica adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Sukhadukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime kho āvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458). Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ tattha pahīnāti vuttā , evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā. Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānaṃ atidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena ca sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.
不苦不乐:因为没有苦,所以是不苦;因为没有乐,所以是不乐。这里是要指出与苦、乐相对立的第三种受,而不只是说没有苦、没有乐而已。这第三种受就叫不苦不乐,也叫舍。它的特相是领纳可爱、不可爱以及与此相反的各种境况。舍念清净:就是由舍所产生的念清净。在这个禅那中,念非常清净,而这份念的清净是由舍造成的,不是由别的什么造成的。所以这就叫作舍念清净。而在这里让念得以清净的那个舍,从义理上说,应当知道就是中舍性。而且在这里,不只是念清净,一切与它相应的心所法也都是清净的,只是开示时以念为代表来说罢了。巴利
Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ. Sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha dukkhasukhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuccati. Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha satiyā pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatāti veditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.
在这里,虽然这种舍在下三禅里也存在,但就像白天虽然也有月亮,可是因为太阳光太强,把它盖住了,加上它本身柔和,又没有得到与之相应的夜晚来帮衬,所以白天里的月牙就显得不清净、不明亮;同样,这种中舍性的月牙,在初禅等里面虽然也有,却被寻、伺等敌对法的势力压住,又没有得到与之相应的舍受之夜来配合,所以显得不清净。因为它不清净,那些与它同时生起的念等法,也就像白天里不清净的月牙之光一样,都是不清净的。所以在那些禅里,连一个也不能说是“舍念清净”。但在这里,因为不再被寻、伺等敌对法的势力压住,又得到了与之相应的舍受之夜,这种中舍性的月牙就非常清净。因为它清净,那些与它同时生起的念等法,也就像清净月牙的光一样,变得清净、明亮。因此应当知道,只有这第四禅才叫作“舍念清净”。第四:按数目的顺序是第四,也因为它是第四个生起的,所以叫第四。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati, yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā, evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā alābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamajjhānādibhede aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti. Tasmā tesu ekampi ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā. Tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā. Tasmā idameva ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhi’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbatā catutthaṃ, catutthaṃ uppannantipi catutthaṃ.
这四种禅那,在前分阶段和道刹那阶段都各不相同。在前分阶段,是依等至的不同而不同;在道刹那阶段,则是依不同种类的道而不同。因为对某个人来说,初道属于初禅类型,第二道等也可能属于初禅类型,或者属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型。对另一个人来说,初道属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型,第二道等也可能属于第二禅等中的某一种禅那类型,或者属于初禅类型。这样一来,四道从禅那的角度来看,就可能相同、不同,或者部分相同。而这里的差别,是由作为基础的禅那所决定的。因为,证得初禅的人从初禅出定后修观,所生起的道属于初禅类型,而且在这里,道支和觉支都是圆满的。从第二禅出定后修观,所生起的道属于第二禅类型,但这里的道支只有七支。从第三禅出定后修观,所生起的道属于第三禅类型,这里的道支有七支,觉支有六支。从第四禅开始,一直到非想非非想处,都遵循同样的道理。在无色界中,生起的是四禅或五禅,而且那是出世间的,不是世间的,这是已经说过的。这里怎么说呢?在这里也一样,从初禅等出定,证得入流道之后,再修习无色定,在无色界中证得更高境界的人,其后生起的三种道,也都属于那种禅那的类型。如此,正是作为基础的禅那决定了这一点。不过,有些长老说:“作为观所缘的诸蕴决定了这一点。”有些说:“个人的根性倾向决定了这一点。”有些说:“导向出起的观决定了这一点。”巴利
Imāni cattāri jhānāni pubbabhāgepi nānā, maggakkhaṇepi. Pubbabhāge samāpattivasena nānā, maggakkhaṇe nānāmaggavasena. Ekassa hi paṭhamamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, dutiyamaggādayopi paṭhamajjhānikā vā dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikā vā. Ekassa paṭhamamaggo dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhāniko hoti, dutiyādayopi dutiyādīnaṃ aññatarajjhānikā vā paṭhamajjhānikā vā. Evaṃ cattāropi maggā jhānavasena sadisā vā asadisā vā ekaccasadisā vā honti. Ayaṃ panassa viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena hoti. Paṭhamajjhānalābhino hi paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppannamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko hoti, maggaṅgabojjhaṅgāni panettha paripuṇṇāneva honti. Dutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno dutiyajjhāniko hoti, maggaṅgāni panettha satta honti. Tatiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya vipassantassa uppanno tatiyajjhāniko, maggaṅgāni panettha satta, bojjhaṅgāni cha honti. Esa nayo catutthajjhānato paṭṭhāya yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanā. Āruppe catukkapañcakajjhānaṃ uppajjati, tañca kho lokuttaraṃ, na lokiyanti vuttaṃ. Ettha kathanti? Etthapi paṭhamajjhānādīsu yato vuṭṭhāya sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭilabhitvā arūpasamāpattiṃ bhāvetvā yo āruppe uppanno, taṃjhānikāva tassa tattha tayo maggā uppajjanti. Evaṃ pādakajjhānameva niyameti. Keci pana therā ‘‘vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā niyamentī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘puggalajjhāsayo niyametī’’ti vadanti. Keci ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī vipassanā niyametī’’ti vadanti.
这里接着按顺序说明。依照观的决定:干观者所生起的道,以初禅为类型;获得等至的人,不把禅那作为基础而所生起的道,也以初禅为类型;同样,先把初禅作为基础,再观种种行而引生的道,也仍是初禅的类型。在这一切情况里,七觉支、八道支、五禅支都具足。因为他们的前行观,或是与喜相应,或是与舍相应;然而在出起之时、到达行舍状态之时,就只是与喜相应的。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – vipassanāniyamena hi sukkhavipassakassa uppannamaggopi, samāpattilābhino jhānaṃ pādakaṃ akatvā uppannamaggopi, paṭhamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā pakiṇṇakasaṅkhāre sammasitvā uppāditamaggopi paṭhamajjhānikova hoti, sabbesu satta bojjhaṅgāni aṭṭha maggaṅgāni pañca jhānaṅgāni honti. Tesañhi pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatāpi upekkhāsahagatāpi hutvā vuṭṭhānakāle saṅkhārupekkhābhāvaṃ pattā somanassasahagatāva hoti.
在五禅支的分类里,以第二禅、第三禅、第四禅作为基础禅那而引生的道,随着次序不同,禅那分别是四支、三支、二支;但在所有这些道中,道支都是七支,而在第四禅时,觉支是六支。这个差别既由基础禅那的限定造成,也由观的限定造成。因为,它们的前分观也是喜俱或舍俱;而出起观则唯独是喜俱。巴利
Pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānāni pādakāni katvā uppāditamaggesu yathākkameneva jhānaṃ caturaṅgikaṃ tivaṅgikaṃ duvaṅgikañca hoti, sabbesu pana satta maggaṅgāni honti, catutthe cha bojjhaṅgāni. Ayaṃ viseso pādakajjhānaniyamena ceva vipassanāniyamena ca hoti. Tesampi hi pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatāpi upekkhāsahagatāpi hoti, vuṭṭhānagāminī somanassasahagatāva.
以第五禅作为基础禅那而引生的道,则依舍与心一境性,有两个禅支;觉支和道支则分别是六支和七支。这个差别同样是由两种决定造成的。因为在这个方式中,前分观可以是喜俱,也可以是舍俱;而出起观则唯独是舍俱。以无色界禅那为基础而引生的道,道理也是如此。不过,在这里的四禅分类中,由于没有无寻唯伺的第二禅,所以应把它排除,再按其余禅那来配合。如此,从基础禅那出定后,对任何诸行进行观察而引生的道,在临近出起的阶段,那种出起的等至会使道与自身相似,就像地面的颜色会使蜥蜴的体色与自身相似一样。巴利
Pañcamajjhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā nibbattitamagge pana upekkhācittekaggatāvasena dve jhānaṅgāni, bojjhaṅgamaggaṅgāni cha satta ceva. Ayampi viseso ubhayaniyamavasena hoti. Imasmiñhi naye pubbabhāgavipassanā somanassasahagatā vā upekkhāsahagatā vā hoti, vuṭṭhānagāminī upekkhāsahagatāva hoti. Arūpajjhānāni pādakāni katvā uppāditamaggepi eseva nayo. Idha pana catukkanaye avitakkavicāramattassa dutiyajjhānassa abhāvā taṃ apanetvā sesānaṃ vasena yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ pādakajjhānato vuṭṭhāya ye keci saṅkhāre sammasitvā nibbattitamaggassa āsannapadese vuṭṭhitasamāpatti attanā sadisabhāvaṃ karoti bhūmivaṇṇo viya godhāvaṇṇassa.
在第二种长老的说法里,从任何一种等至出定之后,观察那些等至相关的法而引生出来的道,就和那种等至相似。在这里,关于观的决定,也应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Dutiyattheravāde pana yato yato samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ye ye samāpattidhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito hoti, taṃtaṃsamāpattisadisova hoti. Tatrāpi ca vipassanāniyamo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
在第三种长老的说法里,随着自己的意乐,无论以哪一种禅那作为基础,观察了哪些禅那的法之后所生起的道,就与那种禅那相似。但是,如果没有作为基础的禅那,或者没有所观察的禅那,只靠意乐本身,这道是成不了的。在这里,关于观的决定,也应当按前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Tatiyattheravāde attano ajjhāsayānurūpena yaṃ yaṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā ye ye jhānadhamme sammasitvā maggo nibbattito, taṃtaṃjhānasadisova hoti. Pādakajjhānaṃ pana sammasitajjhānaṃ vā vinā ajjhāsayamatteneva taṃ na ijjhati. Etthāpi ca vipassanāniyamo vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
这称为正定:在四种禅那中的一境性,前期是世间的,后期是出世间的,这称为正定。法将(舍利弗)就是这样按世间和出世间两方面来开示道谛。
其中,在世间道里,所有道支都随各自的情况,以六种所缘中的某一种作为所缘。但在出世间道里,对于为证悟四谛而精进的圣弟子来说:他以涅槃为所缘、能断除无明随眠的慧眼,就是正见;他具足这样的见,与它相应、能断除三种邪思惟,并把心投向涅槃之境,这就是正思惟;他这样见、这样思惟,与它相应、能断除四种语恶行,远离邪语,这就是正语;他这样远离,与它相应、能断除三种邪业,远离邪业,这就是正业;作为他的语业和身业的清净基础,与它相应、能断除诡诈等邪命,远离邪命,这就是正命;他这样安住在由正语、正业、正命所构成的戒地上,与它相应、能断除懈怠,使未生的不善法不生起、已生的不善法被断除、未生的善法生起、已生的善法安住成就,这种精进努力就是正精进;他这样精进,与它相应、能驱除邪念,成就于身等修习身随观等的心不忘失,这就是正念;他以无上正念善加守护其心,与它相应、能摧破邪定,这样的一境性就是正定。这就是出世间的圣八支道。巴利
Ayaṃ vuccati sammāsamādhīti yā imesu catūsu jhānesu ekaggatā, ayaṃ pubbabhāge lokiyo, aparabhāge lokuttaro sammāsamādhi nāma vuccati. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena dhammasenāpati maggasaccaṃ deseti. Tattha lokiyamagge sabbāneva maggaṅgāni yathānurūpaṃ chasu ārammaṇesu aññatarārammaṇāni honti. Lokuttaramagge pana catusaccappaṭivedhāya pavattassa ariyasāvakassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ avijjānusayasamugghātakaṃ paññācakkhu sammādiṭṭhi, tathā sampannadiṭṭhissa taṃsampayutto tividhamicchāsaṅkappasamugghātako cetaso nibbānapadābhiniropano sammāsaṅkappo, tathā passantassa vitakkentassa ca taṃsampayuttāva catubbidhavacīduccaritasamugghātikā micchāvācāya virati sammāvācā, tathā viramantassa taṃsampayuttāva tividhamicchākammantasamucchedikā micchākammantā virati sammākammanto, tesaṃyeva cassa vācākammantānaṃ vodānabhūtā taṃsampayuttāva kuhanādisamucchedikā micchāājīvā virati sammāājīvo, tassāyevassa sammāvācākammantājīvasaṅkhātāya sīlabhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhamānassa tadanurūpo taṃsampayuttova kosajjasamucchedako, anuppannuppannānaṃ akusalakusalānaṃ anuppādappahānuppādaṭṭhitisādhako ca vīriyārambho sammāvāyāmo, evaṃ vāyamantassa taṃsampayuttova micchāsativiniddhunako, kāyādīsu kāyānupassanādisādhako ca cetaso asammoso sammāsati. Evaṃ anuttarāya satiyā suvihitacittārakkhassa taṃsampayuttāva micchāsamādhividdhaṃsikā cittekaggatā sammāsamādhi. Esa lokuttaro ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo.
这条与世间道一起、被称为“趣向苦灭之道”的道,因为正见和正思惟被归入“明”,其余诸法被归入“行”,所以它既是明,也是行。同样,因为前两支被归入“观乘”,其余各支被归入“止乘”,所以它既是止,也是观。又因为前两支被归入慧蕴,紧接着的三支被归入戒蕴,其余三支被归入定蕴,并且被归入增上慧学、增上戒学、增上心学,所以它既是三蕴,也是三学。具足这条道的圣弟子,就像同时拥有能看的眼睛和能走的双脚的旅人一样,成为明行具足的人;他以观乘避开沉溺欲乐的极端,以止乘避开自我折磨的极端,从而走上中道;他以慧蕴摧毁愚痴蕴,以戒蕴摧毁嗔恚蕴,以定蕴摧毁贪欲蕴;通过增上慧学成就慧的圆满,通过增上戒学成就戒的圆满,通过增上心学成就定的圆满,证得这三种成就,亲证不死涅槃。他已经进入初善、中善、后善,以三十七菩提分法宝装饰,被称为入正性决定之圣地。巴利
Yo saha lokiyena maggena dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāti saṅkhyaṃ gato, so kho panesa maggo sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappānaṃ vijjāya sesadhammānaṃ caraṇena saṅgahitattā vijjā ceva caraṇañca. Tathā tesaṃ dvinnaṃ vipassanāyānena itaresaṃ samathayānena saṅgahitattā samatho ceva vipassanā ca. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ paññākkhandhena tadanantarānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sīlakkhandhena avasesānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhikkhandhena adhipaññāadhisīlaadhicittasikkhāhi ca saṅgahitattā khandhattayañceva sikkhattayañca hoti. Yena samannāgato ariyasāvako dassanasamatthehi cakkhūhi gamanasamatthehi ca pādehi samannāgato addhiko viya vijjācaraṇasampanno hutvā vipassanāyānena kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ samathayānena attakilamathānuyoganti antadvayaṃ parivajjetvā majjhimapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno paññākkhandhena mohakkhandhaṃ, sīlakkhandhena dosakkhandhaṃ, samādhikkhandhena ca lobhakkhandhaṃ padālento adhipaññāsikkhāya paññāsampadaṃ, adhisīlasikkhāya sīlasampadaṃ, adhicittasikkhāya samādhisampadanti tisso sampattiyo patvā amataṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti. Ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇaṃ sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammaratanavicittaṃ sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ ariyabhūmiṃ okkanto hotīti.
关于谛的杂论注释巴利
Saccapakiṇṇakavaṇṇanā
在四圣谛当中,苦谛的特相是逼迫,集谛的特相是生起,灭谛的特相是寂静,道谛的特相是出离;此外,依次还有转起、令转起、还灭、令还灭的特相。同样,还有有为、渴爱、无为、见的特相。巴利
Catūsu pana saccesu bādhanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, pabhavalakkhaṇaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, santilakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃ, apica pavattipavattakanivattinivattakalakkhaṇāni paṭipāṭiyā. Tathā saṅkhatataṇhāasaṅkhatadassanalakkhaṇāni ca.
为什么只说了四圣谛,不多不少呢?因为再没有别的圣谛可以添加,而且其中任何一个圣谛都无法去除。因为在这四圣谛之外,确实不可能再增加一个圣谛,也不可能从这四圣谛中去掉任何一个。正如所说的:巴利
Kasmā pana cattāreva ariyasaccāni vuttāni anūnāni anadhikānīti ce? Aññassa asambhavato aññatarassa ca anapaneyyabhāvato. Na hi etehi aññaṃ adhikaṃ vā, etesaṃ vā ekampi apanetabbaṃ sambhoti. Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,如果有沙门或婆罗门来说:“这不是苦圣谛,另有一个苦圣谛。我要把沙门乔达摩所教导的这个苦圣谛放到一边,另外安立一个苦圣谛。”这是不可能的。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, āgaccheyya samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ‘netaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, aññaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Yaṃ samaṇena gotamena desitaṃ, ahametaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paññapessāmī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi.
比丘们,如果有任何沙门或婆罗门这样说:“这不是沙门乔达摩所教导的第一苦圣谛,我否定这个第一苦圣谛,要另外安立一个第一苦圣谛。”这是不可能的。巴利
‘‘Yo hi koci, bhikkhave, samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā evaṃ vadeyya ‘netaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, yaṃ samaṇena gotamena desitaṃ, ahametaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paccakkhāya aññaṃ dukkhaṃ paṭhamaṃ ariyasaccaṃ paññapessāmī’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1086).
另外,世尊在说明流转时,也说明了它的因;在说明还灭时,也说明了它的方法。因此,对于流转、还灭以及这两者的因,最多也就只说了这四谛。同样地,按照应遍知、应断、应证、应修习;按照渴爱的依据、渴爱、渴爱的灭、灭渴爱的方法;以及按照执著、执著中的贪乐、断除执著、断除执著的方法,也只是说了这四谛。巴利
Apica pavattimācikkhanto bhagavā sahetukaṃ ācikkhi, nivattiñca saupāyaṃ. Iti pavattinivattitadubhayahetūnaṃ etapparamato cattāreva vuttāni. Tathā pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbānaṃ, taṇhāvatthutaṇhātaṇhānirodhataṇhānirodhūpāyānaṃ, ālayaālayarāmatāālayasamugghātaālayasamugghātūpāyānañca vasenāpi cattāreva vuttānīti.
在这里,苦谛因为粗显,又是一切众生共通的,所以很容易理解,因此先说苦谛。为了显示它的因,紧接着就说集谛;为了说明“因灭则果灭”,接下来就说灭谛;为了显示证得灭谛的方法,最后说道谛。或者,为了令贪著生存之乐的有情生起警醒,先说了苦。为了说明“这苦不是无缘无故来的,也不是自在天等创造出来的,而是从这个因缘产生的”,紧接着就说集。然后,对于被有因之苦所压倒、内心警醒、寻求从苦中出离的人,通过显示苦的止息来让他们获得安慰,所以说灭。最后,为了证得灭,就说能导向灭的道。这就是它们这样的次第。巴利
Ettha ca oḷārikattā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā ca suviññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasseva hetudassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayasaccaṃ, hetunirodhā phalanirodhoti ñāpanatthaṃ tato nirodhasaccaṃ, tadadhigamūpāyadassanatthaṃ ante maggasaccaṃ. Bhavasukhassādagadhitānaṃ vā sattānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dukkhamāha. Taṃ neva akataṃ āgacchati, na issaranimmānādito hoti, ito pana hotīti ñāpanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ samudayaṃ. Tato sahetukena dukkhena abhibhūtattā saṃviggamānasānaṃ dukkhanissaraṇagavesīnaṃ nissaraṇadassanena assāsajananatthaṃ nirodhaṃ. Tato nirodhādhigamanatthaṃ nirodhasampāpakaṃ magganti ayametesaṃ kamo.
对于这些(四圣谛),应当把苦谛看作重担,把集谛看作拿起重担,把灭谛看作放下重担,把道谛看作放下重担的方法。或者,把苦谛看作疾病,把集谛看作病因,把灭谛看作病愈,把道谛看作药物。或者,把苦谛看作饥荒,把集谛看作干旱,把灭谛看作丰收,把道谛看作及时雨。此外,还可以用怨敌、怨敌的根源、拔除怨敌、拔除怨敌的方法来对应;用毒树、树根、砍断树根、砍断树根的方法来对应;用怖畏、怖畏的根源、无怖畏、证得无怖畏的方法来对应;用此岸、大水、彼岸、运送人到达彼岸的努力来对应——应当通过譬喻来了知这些。巴利
Etesu pana bhāro viya dukkhasaccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, bhārādānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanūpāyo viya maggasaccaṃ. Rogo viya vā dukkhasaccaṃ, roganidānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, rogavūpasamo viya nirodhasaccaṃ, bhesajjamiva maggasaccaṃ. Dubbhikkhamiva vā dukkhasaccaṃ, dubbuṭṭhi viya samudayasaccaṃ, subhikkhamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, suvuṭṭhi viya maggasaccaṃ. Apica verīveramūlaverasamugghātaverasamugghātūpāyehi, visarukkharukkhamūlamūlūpacchedatadupacchedūpāyehi, bhayabhayamūlanibbhayatadadhigamūpāyehi, orimatīramahoghapārimatīrataṃsampāpakavāyāmehi ca yojetvāpetāni upamāto veditabbānīti.
然而应当知道,这一切圣谛从究竟意义上来说都是空的,因为不存在感受者、造作者、寂灭者和到达者。因此这样说:巴利
Sabbāneva panetāni saccāni paramatthena vedakakārakanibbutagamakābhāvato suññānīti veditabbāni. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 确实只有苦,而没有谁在受苦;没有造作者,只存在行为本身。
有寂灭,但没有寂灭的人;有道,却找不到走在道上的人。”巴利
‘‘Dukkhameva hi na koci dukkhito, kārako na kiriyāva vijjati; Atthi nibbuti na nibbuto pumā, maggamatthi gamako na vijjatī’’ti.
前两类(苦与集)空于常、净、乐、我;不死之境空于我。
道远离常、乐、我,因此在他们之中就是空性。巴利
Dhuvasubhasukhattasuññaṃ, purimadvayamattasuññamamatapadaṃ; Dhuvasukhaattavirahito, maggo iti suññatā tesu.
或者,这三者(苦、集、道)以灭为空,而灭以其余三者为空。又或者,在这里,因以果为空:因为在集里没有苦,在道里没有灭——不像自然论者所说的自性那样,把果和因放在一起。果以因为空:因为苦与集、灭与道并不和合,不像和合论者所说的二微尘等那样,主张因与果和合。因此,这样说:巴利
Nirodhasuññāni vā tīṇi, nirodho ca sesattayasuñño. Phalasuñño vā ettha hetu samudaye dukkhassa abhāvato, magge ca nirodhassa, na phalena sagabbho pakativādīnaṃ pakati viya. Hetusuññañca phalaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ nirodhamaggānañca asamavāyā, na hetusamavetaṃ hetuphalaṃ samavāyavādīnaṃ dviaṇukādi viya. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“ 在这里,那三者以灭为空,涅槃也以那三者为空;
因以果为空,果也以那个因为空。”巴利
‘‘Tayamidha nirodhasuññaṃ, tayena tenāpi nibbutī suññā; Suñño phalena hetu, phalampi taṃhetunā suñña’’nti.
一切圣谛彼此都有共同的性质:它们都不虚妄,都是无我空,而且都难以彻底证悟。正如经中所说:巴利
Sabbāneva saccāni aññamaññasabhāgāni avitathato attasuññato dukkarapaṭivedhato ca. Yathāha –
“ 阿难,你怎么看?哪一种更难做到、更难实现呢?是有人从远处用极细的箭穿过钥匙孔,一箭接一箭,丝毫不差;还是用箭尖射穿分成七分的毫毛的毛尖?”
“ 尊者,射穿分成七分的毫毛的毛尖更难做到、更难实现。”
“ 然而,阿难,那些如实彻证‘这是苦’……如实彻证‘这是导向苦灭之道’的人,他们所彻证的才是更难彻证的。”巴利
‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññasi, ānanda, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā, yo dūratova sukhumena tāḷacchiggaḷena asanaṃ atipāteyya poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ avirādhitaṃ, yo vā sattadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyyāti? Etadeva, bhante, dukkaratarañceva durabhisambhavatarañca; Yo vā sattadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyyāti; Atha kho te, ānanda, duppaṭivijjhataraṃ paṭivijjhanti, ye ‘idaṃ dukkha’nti yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhanti…pe… ‘ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’ti yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115);
这些法彼此不同,是依据它们各自的特相来区分的。前两个(苦谛和集谛)彼此相同,因为都深奥难入、属于世间、有漏;它们的不同,则在于果和因的差别,以及一个是应当遍知的、一个是应当断除的。后两个(灭谛和道谛)也彼此相同,因为都深奥难入、属于出世间、无漏;它们的不同,则在于所缘和能缘的差别,以及一个是应当证得的、一个是应当修习的。第一和第三(苦谛和灭谛)也彼此相同,因为从某种角度来说都可以称为果;它们的不同,在于一个是有为、一个是无为。第二和第四(集谛和道谛)也彼此相同,因为都可以称为因;它们的不同,在于一个是纯粹不善、一个是纯粹善。第一和第四(苦谛和道谛)也彼此相同,因为都是有为;它们的不同,在于一个是世间、一个是出世间。第二和第三(集谛和灭谛)也彼此相同,因为都处于既非有学也非无学的状态;它们的不同,在于一个有所缘、一个无所缘。巴利
Visabhāgāni salakkhaṇavavatthānato. Purimāni ca dve sabhāgāni duravagāhatthena gambhīrattā lokiyattā sāsavattā ca, visabhāgāni phalahetubhedato pariññeyyapahātabbato ca. Pacchimānipi dve sabhāgāni gambhīrattena duravagāhattā lokuttarattā anāsavattā ca, visabhāgāni visayavisayībhedato sacchikātabbabhāvetabbato ca. Paṭhamatatiyāni cāpi sabhāgāni phalāpadesato, visabhāgāni saṅkhatāsaṅkhatato . Dutiyacatutthāni cāpi sabhāgāni hetuapadesato, visabhāgāni ekantakusalākusalato. Paṭhamacatutthāni cāpi sabhāgāni saṅkhatato, visabhāgāni lokiyalokuttarato. Dutiyatatiyāni cāpi sabhāgāni nevasekkhanāsekkhabhāvato, visabhāgāni sārammaṇānārammaṇato.
“ 智者如是,以种种相与理路,
应了知诸圣谛的同分与异分。”巴利
‘‘Iti evaṃ pakārehi, nayehi ca vicakkhaṇo; Vijaññā ariyasaccānaṃ, sabhāgavisabhāgata’’nti.
在这里,一切苦都可分为一类,因为都是生起的状态。可分为两类,因为有名和色。可分为三类,因为有不同的生有,也就是欲有、色有、无色有。可分为四类,因为有四种食的差别。可分为五类,因为有五种取蕴的差别。集也可分为一类,因为是能令生起的状态。可分为两类,因为与见相应或不相应。可分为三类,因为有欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱的差别。可分为四类,因为由四道所断。可分为五类,因为对色的欢喜等差别。可分为六类,因为有六种渴爱身的差别。灭也可分为一类,因为是无为界的状态;但从方便说,可分为两类,因为有余依和无余依。可分为三类,因为三种有的寂止。可分为四类,因为由四道所证得。可分为五类,因为五种欢喜的寂止。可分为六类,因为六种渴爱身灭尽的差别。道也可分为一类,因为应当修习。可分为两类,因为止和观的差别,或者因为见和修的差别。可分为三类,因为三蕴的差别。这个道有部分,就像城市被国土包含一样,它被无部分的三蕴所包含。正如所说——巴利
Sabbameva cettha dukkhaṃ ekavidhaṃ pavattibhāvato, duvidhaṃ nāmarūpato, tividhaṃ kāmarūpārūpūpapattibhavabhedato, catubbidhaṃ catuāhārabhedato, pañcavidhaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhabhedato. Samudayopi ekavidho pavattakabhāvato, duvidho diṭṭhisampayuttāsampayuttato, tividho kāmabhavavibhavataṇhābhedato, catubbidho catumaggappaheyyato, pañcavidho rūpābhinandanādibhedato, chabbidho chataṇhākāyabhedato. Nirodhopi ekavidho asaṅkhatadhātubhāvato, pariyāyato pana duvidho saupādisesaanupādisesato, tividho bhavattayavūpasamato, catubbidho catumaggādhigamanīyato, pañcavidho pañcābhinandanavūpasamato, chabbidho chataṇhākāyakkhayabhedato. Maggopi ekavidho bhāvetabbato, duvidho samathavipassanābhedato, dassanabhāvanābhedato vā, tividho khandhattayabhedato. Ayañhi sappadesattā nagaraṃ viya rajjena nippadesehi tīhi khandhehi saṅgahito. Yathāha –
贤友毗舍佉,并不是三蕴被圣八支道所包含。贤友毗舍佉,而是圣八支道被三蕴所包含。贤友毗舍佉,正语、正业、正命——这些法被包含在戒蕴中;正精进、正念、正定——这些法被包含在定蕴中;正见、正思惟——这些法被包含在慧蕴中。巴利
‘‘Na kho, āvuso visākha, ariyena aṭṭhaṅgikena maggena tayo khandhā saṅgahitā, tīhi ca kho, āvuso visākha, khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito. Yā, cāvuso visākha, sammāvācā yo ca sammākammanto yo ca sammāājīvo, ime dhammā sīlakkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yo ca sammāvāyāmo yā ca sammāsati yo ca sammāsamādhi, ime dhammā samādhikkhandhe saṅgahitā. Yā ca sammādiṭṭhi yo ca sammāsaṅkappo, ime dhammā paññākkhandhe saṅgahitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.462).
按入流道等来分,有四种。巴利
Catubbidho sotāpattimaggādivasena.
另外,一切谛从一种方式来看,都是真实不虚的,或者都是应当被证知的。从两种方式来看,可以按世间与出世间来分,或者按有为与无为来分。从三种方式来看,可以按见道与修道所断、无所断,以及非所断非无所断来分。从四种方式来看,就是应当遍知、应当断除、应当证悟、应当修习。巴利
Apica sabbāneva saccāni ekavidhāni avitathattā, abhiññeyyattā vā. Duvidhāni lokiyalokuttarato, saṅkhatāsaṅkhatato vā. Tividhāni dassanabhāvanāhi pahātabbato appahātabbato nevapahātabbanāpahātabbato ca. Catubbidhāni pariññeyyapahātabbasacchikātabbabhāvetabbatoti.
“ 智者当如是了知难悟的圣谛之道,
依种种门类善加通达,为利与乐故。”巴利
‘‘Evaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ, dubbodhānaṃ budho vidhiṃ; Anekabhedato jaññā, hitāya ca sukhāya cā’’ti.
现在,法将(舍利弗)按照世尊所教导的次第,在最后指出了四谛的组合,然后通过“那以了知之义为智”等语句,以四谛组合的方式,把闻所成智归纳总结并显示出来。如此,便把先前所说的“在专注听法时的慧就是闻所成智”这一切内容都归纳总结并显示出来。巴利
Idāni dhammasenāpati bhagavatā desitakkameneva ante saccacatukkaṃ niddisitvā ‘‘taṃ ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇa’’ntiādinā saccacatukkavasena sutamaye ñāṇaṃ nigametvā dasseti. Evaṃ ‘‘sotāvadhāne paññā sutamaye ñāṇa’’nti pubbe vuttaṃ sabbaṃ nigametvā dassetīti.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47